Home

Vegas User Manual

Contents

1. Project 220924022 30 00p Frame 2 878 Preview 320 240 32 30 00p Display 320 240 16 Record Time 05 09 25 INTRODUCTION CHP 1 e 23 Explorer window Alt 1 The Explorer window is similar to the Windows Explorer Use the Explorer window to select media files to drag to the project timeline or add to the Media Pool You can also use the Explorer to perform common file management tasks such as creating folders renaming files and folders deleting files and folders Use the Start Preview 1 and Auto Preview 5271 buttons to preview files before adding them to the project Select drive or folder Gi Media Jaala al OF BI a Beautiful wasteland mp3 H Mu Computer B a 3 Floppy A a Capital Dome avi l g 9 C egl Cube Clip 00T avi 7 H Dell col fireweed avi i Puls hot di Hahaha wav a implosion awi d introtabla way 4 introwarp waw S L L rnes of Kevin s f H H My Documents L of Mu Movies l Ba Program Files MBAs ai A Sbpei d musicbed wav ee windows a powderskier avi cs ID d RainstickO2_s 1 WAV Ls 3 Audio CD IE 4 Rami 03 way H G Mu Documents c sunset av Sl E Network Neighborhood been E Mu Favorites am talkinghead awi al Voice Clip O04 Preview selected media files before placing them in the project Select media to place in the project by dragging or double clicking Add media to the Media Pool b
2. lt 0 cee ees 254 Vats e e Rprerenn eater ener ehmen tam tonne Verney aaa nner eae ae ene nt TRS eee eee eee ee ore E eee 254 AdO taD yo eid Cen r Re Nha ae Ee hd eel TTT 255 RT l agar testa etactaae ht ace a Ohba Goce a ase ete amp a at T 255 Summa TTT 256 PCN OSD Ida acne cece 525 ca aearas grata ane Gat a raraes a aaa eats Gop Bee ee Re Se Ve eR EER RES 256 Setting Vegas preferences e ccc eee eee eens 256 General tab HT fhe rE SA ee ed ed ie Se ee eae eh he eae og oe 256 TT os arate Ge ae rar ep aa a een ea ea ee Re ER a 258 AUGIO TaD 6216 waa Cae ienetwtaat tae tae Leen nara tedden vas este cee OARA 258 CD SeHInCS tal te ia toed e cece tet ioe te eee ne Le Dae TT TTT 260 Sel sate Ay te tes Nh Bes setae ok cede ae Agee ne te S ee pga ca re em oe uk ae aes ta te 260 ITE me Dm E ag ve ad AR Rr RUE DE eG EE AE A A Nn L ON 261 Video device taD s sitede ciatdndenedacdnedbedbndaneiwedwad waded eideide tad ieee 262 TPROUDICSNOOUNG gcsacdtccnuenadnesenenea needa meee e 263 Troubleshooting reSOUICeS 1 0 eee eens 263 COMMON QUESTIONS cirosu Kati s oto cb are aiid at Sade dd beads 263 Why are some of my DirectX plug ins not working correctly 00c cece eee eee 263 Why do hear gaps in my audio playback 2 0 0 cee eee neee 263 Why do mono events increase 6 dB when panning a track hard e eee eee 264 Why do buffer underruns occur during a test or real write toa CD 000 eee 264 Why can t work with
3. 3 Select the drive and folder where you want to store the project 4 Type the project name in the File name box 5 Click Save CHP 16 SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 238 p Creating a copy of a project using Save As After you have been working with your project you may use the Save As command in the File menu to create a copy of the small project file with a different name Since multimedia projects can be very complex and since Vegas project files are so small saving a number of different versions of a project is a low risk way to try new techniques 1 From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog appears 2 Select the drive and folder where you want to store the project 3 Type a new name in the File name box 4 Click the Save button on the Save As dialog Saving a project with media Vegas also provides the option of saving both the project file VEG and the media files to a common location You can choose to save all media files along with the project file or allow Vegas to consolidate and trim the media for you With this second option Vegas optimizes media storage by saving only those portions of files that are used in the project and by eliminating unused takes The option to consolidate and trim media when saving is only available in Vegas Video ee ee Note Peak files sfk and audio proxy files sfapO are not saved with the project when Copy and trim media with project
4. 2 cece eee eee eee eee eens 123 RESaimple VIdEOOnRlY eiee ews Sara ae eens eet ane eine eee oe Wie Sie A 123 Reduce interlace flicker video Only 0c cece cece eee eee eee eee eee ee eens 123 Accessing event propertieS 2 00 cece eee eee eee eee eens 124 Adjusting audio channels 00 cee eee eee eee eee eens 124 Using audio event envelopes ASR 20 ccc eee eee eee eee 125 Setting an audio event S VOIUME e eee eee eee eens 125 Setting an event s fade in and out 1 eee eens 125 Using video event envelOpeS 0 eee eee tenes 126 Using opacity envelopes aera eee cretrand 98 SE Sah Be oe CORE Wie Rie ee aa eee 126 TABLE OF CONTENTS r 7 Using velocity envelopes lt e e e Sceted teed eeteeueweteeeeeas ead ehe cats 127 GIOUDING Kn TTT 128 GreatinG a MEW grouse eaea we el wae ne bee So eek et Peat fo ete a tell ed tte aie 129 Adding an event to an existing group 1 cc eee eee 129 REMOVING events from a groUp lt dee aiene diana rann n rede ew ere gece deat 8 dhe Grae we Ses 129 CleaninGa Group o oo oka Set Git oe he ta ha eth ee ee es ee 129 Selecting all members Of a group 0 eee eee eet eens 129 Disabling grouping temporarily 0 0 eee eee 129 Working with TrackS a2 o0 2 08e oe ate cade a ee eis tae eee eos eee 131 Managing tracks naana 00 eee eee eeeeennees 131 Adding AI TAO TA ee he i fae at ri cS de sae he ah cect cde aca icta
5. Color gradient event 198 Color key 208 Command markers 103 closed captioning 184 186 command bar 20 editing 105 inserting 105 Scott Studios 104 Composite level envelope 137 Composite level slider 77 135 202 Compositing 199 202 compositing modes 77 200 parent child tracks 199 203 Constant power panning model 135 Converting format See Rendering Copying events 87 time and events 88 time selections 88 Creating a movie 82 239 245 Credit roll event 198 Cropping video 177 179 Crossfades 97 98 211 automatic 97 curve types 98 curve types changing 98 manually setting 97 overlapping files added to timeline 182 sliding 98 INDEX video 211 Cursor indications 32 Customizing Vegas 251 262 frame number display 251 erid spacing 252 preferences 256 262 project properties 254 rendering settings 241 ruler 251 Time Display window 253 254 toolbar 19 Video Preview window 229 234 Cuts 211 converting to transitions 213 Cutting events 88 ripple mode 88 time and events 89 time selections 89 Deleting busses 153 CD layout bar markers 174 command markers 106 envelope points 138 events 96 keyframes 216 markers 101 regions 103 takes 114 tracks 132 Digital multitrack setup 160 DirectX plug ins 143 193 Disc at once CD burning 169 175 Docking Vegas windows 22 Duplicating events 92 generated media events 199 keyframes 216 tracks 13
6. eee Advanced Editing E Techniques aS DY ei ee This chapter builds on the techniques that were introduced in the last chapter Ripple editing pitch shifting and takes are just three of the more advanced editing topics that are covered in this chapter 6 Snapping events Vegas is preset to snap events into place as you drag them Events can snap to another event s edges to the cursor position or to a time selection Vegas also allows events to snap to grid lines and markers As you move an event along the timeline its edge automatically aligns to designated snap points At the highest level all features in Vegas can quantize to individual frames Enabling and disabling snapping You can quickly enable or disable all snapping by clicking the Enable Snapping button 75 17 on the toolbar Vegas also allows you to selectively enable and disable snapping options in the Options menu e Enable Snapping controls all snapping behavior except quantizing Options to frames Es Quantize To Frames Alt Fa e Snap To Grid controls snapping to grid markers Vegas provides a FY Enable Snapping Fe variety of grid measurements For more information see Changing grid All enabled v Snap Te Grid S e Snap To Markers Shift F8 spacing on page 252 e Snap To Markers controls snapping to markers The Snap To Customize Toolbar Markers option applies to markers regions command markers and SEO CD layout markers For more infor
7. 3 Release the mouse to set the snap offset flag Snapping to the cursor or a selection Two clips in the same track always automatically snap to their ends but how can you snap two events on separate tracks You can easily snap to specific event boundaries in any track by making a time selection for the event 1 Double click the event you want to snap to The time selection area on the ruler sets to the length of the event 2 Drag another clip in a different track near the end of the first clip It snaps into position In this example Vegas snaps the second event to the edge of the time selection Because events also snap to the cursor you could accomplish the same task by pressing ctri Alt lt or ctri ait to position the cursor on the edge of the first event Once the cursor is on the event edge you can snap the second event to the cursor ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 5 L 1 1 1 Pitch shifting audio events v Pitch shifting while preserving length is only available in Vegas Video A pitch shift is a way to raise or lower the pitch of an audio event Vegas provides two ways to pitch shift e Change pitch preserve length Shift the pitch without altering the length of the event e Change length and pitch Speed up or slow down the audio and change the pitch at the same time You can shorten the event duration and raise the pitch or lengthen the event duration and lower the pitch The semitone range in
8. After Vegas is installed and you start it for the first time the registration wizard appears This wizard offers easy steps that enable you to register Vegas online with Sonic Foundry Alternatively you may register Vegas online at www sonicfoundry com at any time Registering your product provides you with exclusive access to a variety of technical support options notification of product updates and special promotions exclusive to registered Vegas users Registration Assistance If you do not have access to the Internet registration assistance is available Please contact our Customer Service Department Registration assistance is currently available Monday through Friday from 9 00 a m to 5 00 p m Central Standard Time CST by dialing the following numbers Telephone Fax Country 1 800 577 6642 toll free US Canada and Virgin Islands 800 000 76642 toll free Australia Denmark France Germany Italy Sweden UK Netherlands and Japan 608 204 7703 for all other countries 1 608 250 1745 Fax All countries Customer Service Sales For a detailed list of Customer Service options we encourage you to visit www sonicfoundry com For support during normal office hours Telephone Fax E mail Country 1 800 577 6642 toll free US Canada and Virgin Islands 800 000 76642 toll free Australia Denmark France Germany Italy Sweden UK Netherlands and Japan 608 204 7703 for all other countries 1 608 250 1745 Fax Al
9. Generated background events The events on track 3 are Vegas generated media events Click the Generated Media button HM on each event to view the settings You can view other generated media options in the Text Backgrounds window For more information see Using generated media on page 198 Event effects The fire events in track 2 use the Spherize effect Click the Event FX button li to view the effect settings For more information see Using video effects on page 193 Parent child compositing Vegas reads the alpha channel in the simple black and white image files in track 1 parent track and uses them as masks over track 2 child track Parent child compositing using alpha masks boils down to a simple relationship the alpha mask in the parent track cuts the hole and the media in the child track fills the hole For more information see Creating masks on page 203 Video Preview a Zh Preview Quality H Ean fal Project 320240432 15 00p Frame 338 Preview 320K240e32 15 00p Display 320K240 16 Track motion This simple project shows two floating video clips moving across the screen at different speeds Generated background events The event on track 3 is a generated media event Click the Generated Media button M on each event to view the settings You can view other generated media options in the Text Backgrounds window For more information see Using generated media on page 198 Track effects Track
10. Zooming in on a still image By using keyframe animation in the Event Pan Crop window you can zoom in and out on a still image In this example four keyframes are used to zoom in on faces in an old photograph and zoom back out again A generated color gradient event masks the edges of the image during the zoom to enhance the effect For more information see Using generated media on page 198 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 14 L 21 9 1 Click the Event Pan Crop button 1 on the still image event 2 Click the keyframe controller to position the cursor for the second keyframe 3 Click the Add Keyframe button 5 Resize and move the selection area to zoom in on a portion of the image 4 Click the keyframe controller to position the cursor for the third keyframe Click the Add Keyframe button 271 Resize and move the selection area to zoom in on a different portion of the image 6 Click in the keyframe controller near the end of the event to place the final keyframe 7 Click the Add Keyframe button P 8 Right click in the selection area and choose Restore from the shortcut menu The selection area is zoomed out to include the full image for the last keyframe Preview the event in the Video Preview window Adjust the settings in the Event Pan Crop window as you preview the zoom effect First keyframe Second keyframe Third keyframe Last keyframe O 327 6 R 0 L Rx
11. 43 128 129 adding to groups 129 clearing groups 129 creating new groups 129 disabling grouping 129 moving grouped events 74 removing events from groups 129 selecting events in groups 129 Histograms 233 234 Hold keyframe 217 IEEE 1394 DV capture cards 15 69 189 235 245 246 262 Led Ignore event grouping 129 Images automatically crossfading 182 capturing in Vegas 181 230 correcting for DV pixel aspect ratios 181 creating for use in Vegas 180 creating masks from 203 creating titles from 183 default length 182 working with 180 zooming in on 218 INDEX Importing audio CD tracks 70 CD architect files 170 media from other projects 69 scanned images 70 still image sequences 71 Inserting command markers 105 empty events 92 markers 100 media 71 regions 102 time 92 video files with associated audio 72 Installation 17 system requirements 15 Interlace 267 deinterlacing 191 field order 190 243 267 reduce interlace flicker 123 troubleshooting 269 Inverting audio event 122 audio track 136 Invert track phase 78 Isolate channels 205 K Keyboard commands 28 31 cursor placement 29 83 86 edit 28 event 30 miscellaneous 31 playback 28 project file 28 selection 29 track view 31 Trimmer window 31 view 29 window view 28 Keyframe animation 198 215 event panning and cropping 218 generated text 222 track motion 225 video effects 221
12. Adjacent events Events on different tracks Punch in events gra 05 00000000 gas Crossfades You can fade one event out and fade into the next event by simply overlapping the two The duration of the transition is determined by the amount of overlap For more information see Crossfading events on page 97 Using transition effects Transition effects are more complex than a simple cut or crossfade While each effect can be customized in different ways the procedure for adding a transition effect is uniform CHP 14 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 212 Adding a transition 1 Insert a video event onto the timeline Preset 2 Insert another event so that it overlaps the first to create an Chock wipe ros Ettect automatic crossfade Dissolve Iris 3 In the Transitions window browse for a transition effect If the ee Transitions window is not visible choose Transitions from the eal m View menu Vertical Out NG 4 Drag the effect onto the crossfade between the two events The duration of a transition is automatically determined by the S e E e amount of overlap between the two events As with other events in Vegas the precise duration of a transition can be controlled by dragging the edges in and out You can also slide a transition for more precise control For more information see Sliding a crossfade on page 98 The original crossfade and the new transition effect 00 00 04 29
13. CHP 5 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES 114 Previewing and selecting takes Vegas allows you preview the takes for a given event 1 Select the event containing multiple takes 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu or from the Edit menu choose Take to display a submenu 3 Choose Choose Active from the submenu The Take Chooser dialog appears 4 Select the take that you want to preview and use the Play and Stop buttons within the dialog Vare Clip 004 Take 2 Voice Clip O04 5 To use a take select it and click OK The selected take is now the active take gt 7 Cancel Using takes to copy event attributes to a new event Play Stop You can duplicate an event and replace it with another event while retaining the attributes switches envelopes filters etc of the original Adding takes to a duplicated event in this way is an excellent method of maintaining consistency between a number of events in a project that may use a complex set of effects or plug ins First duplicate an event by holding the key while dragging an event Then replace the original event by adding the new file as a take and then deleting the original take This is a quick way to copy all the attributes of an existing event to a new event Deleting takes Individual takes can be deleted from an event at any time 1 Right click an event with multiple takes 2 From the shortcut menu choose Take 3 From the submenu c
14. Choose Delete from the shortcut menu Deleting multiple busses 1 Click the Audio Properties button on the Mixer window The Project Properties dialog appears with the Audio tab displaying 2 In the Number of stereo busses box enter the desired number of busses to appear in the Mixer window 3 Click OK All tracks assigned to a deleted bus are reassigned to the preceding bus in the Mixer window CHP 9 USING THE MIXER 184 r Routing busses to hardware You may assign busses to use specific hardware for output When you installed Vegas it automatically detected the hardware available for output on your computer For more information see Audio tab on page 258 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Audio tab 2 From the Audio device type drop down list choose Windows Classic Wave Driver ee Note If you have selected Microsoft Sound Mapper in the Audio device type drop down list on the Audio tab you will not be able to assign the bus to a different device HRY 3 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog 4 In the Mixer window click the Playback Device button on the bus you want to route 5 Choose a hardware device from the menu aa Note Multiple busses may be mapped to a single sound card n Working with busses Busses in the Mixer window are fully independent and may be adjusted separately You can adjust the bus volume change the bus meter resolution and adjust the bus fade
15. Fade out of the introtabla audio event Fade in and out of the first corporate_logo event Fade in and out of the talkinghead event very briefly Fade out from the first vegas_logo event for a duration of about one second Fade into the last vegas_logo event for a duration of about three seconds Summary In this section instant audio and video fades were created to fine tune and polish the project TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS CHP 2 L BB 8 Track Motion 08_trackmotion veg Another method of adding motion to video or still image events in Vegas is to add track motion This feature adds motion to an entire track and can be used to create picture in picture effects and scrolling motion In this project you will use track motion to spin the talking head out of the way and into a picture in picture revealing the previously covered background video Creating a picture in picture effect 1 Click the Track Motion button SJ on the Talkinghead track The Track Motion E2 Talkinghead window appears ap Level 100 0 2 On the project timeline click at the 19 400 second mark to move the cursor to this position Use the left and right arrow keys to position the cursor more precisely 19 400 corresponds to where the first part of the speaking ends The exact time may be slightly different in your recreation of this project Hj amp 0 m e 3 Make sure that the Sync Cursor button 11 in the Track Motion window keyframe co
16. Loop Maintain Aspect Ratio Resample Reduce Interlace Flicker Project 3202 Frame 460 Preview 16081 Display 7601 Resample video only Resampling allows Vegas to redraw or re render a video file and possibly to interpolate frames in an event when the frame rate of a media file is significantly different from the project s frame rate This may solve some interlacing problems and other jittery output problems For more information see Resampling video on page 187 Reduce interlace flicker video only This switch can be useful in cases where the source material didn t originate as video and contains extremely high spatial or temporal frequencies When you watch the rendered interlaced output on video of this sort of media you may see flickering or crawling edges if this switch is not applied CHP 6 WORKING WITH EVENTS 124 a Accessing event properties The properties of an event are automatically determined by Vegas and are based on the properties of the source media file In addition to the event switches mute loop etc described in the previous section event properties include playback and undersample rates for video and pitch shifting for audio 1 Right click the event to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Properties The Event Properties dialog appears The first tab in the dialog either Audio Event or Video Event contains the properties that are exclusively Vegas related The second
17. SMPTE Drop Frame 29 97 fps Video SMPTE Drop Frame timecode runs at 29 97 fps and matches the frame rate used by NTSC television systems North America Japan Use SMPTE Drop Frame format for NTSC DV D1 projects Both SMPTE Drop and SMPTE Non Drop run at 29 97 fps In both formats the actual frames are not discarded but they are numbered differently SMPTE Drop removes certain frame numbers from the counting system to keep the SMPTE clock from drifting from real wall clock time The time is adjusted forward by two frames on every minute boundary except 0 10 20 30 40 and 50 For example when SMPTE Drop time increments from 00 00 59 29 the next value is 00 01 00 02 SMPTE Non Drop Frame 29 97 fps Video SMPTE Non Drop Frame timecode runs at a rate of 29 97 fps This leads to a discrepancy between real KL 15 wall clock time and the SMPTE time because there is no compensation in the counting system as there is in SMPTE Drop Frame Use SMPTE Non Drop format for NTSC D1 projects that are recorded on master tapes striped with Non Drop timecode SMPTE 30 30 fps Audio SMPTE 30 is an audio only format and runs at exactly 30 fps SMPTE 30 is commonly used when synchronizing audio applications such as multitrack recorders or MIDI sequencers This format should not be used when working with video SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps The SMPTE Film Sync time format runs at 24 fps frames per second This
18. Vegas begins storing buffering starting playback project audio information prior to playback This storing is very fast and unnoticeable in most cases However some audio devices stutter when you begin playback as a result of the buffering process If your audio stutters when you start playback select this check box to prevent Vegas from buffering audio information prior to playback Record Automatically detect and offset Select this option to have Vegas automatically adjust for latency in Latency for hardware recording latency sound cards For sound cards that do not allow proper auto detection of latency clear the check box for this option to adjust record offset manually using the User recording latency offset Slider Adjusting the playback buffering slider The playback buffer controls how much memory is used by Vegas when playing back your project This preference is useful but must be carefully adjusted If you set the buffer size too high you may experience gapping during playback Conversely if you set the buffer size too low you may experience gapping as well because Vegas has too little memory to work with during playback The playback buffer slider should be set to balance RAM usage and playback buffering The rule is to set this slider as low as possible without introducing gapping 1 Open a project that has multiple events 2 On the Audio tab click the Playback Buffer seconds slider and move it to 0 25 Play
19. You may duplicate one track or select multiple tracks to duplicate 1 Click the track that you want to duplicate To select multiple tracks click each one while holding either the key to select adjacent tracks or the key to select nonadjacent tracks ZH EA Eate w Insert Audio Track Ctr Delete Delete Insert Remove Envelope 2 Right click and choose Duplicate Track from the shortcut menu Insert Empty Evert CHP 7 WORKING WITH TRACKS 132 gt Deleting a track You may delete a track from your project and all of the events contained on it You may delete one track or select multiple tracks to delete 1 Click the track that you want to delete To select multiple tracks click each one while holding down either the Shift key to select a range of adjacent tracks or the key to select discontinuous tracks 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete Naming or renaming a track Every track in your project has a scribble strip where you can type a name for the track The track name may be up to 255 characters long If the scribble strip is not visible you may need to increase the height of the track by dragging the track s edge to reveal it For more information see Changing track height on page 133 1 Double click the scribble strip Any existing name is highlighted on the z a G strip 100 4 o F p Level 1000 D 2 Type the new track name 3 Press to save the track s
20. fade them in and out using opacity envelopes For more information see Using opacity envelopes on page 126 PR Animating the overlay Many aspects of an overlay can be animated using the keyframes at the bottom of the Track Motion window 1 Insert a video event onto the timeline 2 Click the Track Motion button J on the track header 3 In the Track Motion window resize the overlay by dragging the handles at the edges of the overlay 4 Drag the middle of the overlay to position it This will be the size and position for the start of the animation 5 Click the timeline of the keyframe controller at a later time to move the cursor to that position ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 14 a DF E Note With the Sync Cursor button 15 enabled you can also navigate to a new position on the main timeline Vegas automatically moves the cursor on the keyframe controller to the same location E s lt lt lt 6 Reposition the overlay A new keyframe is automatically added to the keyframe controller at the new cursor position a 4 Note You can constrain your movement as you reposition the overlay by clicking the Move Freely button until it changes to Move in X only or Move in Y only P ee When you preview the video Vegas interpolates the position of the overlay between the two keyframes with a smooth animation Rotating the overlay You can also rot
21. frame rate pixel aspect ratio and field order of this file and sets the project properties to match To save this information for future use enter a name in the Template box and click the Save Template button 1 If your projects typically use these settings select the Start all new projects with these settings check box 5 Click OK to save the new project properties Saving a project When you save your work it is saved in a project file VEG Project files are not rendered media files 1 From the File menu choose Save Save As Ei ES Reha Vets l CD Audio Sample Projects Vegas Projects File name Untitled veg Save as type Vegas Project File veg lt Cancel T Copy and trim media with project The first time you save a project the Save As dialog appears In subsequent saves the above dialog is bypassed your existing file name is retained and your project is updated to include any implemented changes 2 Select the drive and folder where you want to store the project 3 Type the project name in the File Name box 4 Click Save ey Note Select the Copy and trim media with project check box to save both the project file and copies of the media files to a common location For more information see Saving a project with media on page 238 aT GETTING STARTED CHP 3 L J Renaming a project using Save As After you have been working with your project you may use the
22. l Voiceover ale ob amp 7 Oo r r RT 48 19 e Stereo bas Rec 0 0 Mono Y SB Livel Wave In DFSO Lett SB Live Wave In DF80 Right SB AudioPCl RAV Record Lett SB AudioP Cl EAV Record Aight Using the metronome Vegas has a built in metronome that marks time to help with the timing and tempo when recording a performance The metronome s sound is not mixed in the final rendering of the project Use the Preview fader in the Mixer window to control the metronome volume For more information see Using the Mixer Preview fader on page 152 To use the metronome from the Options menu choose Metronome You can customize the sound of the metronome in the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog For more information see Audio tab on page 258 Disabling playback during recording By default the project plays back while you are recording the new events There may be times where you want to turn this off To disable this feature click the Options menu and make sure Simultaneous Play amp Record is not selected Recording You may record into an empty track a time selection an event or a combination of time and event selection The recording is added to the timeline as new take and saved into a media file on your hard drive Vegas also supports triggering recording from MIDI timecode Recording into an empty track 1 Select a track Alternately to record to a new track choose Audio Track from the Insert menu 2
23. later in the project pg 73 End Displays when on the timeline the Enter a different value to cause the event to end playback sooner or event ends playback later in the project pg 73 Length Displays the total length of the Enter a different value to increase or decrease the event s playback event time Number of Takes Displays the amount of recorded Cannot be edited display only takes contained in the event Active Take Name Displays the event s current take Enter a different name for the current take pg 115 name CHP 5 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES 120 r Column Description Edit function Take Start Displays the offset into the source Enter a different value to cause the take to playback sooner or later media file when the placed event from the source media file begins playback File Path Displays the path of the event s Enter a new media file reference path for the event to use media file Tape Name Displays the name of the source Change the tape name here or in the properties dialog for the media media tape name file pg 191 Select Displays whether the event is Toggle the event s selection by clicking the check box A check mark in selected in the project the box indicates that the event is selected pg 84 Mute Displays whether the event is Toggle the event s mute switch by clicking the check box A check muted mark in the box indicates that the event is muted pg 121 Loop Displays whether the eve
24. of 0 0 e Track effects are applied to all events in a single track e Bus effects are applied to a bus including the Master bus When you add plug ins to a bus the tracks that are assigned to the bus are processed by the plug in s Since multiple tracks can be assigned to a single bus using bus level audio effects is an efficient method of applying carefully customized chains of audio effects to multiple tracks Busses reside in the Mixer window If plug ins are assigned at the track level the track s signal flows through the track s plug in s before the bus plug ins For more information see Using busses on page 152 e Assignable effects allow you to send various levels of multiple tracks to a single effect chain Like busses these controls reside in the Mixer window and support plug in chains In addition assignable effects outputs can be routed to project busses Click the Insert Assignable FX button in the Mixer window to add assignable effects to your project For more information see Using assignable effects chains on page 156 CHP 8 ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS 144 r Using plug in chains A plug in chain is a sequence of plug ins to be applied to tracks busses or assignable effects A plug in chain can contain one or more plug ins The same plug in can be added to a chain more than once Track 4 ofl Track Noize Gate Y Track EG IZ Track Compressor fo Plug ins in a chain After the plug in chain is created
25. the audio is processed by each plug in in order The plug ins are cumulative so in some cases you may want to rearrange their order to achieve the desired effect Creating a plug in chain Audio tracks have a built in plug in chain with three default plug ins applied as a default For bus effects and assignable effects however you must first create a plug in chain For assignable effects you must take the added step of creating an assignable effects chain in the Mixer window Creating a bus effects plug in chain 1 Click the Bus FX button 4 on a bus in the Mixer window The Plug In Chooser dialog appears 2 Choose a plug in and click OK The Bus FX window displays with your selected plug in as the first in the new plug in chain 3 Adjust the settings for the plug in to create the desired effect and click outside the Bus FX window to close it Creating an assignable effects plug in chain 1 Click the Insert Assignable FX button on the Mixer window The Plug In Chooser dialog appears 2 Choose a plug in and click OK The Assignable FX window displays with your selected plug in as the first in the new plug in chain 3 Adjust the settings for the plug in to create the desired effect and click outside the Assignable FX window to close it Adding plug ins to a plug in chain There are two ways to add plug ins to a chain via the Plug In Chooser dialog and via the Plug Ins window Adding plug ins via the Plug In Chooser dialo
26. 00 00 03 29 00 00 04 29 00 00 03 29 L Ranar K Aon One of the fastest ways to convert a crossfade to a transition event is to right click the automatic crossfade choose Transition from the shortcut menu and choose the transition that you want to insert e g Insert Sonic Foundry Iris Some transitions also have their own shortcut keys On the numeric keypad press to insert a crossfade to insert a dissolve and to insert a linear wipe Holding the ctrl key while pressing any of these keys converts the transition to a cut at the cursor position Adding a transition to the end of an event Typically a transition occurs between two events on a track but transitions can manan morn also be used to fade to and from the background whether that is an underlying 3 i image video or background color For example you can drag a Clock Wipe c s Is transition to the end of a video event and have the wipe go from the video event to black Understanding track layers Transitions can also be viewed and modified in a different mode Click the Expand Track Layers button to expand the track to reveal three layers within the main track These layers are called A roll B roll and Transition roll A roll abs Transition roll E B roll The concept of an A B roll is fundamentally different from the Vegas multitrack philosophy Every track is in some way mixed composited into the final output in a multitrac
27. 110 to grid lines 109 to marker lines 109 to the cursor 110 Solid color event 198 Soloing assignable effects chains 156 busses 155 solo button 77 78 tracks 136 Splitting 94 95 all events at cursor 94 selected events 94 time selection 42 95 Square pixels 190 Status bar 22 58 142 Streaming media commands 104 for RealPlayer 104 for Windows Media 104 184 Summary tab 256 Switches 121 123 invert phase 122 lock 121 INDEX loop 121 maintain aspect ratio 123 mute 121 normalize 122 reduce interlace flicker 123 resample 123 Sync tab 261 advanced control settings 261 Synchronizing MIDI timecode 160 165 System requirements 15 Takes 113 adding files as 113 copying event attributes using 114 deleting 114 displaying names of 114 previewing 114 recording audio as new 162 renaming 114 selecting 113 Technical support 16 Test pattern creating when printing to DV tape 246 event 198 Text credit roll event 198 keyframing 222 text event 198 Text Backgrounds window 27 titles 182 Time Display window 20 253 254 changing color 253 changing time format 253 MIDI timecode settings 254 Time selection 85 copying 88 cutting 89 editing 41 recording into 163 with events 86 Timecode MIDI 160 165 261 262 video 269 Timeline adding media to 71 moving events along 73 playback on external monitor 235 print to DV tape from 246 T
28. 16 bit data Clipping causes sound to distort GLOSSARY APPENDIX B An acronym for COmpressor DECompressor A codec is an computer algorithm that is used to compress video and audio data shrinking file sizes and data rates Compositing Compositing is the term used to describe the way separate video sources are mixed together Overlay titles are composited onto a background video sequence Crossfade Mixing two pieces of overlapping audio or video by fading one out as the other fades in Cutoff frequency The cutoff frequency of a filter is the frequency at which the filter changes its response For example in a low pass filter frequencies greater than the cutoff frequency are attenuated while frequencies less than the cutoff frequency are not affected DC Offset DC Offset occurs when hardware such as a sound card adds DC current to a recorded audio signal This current causes the audio signal to alternate around a point above or below the normal infinity dB center line in the sound file To see if you have a DC offset present you can zoom all the way into a sound file and see if it appears to be floating over the center line Decibel dB A unit used to represent a ratio between two numbers using a logarithmic scale For example when comparing the numbers 14 and 7 you could say 14 is two times greater than the number 7 or you could say 14 is 6 dB greater than the number 7 Where did we pull that 6 dB from Engineers use
29. 29 97p Display 360 240 16 a n Note The alpha channel is saved as a selection area in some programs If you cannot save the alpha channel use a black background and Vegas will create a mask from the background The alpha channel of TGA images may not be detected automatically For more information see Modifying media file properties on page 191 nnn A CHP 12 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 184 Fading titles Another common technique is to fade a still title in and out This effect can be accomplished by using an Opacity envelope on a title event For more information see Using opacity envelopes on page 126 You may also create multiple title images and then use crossfades or custom transitions between them For more information see Using transition effects on page 211 Adding closed captioning to Windows Media Video WMV files Closed captioning makes your final video accessible to a wider audience You can use text commands to add captions line by line to a Windows Media Video WMV file or for longer projects you can add captioning from a script Adding closed captioning line by line 1 Position the cursor where you want the closed captioning text Command Piani EE to appear Imie x 2 From the Insert menu choose Command The Command Properties dialog appears Command TEXT Parameter To be or not to be That is the question 3 From the Command drop down list choose Text mnn 4 In the Parameter box en
30. CD ROM in the Sample Projects Tutorial folder The video length is approximately forty seconds As you work you will see how easy it is to master the powerful features that Vegas has to offer Some of the techniques are only briefly demonstrated here however and many complex operations are described in a sentence or two There are nine separate sections in the tutorial Each section has a completed project file included on the CD ROM When you have worked through section 1 Voiceover narration your project should look something like the included project file 01_voiceover veg These complete project files can also be used as references if you find any of the explanations in this chapter to be unclear If you make a mistake during the tutorial just undo it by pressing ctri z The following resources outside of this chapter may be useful as you work Map of the user interface pg 19 Glossary of terms pg 273 Hold the mouse pointer over items in the user interface to see ToolTips that display the names of the various controls Press and click an item for a What s This help definition CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS 36 r Installing the tutorial 1 Insert the Vegas CD ROM 2 Locate the Sample Projects Tutorial folder on the CD ROM and copy it to your hard drive 3 After the folder is copied start Vegas re Note After copying the files to your hard drive you may need to re establish the source media file link
31. Change relative keyframe spacing Make fine fader adjustments CHP 1 Keys Description Fi Shortcut menu Shift F1 Rebuild audio peaks Alt drag Move both region markers or audio CD keyframes track region markers Ctrl drag fader Keys Shift F10 F5 Alt drag region marker INTRODUCTION S Mouse wheel shortcuts Description Keys Zoom in out on timeline Default mouse wheel behavior Zoom in out in Event Pan Crop or Track Default mouse wheel behavior Motion windows Vertical scroll Ctrl wheel Horizontal scroll Shift wheel Move the cursor in small increments Ctrl Shift wheel Move cursor one frame at a time Ctrl Shift Alt wheel Auto scroll Press mouse wheel and move mouse left or right Move fader slider Hover over fader and use wheel Move fader slider with fine control Ctrl hover over fader and use wheel Cursor indications The cursor in Vegas changes depending on which functions are available In Windows for example the cursor changes to an hourglass when the system is busy Cursor Indicates Modifier Description Standard none This is the standard arrow cursor that means events can be L dragged Trim none Position the cursor over the edge of an event and drag to trim the event shorter or longer Slip Trim Alt Position the cursor over the edge of an event press Alt and drag to Ht trim The media within the event moves with the edge This is useful to preserve the beginning or end of an event while trimming Str
32. Events are placed on tracks and determine when sound or images start and stop Multiple audio tracks are mixed together to give you a composite sound that you hear Multiple video tracks are composited on top of each other to create the final video output U Law u Law mu Law is a companded compression algorithm for voice signals defined by the Geneva Recommendations G 711 The G 711 recommendation defines p Law as a method of encoding 16 bit PCM signals into a nonlinear 8 bit format The algorithm is commonly used in European and Asian telecommunications p Law is very similar to A Law however each uses a slightly different coder and decoder Undo Buffer This is the temporary file created before you do any processing to a project This undo buffer allows the ability to revert to previous versions of the project if you decide you don t like changes you ve made to the project This undo buffer is erased when the file is closed or the Clear Undo History command is invoked Undo Redo These commands allow you to change a project back to a previous state when you don t like the changes you have made or reapply the changes after you have undone them The ability to Undo Redo is only limited by the size of your hard drive See Undo Buffer Undo Redo History A list of all of the functions that have been performed to a file that are available to be undone or redone Undo Redo History gives you the ability to undo or redo multiple functio
33. For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 215 CHP 12 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 178 Open the Event Pan Crop window by clicking the Event Pan Crop button on the event Event Pan Crop Event Pan Crop mountains Presets Preset LIntitled 7 LL x Show Properties a ll 70 0 l Size R H i a a Rotation area Normal Edit Tool x fs E E fies Z a OE Ske a Zoom Edit Tool t4 Center l i gt foi fs E Enable Snapping 3 Saa Lock Aspect Ratio joo Z Size About Center E Selection area 1000 Z Magnify view 2 KE e GT s 32 lt T m Handles Grid density i B Source IZ Maintain aspect ratio IZ Stretch to fill frame Move Freely or Move in X or Y only Smoothness Pasition Keyframe controller BILE OO Odo Note If any controls shown in the figure above are not visible enlarge the Event Pan Crop window by dragging the lower right corner until all controls are revealed SSE ee The Smoothness control and the keyframe controller are used when adding keyframe animation to create panning zooming or scrolling effects For more information see Animating event panning and cropping on page 210 Cropping Cropping is the process of removing the outside edges from an image or video thereby re framing the subject In the following example the E
34. Keyframe controller 215 navigating 216 Keyframes adding 216 changing relative spacing 217 deleting 216 in track view 77 217 218 interpolation curves 217 modifying 216 Keying 208 k N Labeling busses See Naming busses Labeling tracks See Naming tracks Level slider See Composite level slider Locking events 121 to track envelopes 141 to track keyframes 218 Loop playback 86 Looping events 121 Luminance 207 Main window 19 Make compositing child 77 200 203 205 Marker bar 20 Markers CD layout markers 106 command markers 103 deleting 101 inserting 100 moving 101 navigating 101 renaming 101 snapping 109 Markers and regions 100 106 snapping events to 109 Masks 203 209 fine tuning 205 image 203 mask generator 206 video 204 Match media settings 66 190 Media files auto preview setting 68 inserting 71 previewing 68 properties 191 Media generator 198 199 adding 198 duplicating 199 Text Backgrounds window 27 Media Pool 25 68 adding media 69 adding still image sequences 71 capturing video 69 extracting CD audio 70 getting images 70 replacing media in events 69 Metronome 162 258 MIDI clock output 262 MIDI timecode input devices 261 output devices 262 Time Display window 254 triggering from 165 Mixer 24 151 busses 152 preview fader 152 toolbar 152 viewing hiding 151 Mixer setup external 160 Mixing multiple track
35. Machinery a_OO003 tga lt l Machinery a_O0004 toa lt l Machinery ai_00005 tga l Machinery ai _O000E tga lt l Machinery a_OO007 toa lt l Machinery a_OO008 toa lt l Machinery ai_00009 tga lt l Machinery a_0001 U tga lt l Machinery ai_00011 tga File name Recent ISSO AGouh Streams 1 Length Length Still TARGA File type Audio Video Edsa E hiene media fram egas project tles imta curent project range 0 20 Media files may be added to your project from the Explorer or Media Pool by double clicking them or by dragging them Either method places the media file in an event in its entirety in the timeline Dragging a media file to the timeline You can create a new track by dragging a media file to a blank area on the timeline and dropping it in place Vegas tracks can contain multiple events so you can place different events next to each other on a track 1 S 4 Note Video and audio events cannot be placed on the same track S N Locate a media file in the Explorer or Media Pool 2 Drag the media file to the timeline An event for the media file appears where you released the mouse Dragging multiple media files to the timeline 1 CHP 3 Select multiple media files in the Explorer or Media Pool Select a range of adjacent media files by holding down the key and clicking the first and last files in the range or select files that are not adjacent by holding
36. P Shadow ESS et ea UE I os 4 a Ple Soas 00 00 19 900 8 Select the Shadow check box This adds a drop shadow behind the track s contents T Glow 9 Click the last keyframe on the Position bar of the Keyframe controller In the Angle box type 360 This will make the track rotate fully in the half second between the two final keyframes 10 Close the Track Motion window The new track motion keyframes appear just below the Talkinghead track You can adjust track keyframes right on the track For more information see Working with keyframes in track view on page 217 Preview the new track motion effect As a result of these track motion Track keyframes settings the talkinghead event will quickly shrink from full screen to a smaller window and rotate into a new position in the lower left corner revealing the underlying background video Summary In this section you added track motion to create an animated picture in picture effect of the talking head narration Keyframe animation techniques were used and a drop shadow was added behind the picture for emphasis As a result of these changes the previously hidden background video was revealed TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS CHP 2 57 9 Velocity 09_velocity veg Speeding up and slowing down a video event in Vegas can be done in a number of ways One of the easiest is to use a velocity envelope We will use this feature to speed up the powderskier event and
37. Place the cursor on the timeline where you want to begin recording 3 Arm the track by clicking the Arm for Record button on the track If this is the first time you arm a track for recording in this project Vegas prompts you to identify the location where the new audio files will be saved For more information see Arming the track for recording on page 161 4 Start recording by clicking the Record button on the transport bar Depending on the recording selection a waveform is created along the timeline as you record into the armed track s SIS gt a jo SE os os L Start stop L Stop recording Eez S Recorded waveform recording 5 Stop recording by clicking the Record button 19 again or the Stop button 1 on the transport bar RECORDING AUDIO CHP 10 L 1 0 3 6 A small dialog opens displaying the name and location of the file or files that were just created Click Done to return to the main workspace Recorded Files E x C PROGRAM FILESSONIC FOUNDRYSYEGAS 3 04 Delete removes selected file Delete Rename Delete All Rename changes the name of a selected file Delete All removes all files in dialo IZ Show after every recording session D g one returns to track view When a check mark appears in this box Vegas displays this dialog after each recording session n Note The Recorded Files dialog does not appear if you are triggering from MIDI timecode as this would interru
38. Setting Project Prop PHE 226 seo Ha lt XC eden bee eh Lee oe ole bathe aad ad T ed ees 170 Setting DrElerenCeS d s04sndse der ieasenndeeduedadebedswataduusoe dE AR AR A A R 170 importing CD e RI e lT 170 Creating audio CD layout projects 000 cece eee eee eee 171 Adding media as CD tracks to a new project 20 cece eee eee eeaee 171 Marking tracks in an existing Project 0 c cece ee eee 172 Working with tracks and indices 0 00 cece eee eee teen eeeees 173 Navigating to and selecting tracks and indices cee cece eee ee ee eee eee nena 173 Moving track and index markers 0 00 ccc eee eee 173 Renaming track and index markers e e eee eee 173 Deleting track and index markers e e eee eee eee 174 Editing markers using the Edit Details window 00000000e eee cece eee eee eee 174 Copying a track list from the Edit Details window 0000 c cee eee eens 174 SUING Ses H ee Ane ear aah ea a eee de ek ia aca te ean eee 174 BUMINING SINGS TACKS TTT 174 Burning a diS astute whore ku aie nar bee ieee eee Re Soe Abe eee oe bee es ees ae ae aes 175 Using Advanced Video Features 0000 eee eee 177 COD DING Ke e eax e inate tie Pate Hee Ge oa eae ok ae ee Ge E E 177 CHOPIN adiere rnea 465 5 Set earn BEAR ee es oa eee poe eee eS eee eas 178 ROLNO A E A mie Mote e einer O cso ess R Gan oie bale Sa ems Gale Sade eS a ee 179 AGGING AnIMALION stares eeu a eee See ie
39. Several effects plug ins are applied to Bus C the bus to which the guitar melody tracks are routed The Master bus also has several plug ins assigned to it Click the Bus FX button 44 on Bus C or the Master bus to view the effects settings For more information see Using audio effects on page 143 TV spot This short TV spot uses several video files Vegas text generators a background image and the rendered audio file from the Audio mix project Markers Markers are used to flag different key points in the spot For more information see Adding project markers and regions on page 100 CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS GQ r Video event envelopes Opacity envelopes are used to fade in and out of each of the text generator events For more information see Using video event envelopes on page 126 Crossfades Crossfades occur between the first three video events on track 4 For more information see Crossfading events on page 97 Event effects The final event on track 4 ricepaper background image has a Sepia effect applied to it Click the Event Fx button lt lt on the event to view the effect settings For more information see Using video effects on page 193 Text generators wearers Video Media Generator Sonic Foundry Text Frame size fess x faso Length foo 00 05 16 E k Vegas text generators provide the text events on tracks 1 2 and 3 Click re ed J ux v lZ SONIC FOUNDRY Text About the Gene
40. Test only do not burn CDs EIS T Burn speed Mav 7 2 Select the options for burning the Video CD e Select the Render loop region only check box to burn only a portion of your project e Select the Stretch video to fill output frame check box to have Vegas reformat your video so that it fills the output frame size listed in the Description field When the check box is cleared Vegas maintains the current aspect ratio and adds black borders to fill the extra frame area letterboxing e Clear the Fast video resizing check box if you see unacceptable artifacts in the rendered video Turning off this option can correct the artifacts but it increases rendering time e From the Burn speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to record The Max option records using the fastest speed possible with your drive Decrease the speed if you have difficulty recording 3 Click OK SS 4 Note You can use this same command to burn an existing MPEG file to a Video CD Select the Use an existing file option in the Burn Video CD dialog to record an MPEG aa SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 16 L 249 Burning multimedia CDs V CD burning is only available in Vegas Video You can render and burn your finished project to a CD in one step Vegas provides the options of embedding the finished video in an HTML file or including a media player installer on the CD 1 From the Tools menu choose Burn CD and
41. Vegas is 24 to 24 Twelve semitones equal one octave so you may increase or decrease the pitch of an event within a two octave range Within each semitone is a finer pitch adjustment called cents There are one hundred cents in one semitone Change length and pitch Original event N Event with pitch shift of 12 or one octave speeds up N Event with pitch shift E of 12 or one octave slows down 1 Right click an audio event to display a shortcut menu Properties KE Audio E vent Media Active take name Voiceover Take 1 3 From the Method list select Change Pitch Preserve Length or Change Length and Pitch Time stretch pitch shift Method Change pitch preserve length lt 2 From the shortcut menu choose Properties 4 Adjust the pitch shift in the Semitone Cents or both by using the arrows or by typing the desired value Semitones Cents 37 5 Select the desired crossfade mode from the Crossfade drop down list Crossfade Autofade for Voice r 6 Click OK to set the pitch shift for the event Cancel CHP 5 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES 112 a Time compressing stretching events Time compressing stretching audio while maintaining pitch is only available in Vegas Video Time stretching and compressing events is the process of using the same amount of source media to fill a shorter or longer event While this can be done to both video
42. a time range 2 Click the Cut button W on the toolbar Cutting selected events When cut selected events are reproduced and placed on the Clipboard Time information is also placed on the Clipboard When cutting selected events ripple edit mode has no effect on later events Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut Events after cut in ripple edit mode W2 0000 19 24 DU DWZ29 00 00 19 25 i DU 0UZ29 00 00 19 29 00 00 24 29 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 Cutting a time selection 89 Events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the Clipboard Time information is also placed on the Clipboard When cutting a time selection ripple edit mode affects the position of material on all tracks after the cut Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut 00 00 1925 L v Cutting a time selection and events Events after cut in ripple edit mode af ee puguin p Events and portions of selected events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the Clipboard Time information is also placed on the Clipboard When cutting a combination of time selection and event selection ripple edit mode affects the position of material on the tracks of selected events after the cut Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut CHP 4 7 I 00 00 24 23 T Events after cut in ripple edit mode W2 0000 24 29 BAS
43. added end to end across time with no overlap For more information see Creating a slide show on page 182 Cut to overlap conversion Sets the behavior of the cut to overlap feature The cut to overlap feature allows you to transform a cut from one event to another into a transition For more information see Converting a cut to a transition on page 213 e Amount Sets the duration of the extended overlap e Alignment Determines the direction of the extension To Cursor Centered on Cursor From Cursor CUSTOMIZING VEGAS CHP 17 a 261 Sync tab These preferences are used to set up Vegas to generate or trigger from MIDI timecode from external MIDI devices For more information see Synchronizing MIDI timecode on page 160 More details of each preference are discussed later in this section Generate MIDI Timecode settings Sets the output device and frame rate that Vegas uses when generating MIDI timecode Generate MIDI Clock settings Sets the output device that Vegas uses when generating MIDI Clock information This device may be set to the same one that you selected for Generate MIDI Timecode settings Trigger from MIDI Timecode settings Sets the input software or device and frame rate that Vegas uses when triggering from MIDI timecode n DZ Note When Sync is active triggering from MTC media files are not closed i e cannot be edited outside of Vegas when Vegas is not the active application You will also not be prompted
44. along the timeline You can move events along the timeline individually or as a group Events may overlap each other or be placed on top of each other You can crossfade overlapping events automatically or with envelopes CHP 3 GETTING STARTED 74 Moving an event You can move an event along the timeline within a track or move it to a different track 1 Drag the event along the timeline If you move the event alonge the original track s timeline the event s appearance color remains the same r r K N lt o However you may move the event to a different track When you do the event appears as a simple outline and you will see its original track and position on the timeline Once you release the mouse the event assumes the new timeline position and track color an Puen Original track position Lk _ _ New track and position 2 Release the mouse to place the event Moving multiple events You can move multiple events along the timeline within a track or move them to a different track Selected events do not need to be within the same track Use the key the key or the Selection Edit Tool 751 to select multiple events and drag them To select all events on the track after a given event right click the event and choose Select Events to End For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 84 Moving events by small increments To move an event more precisely click the event and
45. and audio events the two cases are fundamentally different 1 Hold the key 2 Drag the edge of the event toward the center of the event to compress shorten it or drag the edge out away from the center to stretch lengthen it You can see the results of the time compression or stretching by viewing the properties of the event Right click the event and choose Properties from the shortcut menu Time compressing stretching an audio event affects the Time stretch pitch shift settings while Time compressing stretching a video event affects the Playback rate setting _ SS 4 Note You can time compress stretch several events at once by grouping them first For more information see Grouping events on page 128 SS SSS Time compressing stretching video Time stretching video allows you to fill a given duration with a set amount of actual video sometimes called fit to fill For example if you have a five second video event and you want this event to fill an eight second slot hold the key and drag the edge of the event to eight seconds The resulting video is in slow motion but the contents footage remain the same If you had used a velocity envelope to slow the video to the same rate the event would also be in slow motion but its duration would remain unchanged at five seconds Stretched video has a zigzag line between thumbnails Video can also be compressed sped up and shortened in length by using this method 00 00 40 0
46. and lower bounds For help on the different controls in the plug in click the Plug In Help button F in the Video FX window to access online help For more information see Using video effects on page 193 Video Preview eer la a Preview Quality 23 Ea Tal Out of range colors appear in the shaded areas of the luminance histogram T Mean 36 848 Standard Deviation 15 934 Project S20K240e32 29 970 Frame 1 259 Preview 320K240e32 29 9 p Display 320K240 16 Previewing in a player You may create a full quality preview that automatically plays in the appropriate media player You can preview the entire project or select a portion 1 To preview a portion of the project create a selection containing the portion you want to preview 2 From the Tools menu choose Preview in Player Preview in Clete 2 x 3 Select the type of preview file to create Select a Preview asi Video tor Windows avi S template or click the Custom button to configure any Template NTSC DV Z Cancel_ compression options Description fAudio 48 KHz 16 bit Stereo PCM aoe uncompressed i R Video 29 97 fos 7209480 Lower field first lt 4 To preview just a portion of the project verify that z Render loop region only is selected To create a preview of Y ender loop region only the entire project clear this check box T Stretch video to fill output frame size do not letterbox b Click OK A progress bar
47. and place portions of it on a track You can also add regions and markers to a file preview the media file or open it in an external audio editing program Clear Trimmer Remove Current Media From History Trimmer History Trimmer Region Sort Trimmer Save Markers Regions history History Open in z Capital Done hei C 4 Media J A x 44 Audio Editor Marker Loop region or E E eel creer ee eee rene E ere on Selection area Media file 4 oo CAE Zoom controls Loop l gt al aw Gg 00 00 00 20 Trimmer m Playback Cursor Add media Add media controls navigation from cursor up to cursor You can open any number of files in the Trimmer at the same time selecting the one you currently want to work on from the Trimmer history drop down list From the View menu choose Trimmer or press to display the Trimmer window if it is not already visible The Trimmer window may be placed in the window docking area of Vegas or float over the work area For more information see Window docking area on page 22 Opening a file in the Trimmer 1 Right click an event A shortcut menu appears 2 Choose Open in Trimmer You can also drag files to the Trimmer from the Explorer or the Media Pool CHP 5 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES 118 yz _ Double clicking a file to open it in the Trimmer You can set Vegas to open a file in the Trimmer when you double click the file in the Media Pool or Explorer wi
48. applying short 10 mS default fades to trimmed audio Zipper noise Zipper noise occurs when you apply a changing gain to a signal such as when fading out If the gain does not change in small enough increments zipper noise can become very noticeable Vegas fades are accomplished using 64 bit arithmetic thereby creating no zipper noise APPENDIX B GLOSSARY GLOSSARY APPENDIX B Index A B roll See Tracks Track layers Add channels panning model 135 Adding empty tracks 131 Alpha channel 207 in images 180 183 selecting type for media file 180 Animation 198 Arming tracks to record 78 161 ASR See Envelopes Assignable effects 143 156 157 assigning tracks to 157 routing to busses 157 volume adjustment 157 volume envelope 137 Audio CD tab 256 Audio channels 124 Audio editor program 106 107 opening from Trimmer 118 opening from Vegas 106 setting up 106 Audio effects 143 149 adding via Plug in Chooser dialog 144 adding via Plug in Explorer window 145 assignable effects 156 157 bypassing plug ins 147 creating a plug in chain 144 Plug Ins window 27 rearranging chain order 146 removing plug ins from chain 147 Audio preferences 258 advanced control settings 259 playback buffering slider 259 Audio property settings 255 Audio proxy files 267 Audio tab 255 Auto crossfades converting to transitions 212 Autosaving 239 AVI bit depth 245 B C Capturing images
49. audio editor are permanent and are reflected in the event in your Vegas project 1 Select the event to be edited 2 From the Tools menu choose Audio 3 From the submenu choose Open in Audio Editor BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L 107 CHP 4 Your selected audio editing application opens the event s referenced media file Make the necessary changes and save the file in the audio editor If you keep the media file s name and location the same its event is updated immediately in your Vegas project However if you change the media file s name or location Save As you must import the edited new file into Vegas Opening a copy of a file in an audio editor You can also create a copy of an audio file and open it in an audio editor Opening a copy of a file has the advantage of preserving the original file unchanged The modified copy is inserted into the event as a take and is automatically added to the Media Pool 1 Select the event to be edited 2 From the Tools menu choose Audio 3 From the submenu choose Open Copy in Audio Editor When you are finished editing save the file Vegas adds Take X to the end of the filename to distinguish it from the original and adds it to the project as a take If you save it to a new file Save As you must manually add it as a take into the project For more information see Working with takes on page 113 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 109
50. be accessed by choosing Preferences from the Options menu This dialog contains seven tabbed pages General Video Audio CD Settings Editing Sync and Video Device The following sections explain the settings on each tab General tab The General tab includes a variety of settings The following is a list of these preferences and their meaning An x means this preference is selected by default Default Preference Description X Automatically open last project When Vegas is run the last project saved automatically opens on startup X Show logo splash screen on Briefly shows the Vegas logo while the program is loading The startup logo does not increase loading time Show active take name in Display the name of the take that is active in an event events X Draw waveforms and frames Draws a graphical representation of an audio file s waveform in events and thumbnail images of a video file s frames X Show video event button Shows hides the Event FX Pan Crop and Generated Media buttons on video events X Animate video frames in Animates the thumbnail representations of frames in a media Trimmer file opened in the Trimmer This can visually aid trimming X Prompt to keep files after Opens a dialog where you can enter a name and select a recording location where audio will be saved after recording into a track CUSTOMIZING VEGAS CHP 17 a 287 Default CHP 17 X N A N A Preference Create undos for FX paramete
51. be set by clicking the Properties button on the toolbar and choosing a Prerendered files folder in the Project Properties dialog Ideally this folder should be on a different physical drive from where Windows is installed Prerendered preview files can be deleted from your hard disk by choosing Clean Up Prerendered Video from the Tools menu CHP 15 PREVIEWING VIDEO 232 yz Building dynamic RAM previews Dynamic RAM previews are only available in Vegas Video Vegas automatically drops video frames when previewing if the computer can t keep up with processing demands This means that you may not be seeing all video frames as you preview your project If you prefer not to prerender your project there is another option for improving previews of selected portions of a project Vegas dedicates a portion of your RAM to cache video frames that Vegas cannot render in real time Vegas automatically maintains a cache of 16 MB for dynamic RAM previews To change the cache amount choose Preferences from the Options menu and change the Dynamic RAM Preview Max value on the Video tab re Note Although not all frames appear in previews of a project all frames are included when you render a file For more information see Rendering a project on page 239 a a You can make a time selection and add each frame in the selection to the cache Once the frames are cached Vegas can display all video frames in a selection 1 Select a region con
52. be set up to monitor the status of incoming or outgoing MIDI timecode Vegas can monitor MIDI timecode being generated from an external device or monitor MIDI timecode and MIDI clock information that is being generated From within Vegas the Time Display settings work in conjunction with your project s properties and MIDI setup options For more information see Sync tab on page 261 1 Right click the Time Display window 2 From the shortcut menu choose the type of MIDI monitoring for Vegas to display 00 00 29 29 Time at Cursor MIDI Timecode In MIDI Timecode Out Monitors Vegas generated MIDI timecode MIDI Clock Out Eon Monitors incoming MIDI timecode L Monitors Vegas generated MIDI clock Time Format Text Color Background Color Once you have made your selection the Time Display window displays both the MIDI timecode being input or output and a status message Working with project properties Vegas supports a large range of formats and various types of media files Some settings in a project s properties are simply informational details about the project while others control how Vegas handles your project and its output If you have multiple projects Vegas stores the settings used for each project These settings can be saved as templates for future use To view and modify project properties choose Properties from the File menu The Project Properties dialog has five tabs Video Audio Ruler Sum
53. bee dawe Doeeebane A 15 Welcome to Sonic Foundry Vegas 0c e eee eee eee eee eee 15 SV Stemi seU s Te T esia art ya cee ad wee ean ees ee eed aie ga eee ene 15 Lecnnical SUDDO a ereer deia a a Linch ie batter ewan ee ae eeee A 16 About this version of Vegas 0c eee eee ee eeeees 16 installing VEGAS ark ia 8S SS eo we eee SE Oe EGS bee o 17 MeGISUOUOMinat cance eae ede cea a ee ee eae ie a ee a ote See ee 17 USING ONMNE Nel esei errr was ade head t stab saad eee ee Pea ees 17 PRECCSSINGINGID ers Suma th sheet cee Ae eee ee eee eee eee et ae eee 17 CEI N ore a erecta ea aes en as aes enact naan es ewe eevee eis ei eee ee 19 Main WINGOW aia eat arier iene neh oe ep a PS Ea adit lea haha eva eed ee Gees 19 MOO WON erp aricarava iva feet ance uted dears aeeaca Wri a a Deas tk ek ah eh ted ote te eae ek 19 TIME CIS DIAY scoters asc wane oteaw lea ealie ih eee eri oon ea a ed re eee ee 20 RUIG caaan e Wika nea ance aac acne ae cae Waa ere hate oda ang See ate Gate woo wee eae aoe eas 20 Marker DAE es aiua tse re a hie Acura are wae ws gk wg ae Be Sk CO ee ate ne eae DOS Nowe es 20 Command Dals wisi ito 6 Octet eet iol a hi bi Lie Cad hee tai ea Gln 20 CD lavyOut Dar shu eh ee tee eee a Ae ae oh ed ol oe a ke hl E ae ae eee 21 WACK NSU rtca a9 da aa c atic pane atari a 4 4 te 4 dee TTT TTT 21 WACK VIEW conreat Fin eae ice ne Se OG aa a ieee ana EE ee oe ees 21 Transpor Dal COMMONS 2 a4 4 a8 arson sa Rd rE ie ARRAS OO REE EANET rhe rae
54. beginning of the currently selected event edge Drag a time selection on an event without selecting deselecting the event Keys a 4 Note Press to recall the last five time selection areas Eee Looping playback Double click the event Ctrl Shift Alt Right Arrow Ctrl Shift Alt Left Arrow Ctrl Shift drag on the event If you want to play back the time range click Play 1 to play only the events within the time range Click the Loop Playback button J or press Q on your keyboard to toggle loop playback on and off Vegas continually plays back the portion of the timeline within the time selection when loop playback is toggled on Selecting events and a time range Selecting a time range does not automatically select events Excluding locked events all items within the time range play back and are affected by Edit menu commands However you may select specific events to edit and then select a time range 1 Use the key the key or the Selection Edit Tool 74 to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 84 2 Place the mouse pointer above the ruler on the marker bar The mouse pointer changes to a left right arrow cursor 3 Drag to select the region Notice that events that were not initially selected in step 1 remain unselected not highlighted BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES Time selection 00 00 00 00 _ SSS epg Selected Unselected event ev
55. by choosing Enable Snapping from the Options menu 1 Select the event that begins This tutorial will introduce you 2 Drag the event to the approximate point where the narrator is saying this Use the original audio as a reference 3 On the timeline drag the mouse to select a time region 4 Click either the Play or the Play From Start 7571 button to play just the time selection Click the Loop Playback button 5 on the transport bar to have playback loop continuously within the selection 5 Watch the Video Preview window to see if the new voiceover is synchronized and adjust the position of the event as needed 6 Click the Stop button GJ to stop playback 7 Repeat the above steps for the event that begins found in this new Next we will group the synchronized events with the video and delete the original audio from the project Unlocking the events Earlier the original video and audio events were locked to prevent changes from being made to them Since the synchronizing work is done at this point both of these events can be unlocked permitting further modification 1 Right click the video event 2 From the shortcut menu choose Switches and choose Lock to clear the check mark that is displayed next to this command Grouping the new voiceover and video The voiceover and video are synchronized and we want to make sure that they stay together First we will delete the original audio an
56. channels 245 creating a movie 82 format 240 244 frame rate 243 frame size 243 sample rate 245 template 242 243 video compression 244 Balance panning model 135 Blue screening 208 Burning audio CDs 169 175 adding pauses between tracks 172 creating a CD layout 171 disc at once burning 169 175 exporting a track list 174 importing CD Architect files 170 marking tracks and indices 172 settings and preferences 170 track at once burning 169 174 Busses 152 155 adding to project 153 adjusting for clipping 155 adjusting volume 154 assigning plug ins to 143 assigning tracks to 78 155 bus send volume envelopes 137 controls 153 deleting from project 153 meter resolution 154 muting 155 naming renaming 155 routing to hardware 154 soloing 155 Bypassing audio plug ins 147 video plug ins 196 from ascanner 70 from the Video Preview window 181 Capturing Video recapturing offline clips 70 INDEX 1 e Capturing video 69 CD burning audio CDs 169 175 burning multimedia CDs 249 burning Video CDs 248 CD Architect files 170 CD layout bar 21 CD Settings tab 260 Channels audio 124 Child tracks compositing 199 203 Chromakeying 208 multiple keys 209 Clean up prerendered video 231 Clearing the edit history 99 Closed captioning 184 186 adding from a script 184 186 adding line by line 184 displaying 186 Color Time Display window 253 track 133
57. choose Multimedia CD from the submenu The Burn Multimedia CD dialog appears Burn Multimedia CD E x Render format File path CAMedia Vegas Projects SampleProjectwmy 00000000 Browse s Format Windows Media video va pwm Template 512KbpsVideo l udio 64 kbps 44 KHz Sterea ideo 30 fps 3202240 Why V8 compression Use this setting for high quality video and near CD quality audio delivered over LAN or cable modern Description IZ Render loop region only Estimated size 529 70KB T Stretch video to fill output frame Free space 3 18GB IZ Fast video resizing Use an existing file le patt T Play movie inside Web page Emwee Include movie player installer Browse Burn mode Burm CDs T Test first then burn CDs T Test only do not burn CDs Burn speed May r 2 Select the options for burning the multimedia CD CHP 16 e Choose the appropriate format and template for rendering the project from the Format and Template drop down lists e Select the Render loop region only check box to burn only a portion of your project e Select the Stretch video to fill output frame check box to have Vegas reformat your video so that it fills the output frame size listed in the Description field When the check box is cleared Vegas maintains the current aspect ratio and adds black borders to fill the extra frame area letterboxing e Clear the Fast video resizing check box if you see unacc
58. click an event f n 2 From the shortcut menu choose Switches and then choose Tee vie Tart the specific switch from the submenu Active switches have i Open in Audio Editor ae Open Copy in Audio Editor a check mark next to them Click an active switch on the menu again to turn it off Switches yD Mute K Take Lock lt lt lt lt ss Group K e Loop Note You may also access switches on the pee S 5 Edit menu in the Edit Details window or by Properties a right clicking an event and choosing Properties EEe Mute Use the Mute switch to mute an event This prevents the event from playing back Lock The Lock switch locks an event to prevent it from being moved or edited Loop You may loop an event so that you can extend it along the timeline by dragging the right edge of the event Notches appear in the top of the event to mark where the media in the event ends and then repeats looping notches E E F N F N k k Selected event Selected event after before loop loop is applied Drag the right edge to extend the event CHP 6 WORKING WITH EVENTS 122 For video events disabling the Loop switch makes the last frame repeat for the duration of the event beyond its original length creating a freeze frame effect as in the middle example below The Loop switch is enabled for the event in the last example below ey The original three frame clip ETE y
59. click and drag a small rectangular selection area around the color s to key out Although you can select the color range from just about anywhere the Video Preview window is the best location _ 4 Note Other effects that may change the color of the event should be turned off when using the Eyedropper tool EE 8 Click the Bypass All Video FX button on the Video Preview window to restore the video effects The Video Preview window shows the result of the Chroma Keyer plug in Project F20e480e52 29 971 Frame 23 Preview 180120432 29 97p Display 240276016 When a subject is filmed against a solid colored background in a studio the background color can be keyed out and made transparent using the Mask Generator or the Chroma Keyer plug in A wider range of colors can be selected using the Chroma Keyer plug in making it the perfect tool for less than perfect blue screens This procedure selects a small range of colors to use as a key In the example above the blue sky around the dome is far from uniform and it would be difficult to key it out with a traditional blue screen key The color is uniform enough however that a range of blues can be selected directly from the preview image in Vegas Use the controls at the bottom of the dialog box to determine the sensitivity of the colors selected Since the filter selects a range of colors it is a good idea to try to select a relatively small range of similar colors Drawing a colo
60. corporate_logo event back to the 6 000 second point in the timeline The duration of the event is now seven seconds CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS 50 The corporate_logo event overlaps a large portion of the underlying implosion and vegas_logo events Events in upper tracks normally completely obscure lower tracks In this case however most of the logo is transparent so the underlying video shows through and the corporate_logo appears to float over the rest of the project Corporate logo R o Sb Preview Quality lt x 00 00 00 E 00 00 05 00 00 10 E lt SONIC FOUNDRY lb an b an Implosion Crossfade Vegas logo Project 320 240 32 15 00p Frame 94 l Preview 320424032 15 00p Display 320 240x16 The corporate logo appears over the implosion event in the Video Preview window ee Note The corporate_logo png image file is a PNG image file that was created in an image editing program It has a transparent alpha channel that allows the background video to show through For more information see Creating titles from images on page 183 Ee Duplicating events To create a sense of a beginning a middle and an end to the project we will duplicate both of the logos the corporate_logo and the vegas_logo and place the copies at the end of the project 1 Press and hold the key 2 Drag the corporate_logo event horizontally on the Overla
61. disc in every music store throughout the world Red Book specifications define not only the information within the disc digital audio recorded at 44 1 kHz but also the disc size itself and the way in which the audio is arranged APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 290 n Region A subsection of a sound file denoted by a start and end point You can define any number of regions in a sound file Resample The act of recalculating samples in a sound file at a different rate than the file was originally recorded If an audio file is resampled at a lower rate Vegas decreases sample points As a result the file size and the frequency range are reduced When resampling to a higher sample rate Vegas interpolates extra sample points in the sound file This increases the size of the sound file but does not increase the quality When down sampling one must be aware of aliasing see Aliasing Vegas automatically resamples all audio to the project s sample rate Ripple Ripple Editing A type of editing where events are moved out of the way to make room for newly inserted events as opposed to simply being overwritten When a one minute event is ripple inserted into a project the duration of a project lengthens by one minute If ripple editing is turned off the same operation would not affect the overall duration of the project Roll Originally a conventional studio typically had two source decks that were used to play back video to a final destination
62. displays both the time and the opacity level as you drag Changing an event s fade curve You can set the shape of the fade curve fast linear slow sharp or smooth that an event uses to increase or decrease the opacity over time To access the different fade curves right click anywhere in the event s fade in or out region and choose Fade Type from the shortcut menu Using velocity envelopes V Velocity envelopes are only available in Vegas Video Velocity envelopes are used to change the speed of a video event over time To view a Velocity envelope right click the event and choose Insert Remove Velocity Envelope 1 Right click the event and choose Insert Remove Velocity Envelope The Velocity envelope appears on the event as a blue line 2 To increase the speed drag the line up To slow the video down drag the line down Adding velocity envelope points nodes When combined with points nodes envelopes can be used to animate velocity changes 1 Double click the envelope where you want to add a Envelope points point 2 Drag the point to adjust it Vegas displays the time and velocity level of the point as you drag 3 Right click the envelope between two points to choose Ged See P a fade type Linear Fast Slow Smooth or Sharp to Velocity at 00 00 0104 is 6 set the shape of the curve _ 4 Note To delete a point right click the point and choose Delete nnn Making a video play at twice its normal
63. e 341 More about video formats When you create a final movie you will find that there are dozens of formats to choose from each having dozens of options The destination of your final movie is the most important factor in selecting a format Movies created for broadcast television must be of the highest quality but for many other destinations such as a CD ROM or the Internet you may have to sacrifice some quality when you render the file Heavy compression may create visible artifacts in the video such as when you create streaming video for the Internet Every case is different and it is necessary to experiment to obtain the best results VCR or television If you are creating a movie that you want to send back out to a television a VCR or a camcorder there is only one choice use the same settings as the original video There is no way to improve upon the quality of your original video as far as compression is concerned If you have captured your video at 640X480 at 24 fps in an MJPEG codec then that is how you should set up your final movie This is the only way to maintain 100 quality For more information see Working in DV format on page 189 Computer This can be the most complicated case because you have to decide exactly which computer it is going to be played back on how fast it is what software is installed and how you are going to get it there e g burn to a CD Your biggest concern with creating a video file is compa
64. e eee eee eens 242 Creating custom rendering settings for AVI files 000 cee eee ees 243 FROIGCE TAO Wtf wah hehe eek gen de ee tee ee ee eo Ne a a aa Ned Oe 8 Shale Raia hae 243 ise eed a tare sre aaa ete a ec hite Sesto Stee Eds a epee Grea Gat acta a Se ch canta dake eh itis anh dase tee Mote Saati 243 AUCIO NAD 255 con canbe Ab aise eens a a a a aea a esate Maa wake 244 Printing with Video Capture lt cece eee 245 PING tO DY LADO cae 6 5 4ngeed 4 66 Soe OER DEES S eee Oe wae LERES 246 Establishing a connection to the recording device 6 ees 246 PHAUNG TO DV tapenean ee be hee Be ee et Ola ee ate ada oe 246 BUrnING Video CDSs cud toate ctw rie el ee eel ee Mes bhai enw ae eats 248 Burning multimedia COS e444 ste wesru weap ewsenewseetes eG ianeeeee tae as 249 CUSIOIMIZING Vegas siririn ea ie oequsaw E ee bees 251 Displaying frame numbers e e e eee eee eee 251 Changing the ruler format 00 e e e eee eee eee nee 251 Editing the nulerOnsete vers les ihe dee eee eee hs Bie TTT 252 Changing grd SPACING ss ideuaetewat tata eteias bd eee eS 252 Using the Time Display WINdOW 00002 e eee eee eee eee 253 Changing the Time Display settingS 0 ccc eee eee eens 253 Changing the Time Display colors lt ese aes tee ee begets doe ere es lt 253 TABLE OF CONTENTS e 1 3 Setting the Time Display to monitor MIDI timecode lt 254 Working with project properties
65. eas 216 Working with keyframes in track view e e eee eee eens 217 Sample uses for keyframe animation 000 cee es 218 Animating event panning and Cropping e e eee eee 218 Animating video effects pIUG INS 0 0 eee eee eee eens 221 Anmaing generated tt verccecetscceskeiee des TAERA TRE Reece ERN EEEE LEGEEN ES 222 Adding track MOTION 2 cc eee teen eee ee eeeeeeees 223 Using the track motion shortcut Menu 0 eee eee 224 Controlling the track motion workspace 1 eee eee ees 224 Using keyframes in track MOTION 00 ccc ee eee eee eens 225 ea oki Grates Lote antenna wr Rey asad a etna ete ae ties ote ashore chee yee a ate ene ee 225 Creating a picture in picture effect 2 cc eee eee eee ee eeeees 226 ATMIMALING the overlay fs dias aes yin te ed echt e a Soe te dd le circa ck Borde E A are 226 Rotating te OVENAY dicdincdnadndtsenende dae dane c eee a eda tacw ect ees 227 FUDD DING s e e UT 227 FreVICWING Ke e TTT 229 Understanding the Video Preview WINdOW 0 ccc ee eens 229 Using the Video Preview window shortcut Menu 0c cee eee eee eee eee teenies 230 Optimizing the Video Preview WINdOW 220 cece eee eee eee 230 REGUCING preview QUAIILY sisted dae k a head Ba doa ae ee we i a a ea 231 Frerenderng VICICO 5 disco kis ahs due addr adc oh ee ee A e e a a ay Gare Brae graced E A She e dea bekd 231 Building dynamic RAMI previews lt e e e e 0c eee
66. ee area eee D R Ie ea ee R eee eee ee eee sates eee 114 Working with take naines 21Ga cc i tha oes Ror ag Sol ees bh d s Hed a cree cee etal 114 Using the Trimmer WINdOW 2 0 2 0c eee eens 115 Opening a file in the Trimmer 323 223 04 30 0e3 bei othe ete annn detest aedeeded eee 115 Moving frame by frame in the Trimmer WINdOW 0 0c 116 Making selections in the Trimmer e e e c cece eee ees 116 Adding selections to the timeline 00 ccc eee eens 116 Adding and saving regions and markers to a media file cece cece eee eeees 118 Opening a file in an external audio editor from the Trimmer 0000000 eee eee 118 Using the Edit Details WINdOW 0c eee eee 118 Viewing the Edit Details WINdOW 0 00 cc eee eens 119 Customizing the Edit Details WINdOW 0c cc eee eens 120 VVOFKING WIT EVENTS serrera pane nee od ou git ee eaene eee x 121 Seting event SWILChES s2 i4is cow dae ea Se tea ee Soe Maen Sasi ee eae eas 121 MUG seis ane hae eee a eden ead a dt de eat a ee dela lane wate acuta Nh ae eae edie ab 4 hearted anaes 121 Se 2 ancy es tne ea ate mete a ne gta eee a a a Puan a scaace sce Bass Macha Gncen Gan aiden Galea ene os hl ee lr 121 LOOD scar dcs aukt ate hick T 121 Invert phase audio Only ess s605c22 heads hed ed E dea ee ee dan et ee eae te 122 Normalize audio Only 26544564565 ewank sate kaw tiwe sb ueeeseekwsbiags mate baa eae 122 Maintain aspect ratio video Only
67. eke eae eee emanee peas eis ea wee eee tas 180 Working with still ImageS eee eee eee eeees 180 Creating still images for use IN Vegas 2 eee eee eens 180 Capturing a timeline snapshot e den dRaee meets eet dewde eeawenweecne seen 181 Creating a Slide SNOW wise3 ess eee te Moe cet ae eee heed eee ste deed ARAN NANNAN hes 182 Creating UES asariar iusto tie heared Soon teed hee fe ha Goa E ees we eS 182 Creating titles from IMAGES e lt e ee eee eee tenet eee eens 183 TABLE OF CONTENTS 10 gt y Fading Iles e 79 we rE aa T need use Na edt HHS E 184 Adding closed captioning to Windows Media Video WMV files 184 Adding closed captioning line by line 22 0 eens 184 Adding closed captioning from a script e ee eee eee eee 184 Displaying Closed Captioning serris iek ee ae hw he eh ehh GOS a Oe ee 186 Resampling video wssta weds ewe eee eae ESE aoc abesennse oan 187 Using Edit Decision Lists EDL 0 0 0 0 eee ee 188 Tae An EDL s dssieacdten diene Sea dade beeen a Gana awn ee eae eae Geet 188 DSS al EDE gc os ere ecare gag ears scare SPS ES eS AS Ae ee See eee eee 188 Working in DV format 000 cee eee 189 DElECIING source media 6 tai 3 h03 te ieira eo hoe bh eh ed eek did sd Sac cline td eae ci 189 Setting Project DFOPEMICS ss 6 106 enedseddadadduddtesdecemeiadianiwnadic iaadwadeadus 189 ScleCting Templates 2 2 A60 Z E d 74 6 cud RAE Re ER RR RA RE aug wGidee aid au
68. file is selected re Note These settings may be overridden by the settings on the Video tab of the Preferences dialog Select Timecode from the Source frame numbering list to allow event level specification Render media file format The timecode of a final rendered media file is determined by the specified format The frame rate of the project ultimately determines the timecode and is often constrained by the type of media file being rendered or the codec being used for compression For example NTSC DV is typically limited to a frame rate of 29 97 fps and uses SMPTE drop frame timecode Time formats in Vegas Vegas provides a variety of time formats For more information see Changing the ruler format on page 251 Troubleshooting DV hardware issues Vegas is designed to integrate seamlessly with OHCI compliant IEEE 1394 DV video capture hardware and DV camcorders While most people never have any problems the vast number of hardware configuration possibilities makes this a potentially complex issue Although Sonic Foundry is exclusively a software company there are a number of resources at Sonic Foundry s Web site that may be able to assist you More detailed information is available at htte wwwesonicroundry com Supporty Product info OACL asp You can also visit the Vegas Video updates Web page to access a troubleshooting document for OHCI compliant devices From the Sonic Foundry home page go to the Download pag
69. footage captured using an MJPEG card cee eens 264 Trouble free video software solutions lt e e e e e e eee eee eee 265 Trouble free video hardware solutions 2 0 eee es 265 MIGEOSUDSY Tn I er irene taer aac d lace Bande Baise a a ata we ariel e erated sand O aes eet e aiaraneuns 265 xes Ea hss Adigiwht ae tate Ble irate a ince CE Pe GE Oe a ae Ee a ee r oe Sie ee e aie woes 266 CPU and RAM MMeEMONy wsscstas tues tietiinsh es hesede cet dds adie T ee tearee eee 266 Audio proxy files Sfa p0 2604 7 ST KE Z 0 E TR cet des Geduwd rade b1aGeaw eek 267 Interlacing and ieie Ee OCI erreneren ree hee hk eas bate eeerg etre he are teers 267 t Res ee aruse Sia oleae Sine eR aS ark eo ae aca was r eS ees 269 SIVIP TE tTIMECOGE TY DES sa Ms Me Mia bbe hee thei td oi diet eee es WA ele eA 269 Timecode I VEGAS TTT 270 Troubleshooting DV hardware ISSUES 00 e lt e ees 271 COS S AI caters bears bot Ge as es ss od na ate Eve cates ee 273 sls Saree eed es Ged ae ieee Geta geen Yoo E ee ee eee ee TABLE OF CONTENTS 14 pS TABLE OF CONTENTS 15 CHAPTER a a a r L an K w S ES Introduction N Ti d N E b P m M alias vai a a hi Welcome to Sonic Foundry Vegas Sonic Foundry Vegas is an innovative and advanced multitrack media editing system Vegas was designed to create an efficient audio video production environment without sacrificing the quality a
70. frame rate matches the standard crystal sync 16 33 mm film rate of 24 fps Timecode in Vegas Video timecode crops up fairly frequently in Vegas Being a multimedia production tool time in Vegas can be measured in real world time hours minutes seconds in video timecode involving frames of video or in musical time measures and beats Ruler format and timecode The ruler in Vegas can be set to measure time in any way that is convenient This setting does not change how the final file is rendered but does control the grid lines and how snapping behaves Right click the ruler and choose a time format from the shortcut list For more information see Changing the ruler format on page 21 Preferences dialog timecode settings From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Video tab to adjust the Show source frame numbers on event thumbnails as drop down list These settings take precedence over those found in the source media Properties dialog see the next topic and are displayed on events inserted into the timeline None means that no numbers are displayed on events Frame Numbers marks frames in the media file starting with 0 Time displays the time in seconds and Timecode allows the source media s timecode to be detected or selected TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX A n 27 I Source media timecode format Right click an event choose Properties and click the Media tab to view these properties By default Use timecode in
71. he eh oe he oO oe ede at a eae ae ated 100 VVORKING WItitleGlIONS 32 0 o6c0s 0sten tiet i tts eae dest ect ae de ede aes eee ateatee ese 101 Working with command markers 000 cee ee eee eee eee 103 Working with CD layout markers 00 ccc eee eee eens 106 Using an external audio editing program ees 106 Setting up an audio editing program 2 ccc eee eee eee ees 106 Opening an audio editor from VegaS 00 ccc eee eee eens 106 Advanced Editing Techniques 00200 cece eee 109 SNAPPING CVENS ween ice n a es ben ober st daee eee Cee eae asa 109 Enabling and disabling snapping 0 ccc ee eee eee eens 109 TABLE OF CONTENTS G QuanuizinG to elan 109 Using the event Shap offset e dcr decd ichich Get batasteceese ded ewes eed end awe dy 110 Snapping to the cursor or a selection e eee eee eee teens 110 SI sZ RTI STS Te aUo CVEWNS sa inves hheawiawa whats eg E bow bi eee kate 111 Time compressing stretching events lt e e cece eee eee eens 112 Time compressing stretching video lt ee eee eens 112 Working with takeS 00000 eee 113 POGING MAKES 2 oie oven en hie erate hee Aen eee ah Gh oe ete hee arab eit 113 Tele eeh TAKS eere snene tits earns See eS he tes Ase eRe ee es eee nee Re 113 Previewing and selecting takeS 0 eee eee ees 114 Using takes to copy event attributes to anew event 0c cece eee eee ee eee eee 114 Deleng aKes L R RER tog
72. in the spreadsheet and copy them Switch to Vegas and choose Edit Details from the View menu The Edit Details window appears 2 3 From the Show drop down list choose Commands A Right click the gray box in the upper left corner and choose Paste from the shortcut menu Vegas pastes the spreadsheet data into the Edit Details window 5 Click the column header for the Comments column This sorts the captions by line number Right click to paste the spreadsheet Click the Comments column header contents into the Edit Details window to sort the captions by line number Edit Details Edit Details eas i Show Commands lt Show Commands gt fal fields x Postin Command Parameters Comment But soft what light through Line 001 00 00 00 00 lt is the east and Juliet is the Line O02 a 0000 00 00 Arise fair sun and kill the en Line 003 00 00 00 00 Who is already sick and pale Line 004 00 00 00 00 That thou her maid art far mor Line 005 00 00 00 00 Be not her maid since she ts Line O06 00 00 00 00 Her vestal livery is but sick a Line ODF 00 00 00 00 And none but fools do wear it Line 008 00 00 00 00 Itis mp lady D itis my lowe Line O09 00 00 00 00 D that she knew she werel Line 010 ent Eut EEE hoy Zia Paste Ctrl Welete Pelete Setting closed captioning timing 1 Position the cursor shortly before where you want the first caption to occur Select the row for the first cap
73. information please refer to your Scott Studios documentation BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 e 1 0B Inserting command markers Command markers appear as blue tags on the command bar which is above the marker bar Right click to place a command marker on the command bar Command bar _ Marker bar Ta Delete All Delete Allin Selection D ea E TE RTSH TTT TE Reen R ea KaR o nlc E E HTH A a a a 1 Position the cursor where you want to place the command marker 2 From the Insert menu choose Command or press C 3 Complete the Command Properties dialog Command Properties HE e Template Select a custom template For more information see Template W x Saving command properties as a custom template on page 105 e Command Select the type of command e Parameter Enter parameters to define the behavior of the Command JURL Parameter Comment command Position 00 00 36 22 e Comments Enter your own notes or comments e Position Specify the timing of the command Otherwise command markers are automatically set to the current cursor position 4 Click OK The new command marker appears on the command bar Editing command properties Double click any command marker to open the Command Properties dialog and edit its contents You can also right click a command marker and choose Edit from the shortcut menu Saving command properties as a custom template If you plan to use a comman
74. is selected Because Vegas can regenerate these files as needed they do not need to be archived For more information see Peak File sfk on page 278 or Audio proxy files sfapO on page Ki vna From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog appears Select the drive and folder where you want to store the project Type the project name in the File name box Select the Copy and trim media with project check box Click Save The Copy Media Options dialog appears O oOo BP O N gt Select the appropriate option e Copy all media Copies all media files to the same location el as the Vegas project file aan e Create trimmed copies of source media Optimizes media Extra head andtail seconds RO 7 storage by saving only those portions of media files used in events and discarding unused takes Audio media is saved as Wave64 files w64 and DV video media is saved as AVI files Non DV video files are copied in full Enter an Extra Head and Tail seconds value to indicate how much time Vegas should include before and after the trimmed media For example if the project contains a 2 minute media file but the event on the timeline for that file lasts only from 1 00 to 1 20 you could enter 5 seconds in the Extra Head and Tail box to have Vegas save the media file from 0 55 to 1 25 5 seconds added to the head and tail of the event Including this extra material allows space for future edits 7 Click OK Vegas
75. live concert CD For a continuous recording you can omit the pauses after tracks for continuous playback For more information see Red Book specification on page 279 re Note The Red Book specification also requires a two second pause at the beginning of an audio CD If the first track in your project begins before the two second mark Vegas adds a ruler offset to ensure the project begins with the required two second pause as If you use the Add as CD Track command to add tracks from the Media Pool Vegas adds the appropriate pauses automatically However if you are laying out your project manually you must create these pauses between audio CD tracks Two second pauses Track 1 Glass of punch Track 2 Anywhere but somewhere Track 2 Can you see why 03 02 33 05 1 if CO Audio a lt 1 Position the cursor where you want to insert the pause 2 From the Insert menu choose Time The Insert Time dialog appears inset Ta AE 3 Enter two seconds in the Amount of time to insert box Amount of time to insert 00002 00 Cancel 4 Click OK Two seconds are inserted in the timeline at the cursor position Marking tracks automatically Vegas can examine the events in your project and mark the audio CD tracks for you Once Vegas marks the tracks you can adjust them manually if necessary For more information see Moving track and index markers on page 173 1 Lay out your project with two second pauses between tra
76. name each track If necessary you can edit the information for the new audio CD tracks using the markers on the CD layout bar or using the Edit Details window For more information see Working with tracks and indices on page 173 Right click files in the Media Pool to add them as CD tracks to a audio CD layout project Track 1 Glass of punch Iy BDA XHStrl gt O RIR 084 04 34 28 PT Mane se Count Type Media FX p eo ae S E TR ane T aaa J mes Ss S h Add as CD Track SS o Vok 0 0 de Anywhere but 4 an S s T Bada vac Explore Containing Folder ad Pe Daia BL Remove 05 Sad but untrue a E Remove and Delete File s 06 T So Wal Wav S Ke hes Properties 08 CHP 11 BURNING AUDIO CDS OOOO Marking tracks in an existing project Once you have laid out your audio project with the appropriate pauses you can mark tracks and indices either automatically or manually ee Note In DAO CD burning Vegas burns from the beginning of the timeline to the last track marker regardless of the location of the first track marker Material before the first marker is included as a hidden track on the disc if your drive supports burning this material eS Adding pauses Each audio CD track in your project should have a two second pause following it This default setting is based on the Red Book specification for audio CDs The exception to this standard is a continuous recording such as a
77. new JPEG file is added to the Media Pool Delete Rename Delete All Extracting audio from a CD M Show after every recording session You can extract tracks from a CD and add them to the Media Pool window as WAV files 1 Insert the audio CD 2 In the Media Pool window click the Extract Audio GEEZER 2 x from CD button The Extract Audio from Drive LG CD RW CED 80808 1 04 0 0 CD dialog appears ae i 00 02 00 05 51 00 05 49 00 Cae 3 Choose the drive that has the CD in it from the C o O Drive drop down list The information for each 1 ee H CD track displays if PAETE Sea OSS i 29 47 17 33 44 02 04 56 60 i 33 44 02 37 18 60 03 34 58 4 Select the track to be extracted Use the shift key ia ea i 40 25 47 44 20 20 03 54 48 OX key to select multiple tracks 44 2020 4944 02 05 2357 l i 43 44 02 53 49 02 04 05 00 5 Click OK The Save As dialog appears i 534902 562230 0433 28 6 Select a name and location for the new file 7 Click OK to save the new WAV file GETTING STARTED CHP 3 L 71 Vegas extracts the track and displays a progress meter to indicate the percent complete Once extraction is complete the new WAV file appears in the Media Pool Vegas provides the option of automatically naming extracted tracks for you To enable this option choose Preferences from the Options menu and on the CD Settings tab select the Autoname extracted tracks check box For more inform
78. number of times a second that data is sampled in an audio file It is similar to the concept of resolution in an image file The higher the setting you choose the better the quality but the larger the file size Bit depth The bit depth directly affects the audio s quality The bit depth is defined as how much data is used to save each sample The higher the setting you choose the better the quality but the larger the file size Channels A project may be rendered in either stereo or mono Printing with Video Capture Once you have rendered your project you can use Sonic Foundry s Video Capture application installed with Vegas to print your finished video onto DV tape in your video camera or VTR _ 4 Note You must have an IEEE 1394 OHCI compliant video capture card installed to use Video Capture S N 1 If you have not already done so connect your video camera to your video capture card using the cable provided with the card 2 In the Media Pool window click the Open Video Capture button 1 The Sonic Foundry Video Capture application starts ee Note If your video camera is properly connected the Video Preview window in the center of the application area should display Device connected rr T 3 Follow the instructions for printing to tape provided in the Video Capture online help To access online help click the Help menu within the Video Capture application and choose Contents and Index The Vide
79. of the envelope to set the fade curve If you select a portion of the envelope Vegas applies the fade curve to that envelope segment If you select a point Vegas applies the fade curve to the segment of the envelope after the selected point 1 Right click a point or a portion of the envelope to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose the curve type je Linear Fast Slow Smooth Sharp Fast Fade a a i LC Slow Fade Smooth Fade Sharp Fade z Select All Reset All Hiding track envelopes After you have set your envelopes on the tracks you may hide them from the track view Hiding track envelopes does not affect playback The points that you set still automate the controls even though the envelopes are not visible 1 From the View menu choose either Show Audio Envelopes or Show Video Envelopes A submenu appears Envelopes that are currently displayed are selected in the submenu 2 From the submenu choose an envelope name All envelopes in your project of that type no longer appear in the track view View a Toolbar i Status Bar Show Audio Envelopes K Ee Track Yolume Show Video Envelopes ce Track Pan N N i Bus B Minimize All Tracks Rebuild Audio Peaks F5 Removing track envelopes CHP 7 When an envelope is removed the events on the track no longer have automated control and the envelope line no longer displays 1 Select a track by clicking its track number
80. of the keyframes 2 Hold the key and drag to scale the keyframes When copying keyframes from longer events to shorter events you must temporarily lengthen the duration of the shorter event so that all of the keyframes appear on the keyframe controller Once you have pasted the keyframes you can rescale the keyframes using the above procedure and then resize the event to its original length Working with keyframes in track view Track keyframes can be moved in track view These keyframes are used in the following three track level effects e Track effects plug in pg 194 e Track motion pg 223 e Mask generator plug in on a parent compositing track pg 206 Viewing and moving track keyframes Once you have added keyframes to one of these track level effects the track keyframes appear at the bottom of the track on the timeline Click the Expand Track Keyframes button 1 to view the keyframes CHP 14 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 219 y You can drag a keyframe on the track in the same way you would in the keyframe controller To move several keyframes at once use the Envelope Edit tool 4 to select and drag multiple keyframes Expand Track Keyframes button 0000 15 28 0000 1728 With track keyframes j Video SA de A nns i collapsed keyframes J Levet 100 0 dll BR Dr ms are minimized 00 00 19 29 pee on 0000 1728 0000 19 28 With track keyframes P Video S E expanded each L Lev
81. of the voiceover Here is what the project looks like so far 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 15 00 00 20 4 Background video 04_background veg In this section we will add some video clips to the background The techniques we will focus on are inserting video crossfading events and adding transitions Creating a new video track 1 Browse for a video file powderskier avi in the Explorer 2 Drag the media file just below the musicbed audio track Position the new powderskier event at the beginning of the project 3 Double click the scribble strip on the new track and name the track Background Since the new video event is being dropped at a location that does not already contain a video track a new video track containing a new video event is created Before During drag operation After with new event and new track TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS CHP 2 e 47 Crossfading to a new video event One way to transition from one video scene to another is with a crossfade This is a common technique where one scene fades out while another fades in 1 Browse for the video file mountains avi in the Explorer 2 Drag this file to the background track 3 Position the new event to the right of the first event powderskier overlapping by about a second The overlapping region has an X across it indicating a crossfade Before During drag operation After with new event and crossfade at the overlap 4 Repea
82. on the Media tab as needed Properties HE 3 Click OK tE File name C Media treweed avi File name Displays the file name cannot be edited On aa Timecode Tape name This can be used to display the name of the tape for media files captured in Video Capture The name can be edited here or in the corresponding field in the Edit Details window Y Use timecode in file T Use custom timecode o0 00 00 00 SMPTE Drop 23 97 fps Video Timecode not all video files include timecode information Stream properties Stream dea 7 e Use timecode in file This is the default Attributes 3209240924 00 00 03 24 e Use custom timecode This option allows you to set the HOD een l d Il armat ndeo viden 3 EES e manua LS Frame rate 29 970 NTSC e Timecode format list If you have selected Use Custom L ee l l Field order None progressive scan timecode above this list contains the available timecode i i Pixel aspect ratio 1 0000 Multimedia lt formats SMPTE Drop 29 97 fps Video for example is the sbhechemer TW Alpha channel lt timecode format for NTSC DV Changing the timecode SIS A E Backonound calor format does not change the source media file in any way It merely changes how the file is measured in time For more information see Timecode on page 269 Setting custom stream properties Media files are opened in Vegas with a set of default values When you ch
83. output frame size do not letterbox IZ Save project markers in media file Customizing the Render As settings 1 From the File menu choose Render As 2 In the Render As dialog choose the format e g Video for Windows avi 3 Click the Custom button The Custom Settings dialog appears 4 Adjust the settings in each of the tabs as desired 5 Click OK to close the Custom Settings dialog 6 Enter a name and location for the new file and click Save The customized settings that have been chosen here can be saved for future use One of the most important reasons to save a new template is to save the specific compression codec used to create the final media file since this is not predetermined by the project properties Saving custom settings as a template 1 Modify the parameters in the Custom Settings dialog 2 In the Template drop down list enter a name for the new template 3 Click the Save Template button Wl Changes cannot be made to the default template To use the new template in the future simply select it from the Template list in the Save As dialog Custom Audio and Video settings are saved in the same template A 4 Note To delete a template select it from the drop down list and click the Delete button x1 PR SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 16 e 213 Creating custom rendering settings for AVI files The options that appear in the Custom Settings dialog depend on which format you choos
84. plug in pca ogg rm w64 wav wma wmv QuickTime tga w64 wav wma wmv Vegas includes MainConcept MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 transcoding and decoding software System requirements CHP 1 Minimum requirements 400 MHz processor Windows compatible sound card CD ROM drive 7200 RPM hard disk drive OHClI compliant IEEE 1394 DV capture card for DV capture and print to tape tools only 24 bit color display recommended 128 MB RAM 40 MB hard disk space for program installation Microsoft Windows 98SE ME 2000 or XP Microsoft DirectX 8 or later included on CD ROM Internet Explorer 4 0 or later to view online help version 5 0 included on CD ROM INTRODUCTION 16 r Technical support The Web site at http Awww sonicfoundry com support has technical support reference information program updates tips and tricks and a knowledge base About this version of Vegas The Vegas family of products includes Vegas Video and Vegas Video LE Both versions boast a suite of professional level multitrack audio tools while Vegas Video also includes advanced NLE nonlinear editing features making it a true all in one multimedia editing solution AN Vegas Video Vegas Video LE Unlimited Unlimited Multiple compositing modes Source alpha only Dynamic RAM preview Video envelopes fade to color composite level velocity Video transitions Presets only Audio effects DirectX plug ins included XFX 1 2 and 3 Expr
85. press 4 or 6 on the numeric keypad to nudge it by small increments The amount of movement caused by each nudge is determined by how far the timeline is zoomed in or out Moving grouped events Groups allow you to move multiple events within their tracks as a single unit While you can create your own groups as needed Vegas automatically creates groups for you when video files with associated audio e g AVI are added to a project When you add these video files the audio portion of the video file is inserted into the timeline as a separate audio event The video and audio events are grouped and can be moved as a single unit within their respective tracks To move grouped events drag any event in the group to a new position For more information see Grouping events on page 128 Working with tracks Vegas Video includes unlimited audio and video tracks Vegas Video LE limits you to two video tracks and four audio tracks A project consists of multiple audio and video tracks The track view is the timeline in which all events appear The track header provides information about the track and contains controls that affect all events in the track GETTING STARTED CHP 3 n T5 Using the track view Vegas provides numerous options for viewing and navigating in track view Scrolling and zooming There are several ways to scroll and zoom in the track view Click the scroll bar arrows or drag the scroll bars to move up and do
86. recording means automatically starting and stopping recording at user specified times In Vegas shorter events can be punched into longer ones Ouadraphonic A mixing implementation that allows for four discrete audio channels These are usually routed to two front speakers and two back speakers to create immersive audio mixes Quantization The process by which measurements are rounded to discrete values Specifically with respect to audio quantization is a function of the analog to digital conversion process The continuous variation of the voltages of a analog audio signal are quantized to discrete amplitude values represented by digital binary numbers The number of bits available to describe these values determines the resolution or accuracy of quantization For example if you have 8 bit analog to digital converters the varying analog voltage must be quantized to 1 of 256 discrete values a 16 bit converter has 65 536 values Quantization is to level as sampling rate is to time Quantization Noise A result of describing an analog signal in discrete digital terms see Quantization This noise is most easily heard in low resolution digital sounds that have low bit depths and is similar to a shhhhh type sound while the audio is playing It becomes more apparent when the signal is at low levels such as when doing a fade out See also Dithering Red Book specification The Red Book defines the specifications of every audio compact
87. screen Computers display pixels as squares 1 0 Televisions display individual pixels as rectangles 0 909 0 899 or anything other than square Using the wrong pixel aspect ratio can result in distortions or stretching of the video Select the aspect ratio for the final movie s destination Consult your hardware manual if you are in doubt about the appropriate ratio The pixel aspect ratio is unrelated to the frame s aspect ratio Video format Codec which stands for COmpressor DECompressor is the mathematical algorithm used to compress a media file The codec directly determines the size and quality of the movie as well as its compatibility with various playback devices The final destination for the movie dictates the choice of codec Many of the codecs used for specific rendering formats are updated periodically by their creators For information about specific codecs contact the codec s manufacturer Each codec is a small program that may have additional custom controls used to fine tune the output Click the Configure button to adjust these parameters manually Quality slider If the codec chosen in the Video format list supports it use this slider to adjust the quality of the compression applied by the codec chosen from the Video format list Interleave every When enabled this control allows you to specify how often the audio and video streams are interleaved Interleaving relates directly to how the data is saved in the fi
88. speed makes the duration of the video half as long Likewise slowing a video down makes it longer with 0 being an infinite freeze frame For example if you decrease the speed of a ten second video event by 50 only five seconds of video play played over the course of the ten second event meaning that only half as much actual footage from the original event plays On the other hand if the speed is increased 200 the ten seconds of content play in only five seconds The remaining five seconds of the event are filled either with a freeze of the last frame or with ten additional seconds of video content from the longer file You may want to resample the frame rate of an event that has been significantly slowed To resample an event right click the event and choose Properties Then on the Video Event tab choose Resample For more information see Resampling video on page 187 CHP 6 WORKING WITH EVENTS 128 r Using the Envelope Edit Tool While envelopes can be edited while in Normal Editing mode you can limit your editing to envelopes only by clicking the Envelope Edit Tool button Events cannot be moved trimmed or otherwise modified in this mode protecting them from unwanted changes For more information see Using the Envelope Edit tool on page 140 Reversing a video event Setting the velocity to a negative value reverses the video working backwards from the point where the negative value occurs An event that has bee
89. tab the Media tab contains many properties that are an inherent part of the media file itself In addition to the event switches discussed in this chapter event properties include the following e Playback rate Sets the rate of playback For example a playback rate of 1 plays at normal speed while a playback rate of 0 5 plays at half speed For more information see Time compressing stretching events on page liz e Undersample rate Simulates a lower frame rate For example an Undersample rate of 0 5 plays the event at half its original frame rate Each frame plays twice as long as in the original media file creating a strobe effect e Time stretch pitch shift Changes pitch duration or both pitch and duration of an audio event For more information see Pitch shifting audio events on page 111 Pitch shifting while preserving length and time stretching while preserving pitch are only available in Vegas Video Adjusting audio channels A stereo audio event has two channels right and left You can adjust how Vegas plays these channels by right clicking an event and choosing Channels from the shortcut menu Both Plays both channels in stereo This is the default setting Left Only Plays only the left channel Playback is mono and is centered between the two channels Right Only Plays only the right channel Playback is mono and centered Combine Adds the two channels into a single channel and divides level in half to prevent clipp
90. teas bee ees 74 USNO the e LTTE 75 Using tne track header s st4 dine bled cadecaeaweates due dawecaee heed A edad 77 Viewing playbacks and previeWs 00 cece eee eee eee eee ee eeeaee 79 Using playback from within VegaS nunnana anean nnne rnrn nenn 79 SCrUDDING 6 6 innen a i erate ean he Gel Gel eGo het eae dhe 80 Previewing to media player nsns san sed ee meee ME RST DASE ORS Sea 81 Prerendering video previeWwS lt e e ees 81 Rendering a Vegas project ccc cee eee ee eee ees 82 Creating a IMOVIE s civi sober deed evlot a eae one etdad wee haated aa A a a 82 TABLE OF CONTENTS B basiC ely dlle R Le alae BTT 83 EDI CA OWNING ie ie as hile ee WS ed eB eye ae ee NE Rte et 83 Moving tne CUISON toc stcetie ee eta cee eda tie eee ee sam heehee een ces eeenee ees 83 Changing TOCUS eeina eee let le ek ee Se eth a Yes tele a ede lec at teat a aa 83 Making SCICCHONS o c 4cuade evened ae hee i ee ee ste ae ane ae 84 Selecting multiple events sawed or ious Geass hiss ee RGeree tase her sear esos cer cantes 84 Modifying events in Selections 0c cc ee eee eee eee eens 85 Selecting a lime TanGe 2 ni22s oe bet St see ohare ein Sehr seit ea sae eee ten desu 85 LOOPING hair se a a e ade eae BiG eh ee rw ei atea Sew ce adc eek eee eek ak aed ae a a ead ee ele 86 Selecting events and a time range cece eee eee eee eee eens 86 Editing and ripple editing events 000 eee eens
91. the RealPlayer video display that users can click to jump to another RealMedia file HotSpotBrowse RealMedia Allows you to define an area in the RealPlayer video display that users can click to jump to a Web page that you specify HotSpotSeek RealMedia Allows you to define an area in the RealPlayer video display that users can click to jump Hotspots are defined HotSpotPlay MM SS LEFT TOP RIGHT BOTTOM LABEL FILENAME HotSpotBrowse MM SS LEFT TOP RIGHT BOTTOM LABEL URL HotSpotSeek MM SS LEFT TOP RIGHT BOTTOM LABEL MM SS The parameters for a typical HotSpotBrowse command for a hotspot rectangle that is 50 pixels wide by 20 pixels tall and lasts for 10 seconds would look like this to a point in the current RealMedia file HotSpotBrowse 00 10 0 0 50 20 Sonic Foundry http www sonicfoundry com All parameters are optional except the last The hotspot defaults to the entire duration of the file and the entire video frame if the duration and dimensions are not specified Defining Scott Studios data commands For WAV files using Scott Studios data command markers can be used to define information about the WAV file Command Description SCOTT EOM Calculates when the next queued clip starts playing in a Scott Studios system For more information please refer to your Scott Studios documentation SCOTT Cue In Set the beginning of a file in a Scott Studios System without performing destructive editing For more
92. the group The rest of the grouped events remain intact Clearing a group You may ungroup all events by clearing the entire group Clearing a group does not delete or remove events from your project 1 Right click one of the members of the group 2 From the shortcut menu choose Group and from the submenu choose Clear Selecting all members of a group While grouped events move together within their tracks selecting one member of a group does not automatically select every member of that group To select all members of a group right click one of the members of the group and from the shortcut menu choose Group and then choose Select All With all events in a group selected you can move the group to other tracks or cut and paste the group to a new location Disabling grouping temporarily The grouping behavior of all groups including video media files with included audio streams in Vegas can be temporarily disabled by clicking the Ignore Event Grouping button CHP 6 WORKING WITH EVENTS WORKING WITH EVENTS CHP 6 131 Working with Tracks CHAPTER Tracks contain the media events on the timeline of a project There are two types of tracks video and audio Each type of track has its own features and controls While tracks can be organized and mixed in any order track hierarchy can be important in determining the final output especially for video Because tracks are containers for events effects that are
93. the workspace it changes shape to indicate when you can move Zc resize or rotate C the overlay When the mouse cursor changes to a hand you can click and drag to move around the workspace Select the Zoom Edit Tool 1 to zoom using the mouse Click the workspace to zoom in or right click the workspace to zoom out You can also use a mouse wheel to zoom in and out on the workspace ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 14 232 B Using keyframes in track motion Keyframes are what create the motion in the track motion feature You can create modify and remove keyframes in the keyframe controller in the same way as with any other Vegas feature that uses keyframes For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 215 The keyframe controller in the Track Motion window has three attributes that can be animated Position Shadow and Glow Each effect can be animated independently The Shadow and Glow effects can be turned on and off Each effect has its own set of controls that appear on the left hand side of the window These controls can be accessed by clicking the respective item on the keyframe controller So e Note If any controls described in this section are not visible on the screen enlarge the Track Motion window by dragging the lower right corner until all controls are revealed eee Leann Position Size pao Espoo E Controlling the position of the overlay is easily accomplished in the Ce
94. they talk about the speed of a drive A drive that can transfer data at 80MB sec is worthless for video if it cannot sustain a much slower rate of S8MB sec for thirty minutes or more without dropping a frame Look to other computer video enthusiasts for additional advice Again the RPMs are a very good indicator because 7200 RPM IDE drives are usually newer c 1998 and older 7200 RPM drives are usually SCSI which are already higher quality drives to begin with e IDE vs SCSI While this was a big issue just a few years ago it has fortunately faded in importance Hard drives can be hooked up to your computer in a number of ways with the two largest divisions being IDE and SCSI This interface simply determines how much data can be transferred to and from the drive in a second The interface almost always far outstrips the performance of even the best hard disks and even the slower interfaces exceed the transfer requirements of video data SCSI hard disks are usually more expensive and require a special controller and while SCSI 2 promises 80MB sec transfer rates this is overkill for most people Newer IDE hard disks with designations of EIDE DMA Ultra 7 DMA ATA 33 and ATA 66 and newer drives that came out after this writing can all handle most sustained video requirements CPU and RAM memory While the CPU and the RAM are probably the most important overall aspects of a PC s speed and performance these factors are only third on the l
95. through the areas outside of the mask The entire setup is pictured in the following illustration E Mask track LS o Parent jji Masked video Child Background Fine tuning masks Depending on the source material creating a clean mask can be a tricky exercise A few tools and tricks can be used to fine tune a mask CHP 13 Solo the track Click the Solo button 371 on the track header to mute all of the other video tracks in a project This allows you to concentrate exclusively on the mask Toggle effects Turn individual plug ins on and off to isolate effects in a plug in chain Keep in mind that the order of the E Black and White HT Brightness and Contrast IV Invert Fo plug ins in the chain is important in determining the final composited output Isolate channels Isolate individual color channels in the Video Preview EJE window by clicking the Overlays H button Click the arrow button to the Tene right of the main button to select the specific channel to be isolated and Histogram Red whether to display this channel in grayscale only Then click the main button to REUSE toggle the channel display on and off The Alpha as Grayscale option isolates the Red alpha channel mask and displays it in grayscale For more information see ite Understanding the Video Preview window on page 229 S Red as Grayscale Green as Grayscale Blue as Grayscale Alpha az Grayscale USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING A
96. to View Set Selection to Project Select Loop Region Shift Te a Insert Marker Sie LARN ETATER eer Insert Region Selectively Prerender Video Shift M Clean Up Prerendered Video Delete All Delete All th Selector Inserting a marker at the cursor 1 Position the cursor where you want to place the marker 2 From the Insert menu choose Marker or press M 3 Type a name for the marker and press Enter If you do not want to name the marker simply press Enter Inserting a marker during playback During playback press M The marker appears on the marker bar You may name the marker after it has been set BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 a 1 01 Naming or renaming a marker 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker you want to name or rename The pointer changes to a hand icon 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Rename A text box opens next to the marker Start narration Ie T 9 E na m a 0 m p 4 Type the marker name 5 Press to set the marker s name You can also double click an existing name or double click the space just to the right of a marker to rename it Moving markers Markers can be repositioned by dragging them on the marker bar Navigating to markers You can jump the cursor to any marker on the timeline by clicking the marker You can also jump to a marker by pressing the number keys along the top of the key
97. to a CD Buffer underruns occur when data transferred to the CD R is too slow This may be caused by a variety of factors relating to optimizing your system Try writing the CD at a slower speed or prerendering the audio For more information see Burning a disc on page 175 Why can t work with footage captured using an MJPEG card Vegas requires that you have the MJPEG codec for the MJPEG card used to capture the video installed locally on your workstation Check to make sure that the appropriate MJPEG codec is installed on your PC TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX A 265 Trouble free video software solutions There are literally dozens of possible configurations of hardware for editing video on a PC While it is impossible to go into detail for each and every system the following explains some of the concepts behind the various settings in Vegas Editing and playing back full frame 30 fps video is one of the most demanding activities for any computer The hardware you use is an important part of the equation but there are a number of things you can do to optimize your PC for video The following list is arranged from the most to the least important e Close all other applications When capturing video or playing it back it is critical that no other applications interrupt this process Close any applications that are not vital This includes screen savers task schedulers and even virus detection software You can ensure that you have c
98. use of MainConcept MPEG technology MPEG renders can sometimes take more time than renders with some other formats MPEG video files can be played back on most computer systems MPEG video files can also be burned to CDs or DVDs for playback in standalone VCD SCVD and DVD players Sonic Foundry cannot guarantee the compatibility of MPEG files with VCD DVD authoring software or VCD SCVD and DVD standalone players Consult your specific authoring software s documentation for information on what constitutes a valid file and then customize the MPEG rendering properties to match More about the Wave64 and Perfect Clarity Audio formats The Wave64 w64 and Perfect Clarity Audio pca formats are proprietary formats developed by Sonic Foundry to work around some limitations inherent in other formats Currently neither is compatible with many other applications and may not be playable in other media players but both are excellent choices for Sonic Foundry projects e Wave64 files work around the maximum file size limitation inherent in the WAV format The Wave64 format has no maximum file size and is useful in long format productions e Perfect Clarity Audio is the Sonic Foundry Perfect Clarity Audio PCA format a compressed format that is completely lossless Unlike MP3 and other highly compressed formats which are lossy 100 of the quality of your audio is maintained by using the PCA format SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 16
99. your computer s microprocessor is not This results in a difference in processing speed Dithering The practice of adding noise to a signal to mask quantization noise see also Noise Shaping APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 276 r Drag and Drop A quick way to perform certain operations using the mouse in Vegas To drag and drop you click and hold a highlighted selection drag it hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse and drop it let go of the mouse button at another position on the screen Dynamic Range The difference between the maximum and minimum signal levels It can refer to a musical performance high volume vs low volume signals or to electrical equipment peak level before distortion vs noise floor For example orchestral music has a wide dynamic range while thrash metal has a very small always loud range Emphasis A rudimentary noise reduction process that involves a boost in the high frequencies during the recording of the CD and a complimentary cut in the same frequencies during the playback of the CD The result reduces high frequency noise without disrupting the natural frequency response of the source material If the emphasis flag is set for a track any CD player that has a de emphasis circuit will impart the high frequency cut on the track Be aware that Vegas cannot impart the pre emphasis boost on a track it can only set the emphasis flag Endian Little and Big Little and Big Endian describe t
100. 0 00 45 S T 00 00 50 a When stretching video events or slowing video down a set number of frames are extended across a period of time For example if you take source footage at 30 frames in a second and slow it so that only 15 source frames run during that same second an additional 15 frames must be created to maintain the project s 30 fps frame rate Simply duplicating frames is the easiest way to do this A more sophisticated method is to resample the frames of an event allowing Vegas to interpolate and redraw these intervening frames For more information see Resample video only on page 123 and Resampling video on page 187 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 5 L 1 1 3 Working with takes A take is a version of a scene or audio recording as in Scene 10 Take 7 which means the seventh time that scene number ten has been shot Vegas allows you to include a number of takes in the same location event of the project You can then rapidly switch between these separate takes to see which one fits into the project the best Although this is what takes are designed for you can actually use any media files you want as a take even completely different sounds or scenes Since an event is just a container of a specific length and at a specific location the actual content media file is easily changed Adding takes Multiple media files can be added to the timeline at the same time to a single event as takes You can also
101. 1 DV capture cards 262 271 DV format 189 190 out of range colors 189 selecting source media for 189 setting project properties for 189 templates for 189 Dynamic RAM video previews 232 Edge trimming 92 Edit Decision Lists EDL 188 Edit Details window 24 118 Ci audio CD track list category 119 resample 123 closed captioning 184 186 ene tee commands category 119 age V adding files as 113 customizing 120 displaying 119 edit functions 118 editing a CD layout 174 events category 119 markers category 120 regions category 120 changing active 113 copying event attributes using 114 deleting 114 displaying names of 114 previewing 114 recording audio as new 162 selected events category 120 aa Edit history clearing 99 Events Editing audio in external editor 106 channels 124 Edit I copying 87 diting tools crossfading 97 182 211 Envelope 128 N 84 cutting 88 ormal i defined 67 Selection 84 l Zoom 75 deleting 96 duplicating 92 Empty events 92 editing 41 42 Pavese Baie Took 478 140 empti 6 envelopes 125 128 Envelopes 125 128 137 141 grouping 43 128 129 adding 137 locking 41 adding points 138 moving by small increments 74 ASR 125 moving in time 73 changing fade curves 139 moving multiple 74 deleting from track s 139 moving single 74 deleting points 138 name changing 115 event envelopes 125 pasting 90 91 fade in and out 125 127 pitch shifti
102. 100 0 B Make Compositing Child button Child track In the third example a generated media event was added to the track below the first two tracks which are already paired in a parent child relationship The color gradient event in track three shows through the transparent area of the top two paired tracks 00 00 00 00 S Video D ap Level 100 0 Z Selecting compositing modes Vegas Video provides multiple compositing modes while Vegas Video LE limits you to source alpha compositing The Compositing Mode button W determines how the magan ain transparency in a video track is generated Since lower tracks Click to select a 5 ale show through higher tracks it is the compositing mode of the compositing mode Kathy higher track that determines how much of the lower track shows though The compositing mode of the lowest video track is a special case Selecting a mode for the lowest track affects its transparency against a black background To select a compositing mode click the Compositing Mode button and choose a mode from the menu that appears USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 13 201 The sample below uses a generated text event that is partially transparent For more information see Using generated media on page 198 Cae aie lai Set compositing P aas K Sonic Foundry Yegas Video 3 0 CompositingModes Yeg 7 mode for ee ee p p File Edt View Insert Tools O
103. 2 From the Insert menu choose either Audio Envelopes or Video Envelopes A submenu appears Envelopes that are currently displayed are selected 3 From the submenu click an envelope name The envelope of that type is removed from the selected track Alternately right click an empty area of a track choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and choose an envelope type from the submenu to remove that envelope _ 4 Note When you remove a track envelope from a track and then add it again all points are reset rr a WORKING WITH TRACKS 140 Using the Envelope Edit tool Envelopes can also be edited by using the Envelope Edit tool To use this tool click the Envelope Edit Tool button FT on the toolbar The advantage of switching to this tool to edit envelopes is that events cannot be moved when this tool is selected thereby protecting them from changes This effectively locks all of the events and effects in a project while the various envelopes are being modified Selecting and adjusting envelope points 1 Select the Envelope Edit Tool button 8 on the toolbar The Envelope Edit tool is active un onn 00 00 14 279 2 Click within a track to select it 3 Drag along the timeline to select envelope points 4 Drag the selected envelope points to a new position Drag to select envelope points To deselect envelope points click anywhere in the event that is not part of the envelope Cutting
104. 230 window 25 Video property settings 254 View buttons 77 78 Volume assignable effects fader 157 bus send fader 156 event envelopes 125 track envelopes 137 track fader 78 134 Wave64 w64 audio format 240 Web site accessing help 18 metadata examples 100 technical support 16 troubleshooting resources 236 263 271 What s This help using 18 Window docking area 22 Windows Media streaming commands 104 Z Zoom Edit Tool 75 Zooming 75 INDEX
105. 504 e edie Gdn needete ain atukeeeeteo test wit aetati wee 139 Removing track envelOpeS lt e eee eee eens 139 Using the Envelope Edit tool e 140 Locking envelopes to events lt rnnr nnn be Be he a i ee ie 141 Rendering to a new track n saasaa 141 Adding Audio Effects 6 924 x 143 WISING audio eNe iS 6 t tind tad Fe be dee ESS HRS Fee a baa ad waa 143 USING ee Tae Tle ciet nat a ie aia ch aia vy acd nina aan oe erie ae ae are 144 Creating a eaae nte 144 Adding plug ins to a plug in chain 2 1 eee eee 144 TABLE OF CONTENTS BS Saving customized plug in presets nnns cece eee eee eee eee eee eens 146 Arranging the order of pIUG INS nnna nannan nnnm eee eee eee teenies 146 Bypassing plug ins on the chain eb nananana annn beats ed eared a ea eeaw 147 Removing plug ins fr m a ch in 24222220040 e Sa sch dordaivee sin aa R RA N RR RRR R RR a sx 147 Saving DIUG IN CHAINS s 22 4 T Zro e ede eal ele eh ee bee eine els ead owe Oe tee See ie ER 148 Editing saved plug in Chains lt 4 62ceacrese seas eee eutewese sie eer Geeks agai 148 Organizing your s Ge hei eeen ee ee a bh BA ea a thee ea ae a ae eae 149 Applying non real time event effectS ccc eects 149 LISI UMS MIXE v6 ace Accshcive rris Soa we de a aaa oer Gace a eae 151 Using the Mixer WINdOW 000 cece eee eee eee e eens 151 Viewing the Mixer WINdOW lt lt lt 0c eee ee eens 151 Using the Mixer TOOIDGN isa wits
106. 87 CODYING EVENS aerie ee eee a a ee a eee a ede Seas 87 CUNG OV E E Sah Soh ek ee ord el genes cota ed cee A E 88 Pasting CVeMnSwsteisedcudencesdeteindiwddbashesanstestaads a a E E deduces 90 D plcating events TTT TTT 92 Inserting empty events and time 2 2 cc ee nannaa 92 PANG OVOS E tet het hea eee aan tee A eee teen oes oe 92 SDUTLING CVEINS scence daddeted cetsdt tht dues tueerieteie dies Seka TT 94 Slipping and SIIGiING CVEMIS 2544 3i0d 305 24 ben Sota kk ee Ree eee Roe Re oe Be hee eee 95 DEICtING CVeNIS a aR ineen aea e da ee elise eee eee eee ee Seed ee bee E 96 Cr ossfading events sicciietiiaetene i Se iie tier ii ee 8G ICETA eee 97 Using automatic crossfades este et Soe eee eet eee eee en deg abe aliawedenatas 97 Manually setting a crossfade a nnana ns cuenta eee eete sta hues te eewesengaw et oeenes 97 Changing ClossiaGe CHIVES 2 ere srext este cations os doi deduce exes esate altered ate 98 SICING a ChOSSiaGe 40 602 Soto 53G Sete eee he bie cinta e a See tae ee sd eat 98 Using undo and redo 5 20oi06 56068 4 2958 2 Bee seer neea eee goes eee ouees e 98 USM IMCL serris erria oes cna a a eta arte d beard TTT 98 Eae e seuraan wt eg grat eee Pee Ae ee he Ee i eee aie a eae ae Slane 99 Clearing the edit history cad seee th de hes heaedtestedtudses eke eee eee an cuyeteaets 99 Adding project markers and reGiOnsS 0 0 00 cece eee cette eee eee eee eeees 100 Working With ss Ta a oo 2bs rie Gewese tie ha
107. 92 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 13 n L Duplicating a generated media event Once you have added a generated media event and modified its settings you may duplicate it For more information see Duplicating events on page 92 When you duplicate a generated media event you have two options e Create a new copy The new event may be modified on its Paste Options HE own and is completely independent of the original event One or more events you have chosen to paste contains generated media e Create a copy that references the original The new event Re ae rae ie remains linked to the original generated media event Any change to either event is mirrored in the other Compositing Compositing is the process of mixing visual elements together into a final output In Vegas this means mixing tracks together vertically Masks generated text and chromakeying all involve compositing Understanding how compositing works in Vegas is important to understanding these and many other video track mixing techniques Y Vegas Video provides multiple compositing modes and parent child video track grouping for masks while Vegas Video LE limits you to source alpha compositing Understanding the parent child track relationship The key to understanding overlays masks transparency and compositing is to understand the parent child relationship between tracks In general terms the parent track is the highest track in a group of tr
108. AL DV D1 or other rectangular variations Using the wrong pixel aspect ratio can result in distortions or stretching of the video Select the aspect ratio for the final movie s destination Consult your hardware manual if you are in doubt about the appropriate ratio The pixel aspect ratio is unrelated to the frame s aspect ratio e Frame rate The television frame rate in the US North and Central America parts of South America and Japan NTSC is 29 97 frames per second fps In many parts of the world including Europe and much of Asia the television standard is PAL at 25 fps France Russia and most of Eastern Europe use SECAM which is a variation on PAL and also uses 25 fps e Full resolution rendering quality For most projects Good is the recommended setting If you have critical material where nothing but the highest quality rendering will do select Best Please note that rendering time may increase dramatically as large amounts of extra processing is required for the Best setting e Prerendered files folder Vegas saves prerendered preview files to this location For more information see Prerendering video on page 231 e Start all new projects with these settings Select this option to always use these settings for new projects USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 12 a 1 91 Modifying advanced video properties Click the Advanced button in the Project Properties dialog to access these attributes In most cases the default se
109. F6 or Ctrl Shift Tab Tab These commands refer to playing back and previewing your project Description Keys Description Keys Start stop playback Spacebar Play back from any window Ctrl Spacebar or F12 Stop playback Esc Scrub playback J K L pg 81 Looped playback mode Q Build dynamic RAM preview Shift B pg 232 Pause Enter Preview in Player Ctrl Shift M Record Ctrl R Prerender video Shift M Edit commands These commands refer to editing commands Description Keys Description Keys Undo Ctrl Z or Delete selection Delete Alt Backspace Redo Ctrl Shift Z or Split event s S Ctrl Y Cut selection Ctrl X or Trim crop selected events Ctrl T Shift Delete Copy selection Ctrl C or Normal Edit Tool Ctrl D Ctrl Insert Paste Ctrl V or Switch to next editing tool D Shift Insert Paste repeat Ctrl B Switch to previous editing tool Shift D Paste insert Ctrl Shift V Open in audio editor Ctrl E INTRODUCTION CHP 1 e 20 CHP 1 Cursor placement commands These commands refer to cursor navigation within the track view Description Keys Go to beginning of selection Home or view if no selection Go to end of selection or view End if no selection Go to beginning of project Ctrl Home or W Go to end of project Ctrlt End or E Move left by grid marks Page Up Move right by grid marks Page Down Go to Ctrl G Jump to Marker 0 9 keys not numeric keypad Jump to opposite side of Numeric keypad selection 5 Center in V
110. IC EDITING TECHNIQUES 90 r Pasting events Once information is copied to the Clipboard you may choose a variety of ways to paste the Clipboard items Vegas always pastes from the insertion point s position along the timeline When ripple edit mode is enabled Vegas pushes material down the track to make room for pasted material The exact behavior of the ripple depends on what is being pasted If one or more events are pasted only those tracks where pasted material appears are ripple edited 1 Move the cursor to the desired location on the timeline 2 Click either the track number or within the track where you want to paste the event This track is the focus track there can be only one focus track at a time If you are pasting multiple events from different tracks Vegas automatically creates new tracks as needed 3 Click the Paste button on the toolbar Clipboard events are pasted at the cursor position on the track Existing track events can be overlapped with newly pasted information Clipboard contents Events before paste Paste position at cursor 00 00 19 29 L l l RE puguin p a Events after paste Events after paste in ripple edit mode Ea Paste position Paste position at cursor at cursor 00 00 19 29 DU 00 24 22 00 00 29 29 00 00 19 29 00 00 24 29 I E DUDU 29 Events bisected by the cursor position are split BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L 91 Using paste repeat Use pa
111. ING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 13 e 2023 Creating masks Masks are used to create overlays limit the effects of a filter and to create transparent titles In their simplest form masks work by making a particular color in an image or video transparent More complex effects can be created with gradients smoothly blending transparent areas together and by altering the sensitivity of the mask Parent child video track grouping using the Make Compositing Child button is only available in Vegas Video Creating image masks You can use Vegas generated media to create simple masks You can also create masks from just about any image file a Masks created using color gradient generated media events 1 Create an image of a solid white circle on a black background in any paint program This will be the mask 2 Add the mask image file as an event into the top most track on the timeline 3 Insert a video event just below the mask track This is the background video behind the mask and is the event that is masked 4 Click the Make Compositing Child button located on the track header of the background video lower track This makes the lower track the child of the mask track the parent track In the following example the white circle is a BMP image file Black is 100 opaque and white is completely transparent 00 00 09 25 Video Preview Compositing J m k Child M Level 100 D B indicator
112. L E Background Sh dha i 0 Binna ap Level 100 0 PR Child button Project 320K240e32 29 970 Frame 392 Preview 320K240e32 29 97p Display 320K240 16 CHP 13 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 204 Masks can also be partially transparent By using gradients and grayscale images smooth blending can be achieved Black is still 100 transparent and white is opaque but the grays in between are only partially opaque The effects of the masks are very clear in these examples but this is not how they would actually be used in a real production Masks are commonly used to isolate a portion of the video from an effect Masks do not need to be black and white or grayscale nor do they need to be still images a Note It is best to use images that are the same size as your project s frame size You may also need to change the pixel aspect ratio of an image file to get it to display correctly For more information see Correcting images for DV pixel aspect ratios on page 181 and Modifying media file properties on page 191 ps Creating video masks Video files can also be used to create masks although the process can be more complicated than using an image as a mask The key to any mask is contrast Increasing difference between the light and dark areas of a video file can be accomplished using video effects plug ins 1 Insert the video that you want to use as a mask into a video track 2 Drag a Black and Whit
113. Mixer window s preview bus for audio files or to the Video Preview window for video files 4 Note You can use the same mini transport bar buttons in the Media Pool window to preview files in the Media Pool PR 1 Select a file in the Explorer window 2 Click the Play button to listen to the file 3 Click the Stop button Ml or select a different file to stop previewing the file aa Note To automatically preview selected files click the Auto Preview button on the Explorer window s transport bar nnn Using the Media Pool Media files both video and audio tend to be the largest files on your hard drive It is therefore not always easy to move them around and impractical to store multiple copies of these files You can add media files to the Media Pool in Vegas to organize them before any editing begins Once you begin working on a project all files you add to the timeline are automatically included in the Media Pool From the View menu choose Media Pool to open this window if it is not already visible Using Media Pool views You can control the information that is displayed in the Media Pool by clicking the Views button Hl and selecting a view musicbed waw powderskier avi Sonic Foundry Color Video 3209240924 29 970 fos 00 00 05 06 Alpha None Field Order None progre Explorer Trimmer Media Pool Transitions Video The Detailed view displays all the
114. ND MASKS 206 ___ Using the Mask Generator The Mask Generator is a plug in that controls the transparency of events to be used as masks Apply the plug in to an event or a track in the same way as any other plug in just drag and drop The Mask Generator plug in can be found in the Video FX window from the View menu choose Video FX The Mask Generator and parent child video track grouping is only available in Vegas Video Lens Flare Levels Light Rays Min and Max Mirror Finch Punch Pixelate Threshold Timecode Red Channel Mask Green Channel Mask Unsharp Mask Al aue al 4 K immer Media Pool Preset Blue Channel Mask Alpha Mask Transitions Video FX Text Backgrounds 4 Z The Mask Generator is also an automatic part of the compositing process between parent and child tracks To open the Mask Generator window click the Mask FX button J on any track that is the parent of another For more information see Compositing on page 199 Mask FX button USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS pl Overlay D Level 100 0 P z Video D ap Level 100 0 cn P S ik amp y CHP 13 207 How the Mask Generator works The following illustration demonstrates some of the effects of the Mask Generator The background image is the original mask There are five ellipses on the mask white red green blue and an invisible alpha
115. P 15 e 3323 Using histograms A histogram helps you evaluate the color levels and contrast of your video Use the Video Preview window s histogram before rendering your project to find and correct out of range color values that could cause problems on the destination playback device The bar graph plots the number of pixels that exist for each color intensity For example when using the Histogram Blue setting the vertical axis represents the number of pixels and the horizontal axis represents the RGB color range from 0 0 0 to 0 0 255 The Mean value indicates the average intensity of all pixels in the graph The Standard Deviation value indicates the average percentage by which pixels in the graph vary from the Mean value Preview Histogram Blue Video Preview ey sh Ak Preview Quality Ht By Ted Video Preview ey eh sth Preview Quality E3 Td Graph Project 320 240 32 29 97p Frame 1 236 Preview 320 240x32 29 97p Display 320 240 16 Mean and M Standard m T _ Mean 37 19 Standard Deviation 17 672 Deviation values Project 32024032 29 97p Frame 1 236 Preview 320x2403 29 97p Display 22092491 5 To get comfortable using the histogram use an external monitor to preview your video and watch the video output and histogram as you use plug ins to modify the colors For more information see Using an external monitor on page 235 1 Position your cursor on the frame or clip you want t
116. SSARY 970 AVI A file format of digital Video for Windows Vegas allows you to open edit and create new AVI files Bandwidth Refers to the EQ plug in that is built in Each frequency band has a width associated with it that determines the range of frequencies that are affected by the EQ An EQ band with a wide bandwidth affects a wider range of frequencies than one with a narrow bandwidth Bandwidth can also refers to the amount of data that can be transferred via a connection such as a network or modem For example streaming media must be compressed due to the limited bandwidth of most Internet connections Beats Per Measure In music theory the time signature of a piece of music contains two pieces of information the number of beats in each measure of music and which note value gets one beat Vegas uses this notion to determine the number of ticks to put on the ruler above the track view and to determine the spacing when the ruler is displaying Measures amp Beats Beats Per Minute BPM In music theory the tempo of a piece of music can be written as a number of beats in one minute If the tempo is 60 BPM a single beat occurs once every second Lower BPM s equal slower tempo and vice versa Bit A bit is the most elementary unit in digital systems Its value can only be 1 or O corresponding to a voltage in an electronic circuit Bits are used to represent values in the binary numbering system As an example the 8 bit bi
117. San l Master bus Hardware CHP 1 INTRODUCTION 34 Video Signal Flow Vegas Video provides unlimited video tracks and fourteen compositing modes Vegas Video LE limits you to two video tracks and source alpha compositing Velocity envelope Media interpretation _ Media FX i field order frame rate alpha channel etc Event Pan Crop 2 a Child track Oo Level 100 0 EES child track a FE Background i S 1 D D Level 100 0 Z K 0 qp Level 100 0 lt gt Compositing Mode Mode ERS Child track i BIT D o Level 100 0 D Fy Video Output FX T ale Preview Quality e Ea M Video Output EX INTRODUCTION CHP 1 35 Tutorial and Sample Projects CHAPTER a 4 B 4 Xie This chapter is designed to familiarize you with the basic features and tools of Vegas while creating an actual project This chapter also provides descriptions of several sample projects that demonstrate different Vegas features s 5 ie em a Note The tutorial and sample projects demonstrate advanced video features e g unlimited video and audio tracks video envelopes found only in Vegas Video a ea Tutorial This tutorial will teach you how to place media files in the project edit them and save them together into a video file The files you need to create this sample project are included on the program s
118. Save As command in the File menu to save a copy of a project with a new name This is useful for backing up different versions of a project For more information see Creating a copy of a project using Save As on page 238 Getting media files You can add media from a variety of sources to a Vegas project You can add audio and video files record audio into a track capture video from a video camera or extract music from a CD You can also create media such as text overlays backgrounds and credit rolls from within Vegas For more information see Using generated media on page 198 Selecting media Vegas supports a wide range of media file types You may select any of the media file types listed below to add to your Vegas project Format Extension Definition GIF gif 256 index color lossless image and animation format widely used on the Internet JPEG jpg True color lossy Internet image format Macintosh AIFF File aif Standard audio format used on Macintosh computers Y MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 mpg MPEGs files compressed using a lossy audio video compression N method can be used with Vegas Video MPEG Layer 3 mp3 Highly compressed audio file OggVorbis OgGg A patent free audio encoding and streaming technology Photoshop psd Adobe Photoshop proprietary image format flattened Portable Network Graphic png True color or indexed color lossy or lossless Internet image format QuickTime mov qt Quicktime standard audio video f
119. T hooo Z Magnify view ZT 34 9 lt Grid density 16 Show Properties oc i TTT I a LL Lock Aspect Ratio Orientation F Size About Center Track area 0 Ore Move Freely or Move in X or Y only Handles 00 00 04 29 00 00 09 29 _ Position Shadow 2 P Glow 7 C Keyframe controller ble AP E 00 00 00 00 Ei ae You can also create blue guide lines to help you align objects by moving to the tet edge of the ruler and dragging towards the center of the workspace to create a new _ Create anew guide line Existing guides can be repositioned by dragging Guidelines can also be used to snap the video window Using the track motion shortcut menu When you right click anywhere in the Track Motion window a shortcut menu appears yg U U U e Restore returns the overlay to its original state a e Center moves the overlay to the center of the frame Flip Horizontal e Flip Horizontal flips the overlay backwards or left to right SS S R R Match Output Aspect ka Flip Vertical flips the overlay upside down Match Source Aspect e Match Output Aspect sets the aspect ratio to the frame value E gE e Match Source Aspect sets the x y ratio to the overlay value L L Background sets the color of the overlay window Controlling the track motion workspace The track motion workspace allows you to position the video within the project frame As you move the mouse around
120. URES CHP 12 g Using Video FX 2 Z Compositing and Masks a me ad Video plug ins in Vegas include effects and generators Effects cover a broad range of electronic modifications that can be used to improve substandard video or artistically enhance a production Generators can be used to create custom video events such as credit rolls or gradient overlays Vegas provides a variety of options in compositing video and using masks Compositing involves mixing visual elements together into a final output Vegas provides multiple compositing modes from which to choose Masks which are used extensively in television and movies are an important part of creating overlays Together these professional tools can help you polish your productions Y Vegas Video provides multiple compositing modes and parent child video track grouping for masks while Vegas Video LE limits you to source alpha compositing Using video effects Vegas provides a great variety of video effects plug ins that are ready eg for you to drag and drop onto your projects media files tracks and Preset events Previews of the different effect presets appear in the Video FX window In addition to the presets each plug in has individual controls that allow you to customize the effects in precise detail Video effects can be animated using keyframes For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 215 Black and White Black Restor
121. X window Video Event Fe Video Event FX Capital Dome Plug in chain fly Film Effects Y Sepia IZ Add Noise fo Click a plug in to Preset Untitled Li x modify its settings in th n ower Sa C SONIC FOUNDRY Film Effects Clear the check box ie l fo x0 on a plug in to Color bypass the plug in IO IZ Convert to greyscale Particle Settings Drag a plug in Dust lt IZ Enabled to move it Amount E 16 00 within the chain 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 29 HHT SApS Bypassing plug ins Video effects plug ins can also be temporarily bypassed turned off by deselecting them clearing the check box on the plug in Since the effects are rendered very quickly in the Video Preview window turning a plug in on and off allows you to see the results of the plug in on your project Changing the plug in order Plug in chain Shift Plug In Left Right Video effects plug ins are applied in the order that GS a H E 12 they appear in the chain You can change this order aan ERE Add Noise Fo by dragging the plug in button to a new location in Sx as aT ak x E oe the chain Alternately you can click the Plug In Chain button in the Video FX windowand J S Packages reorder the plug ins in the Plug In Chooser dialog _ Filter Packages edd m Sonic Foundry Add Noise F l Remove E Sonic Foundry Black and white to Sonic Foundry Black Restore Save As m Sonic Foundr
122. a CD ROM etc The Vegas project veg itself is not altered during the rendering process Selecting the format and compression method Multimedia video files can be rendered to a number of formats such as AVI or MOV Compressing video files is an important part of creating a movie In video the program that compresses the video is called a codec The codec is important in determining the quality and size of the final media file We will use the Sonic Foundry DV Digital Video codec which is part of the standard DV templates provided in Vegas 1 From the File menu choose Render As The Render As dialog appears Save in Gal Sample Projects amp Al l beach awi kayaker avi boat avi in mountains awi 2 Select the drive and folder where you want to save the rendered project fire avi ra powderskier avi i f fireweed avi in skiing avi 3 Type a new name in the File name box if necessary horse avi in sunset avi implosion awi ra talkinghead awi 4 In the Save as type drop down list select Video for Windows avi File name MT utorial avi 5 In the Template drop down list select NTSC DV eee Video tor Windows av A This template uses the Sonic Foundry DV codec The OO O l anas Description box provides information on the template an escription Audio 48 KHz 16 bit Stereo PCM About uncompressed 6 Clear the Render loop region only check box Video 29 97 fps 720x480 Lo
123. a eet a 0 Ore ve va pee ep pe ee wa Se IT bo K J TO E T Sasa R ne TO 0 aL nema NIE amp O h Xb Preview Quality 2S 9 amp hb Xb Preview Qualty He gt ES d Project 720 480x32 29 971 Preview 360 240x32 29 97p Frame 2 383 Display 360 240 16 E O k Preview Quality H E3 Project 720 480 32 29 971 Frame 2 501 Preview 360 240x32 29 97p Display 360 240 16 A generated color gradient event masks the edges of the image to enhance the zoom Project 720 480x32 29 971 Frame 2 632 Preview 36024032 29 97p Display 360 240 16 Project 720 480 32 29 97i Preview 360x240x32 29 97p Frame 2 785 Display 360 240 16 Using pan and scan Another way to use keyframe animation in the Event Pan Crop window is panning or pan and scan Pan and scan is a technique commonly used when film is converted for television Movie screens and film are usually wider 2 35 1 than television 1 33 1 When you transfer the film to video you have four choices 1 squash the film horizontally to fit distorting it in the process 2 crop it possibly losing CHP 14 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION J20 je information on the sides 3 letter box it so the top and bottom have black areas and the picture is shorter overall and 4 pan and scan Pan and scan is a variation of cropp
124. a set of pointers is established to tell the program to play the active sections during playback Nonlinear Editing NLE A method of editing video non sequentially or in random order Editing video in Vegas is nonlinear as opposed to editing video tape which is linear Normalize Refers to raising the volume so that the highest level sample in the file reaches a user defined level Use this function to make sure you are fully utilizing the dynamic range available to you Nyquist Frequency The Nyquist Frequency or Nyquist Rate is one half of the sample rate and represents the highest frequency that can be recorded using the sample rate without aliasing For example the Nyquist Frequency of 44 100 Hz is 22 050 Hz Any frequencies higher than 22 050 Hz produce aliasing distortion in the sample if an anti aliasing filter is not used while recording Pan To place a mono or stereo sound source perceptually between two or more speakers Peak File sfk Vegas displays the waveform of audio files graphically on a computer monitor This visual information must be generated by Vegas when the audio file is opened and can take a few seconds Vegas then saves this information as a peak file sfk This file stores the information for displaying waveform information so that opening a file is almost instantaneous The peak file is stored in the directory in which the file resides and has an sfk extension If the peak file is not in the same dir
125. ab s Generate MIDI Timecode is used Full frame messages are used by some external audio synchronizers to seek a proper location prior to synchronization For example tape based recorders benefit from seeking to full frame messages because of the time required to move the transport to the proper location However full frame messages are ignored by some devices and may actually cause unexpected behavior in other devices Check your hardware documentation to find out if it supports full frame messages MIDI Clock Output This tab contains controls for MIDI clock output It is only displayed MTCinput MTC Output MIDI Clock Output if a device is selected for MIDI clock output on the Sync tab Be Ee Se ae L L E RoseenOREERONOE Advanced Sync Preferences H x Song Position Pointer generation Send Start instead of Continue when beginning playback When peed selected Vegas sends a Start command rather than a Continue OF Dip set ae steal dRe sine me command when Generate MIDI Clock is enabled on the Sync tab Normally Vegas sends a Continue command to allow the chasing device to start at a specific time However some older MIDI sequencers do not support the Continue command and must start Song Position Pointer generation Specifies when Vegas sends Song Position Pointer messages when Generate MIDI Clock is enabled on the Sync tab Song Position Pointer messages are used by MIDI applications and devices to seek to a proper location p
126. acks often only two and the behavior of the child tracks i e how they are composited together is determined by the parent track One of the sample projects included on the Vegas CD demonstrates compositing For more information see Compositing with masks on page 61 The following three examples demonstrate different compositing relationships The first example shows two independent tracks The top track contains a generated text event that has a transparent background The second track therefore shows through the transparent areas in the Video Preview window Since the second track does not have any transparent areas any tracks below it would be completely obscured 00 00 00 00 EE Overlay Bo oi i OD o R E ap Level 100 D A BP video ah S 1 D qp Level 100 0 dl B CHP 13 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 200 In the second example track two is the child track of track one the parent track This parent child relationship was set up by clicking the Make Compositing Child button 4 on track two s track header This makes the text in track one act as a mask over track two allowing the fire to show through the mask i e the text The region outside of the text is still transparent but there is nothing below these tracks so it appears black Parent child video track grouping using the Make Compositing Child button is only available in Vegas Video 00 00 00 00 a Overlay D Parent track qp Level
127. add regions within media files as takes For more information see Adding regions as takes on page 118 Adding media files to the timeline as takes 1 Locate the media files that you want to insert as takes in the Explorer and select them Select a range by holding and clicking the first and last file in the range or select nonadjacent files by holding and clicking the various clips individually 2 Right click and drag one of the selected clips in the group to the timeline 3 From the shortcut menu choose Add as Takes ee eS Note To add either just the audio or just the video portions of files as takes choose Video Only Add Video as Takes or Audio Only Add Audio as Takes from the shortcut menu NE Snr Adding takes to existing events Media files can also be added to existing events as takes 1 Right click a media file in the Explorer and drag it to an existing event 2 From the shortcut menu choose Add as Takes Selecting takes When you add an event with multiple takes a single event is inserted into a track The last clip that was selected determines the duration of the event and is set as the active take 1 Right click an event with multiple takes 2 From the shortcut menu choose Take 3 From the submenu choose Next Take or Previous Take or choose the name of the take from the list at the bottom of the submenu Alternately click the event and press T to select the next take or T to select the previous take
128. ag D nnr TTT 205 Wsing the Mask Genel lon lt sss0s2cacetsGesseetacneoaneeeee eee eaure aT peste aa 206 CHROMIGKE WING 220 vane R anaes eee we R T eed wel dau was sala mace 208 Adding Video Transitions and Motion 00 211 TABLE OF CONTENTS e 11 Understanding basic transitions 0 e e e eee eens 211 Clea ce aes aise pace Ba se ee ee hs sce eee tes oe ee ee ey le eee ee ee tees 211 OSS AS cei er arte ae eee ee ke a ce ee ea eh eet ne Nee esha Ne eee ete et ae 211 Using transition CHCClS oenttieoeeedbd data diabedah eth a n wean 211 AGGING a transition seese ASES aedeagal ae eee ee gales nE coe see noe eee 212 Adding a transition to the end of an event 0 0 eee eee eens 212 Understanding tacklayers ssireii reii ea a siete wet eoe eae ee 212 CONVEFING a cutta Ta Te TTT 213 Previewmnga g Tse Le T 214 Moding a MallsilOny lt c240 retr etree ore e ene Se AS Ra cee he Eee Rae Oss 214 Saving custom settings aS a preset 0c cc eee eee eee eee ees 214 Using keyframe animation e e tee ee VER Nw See hea Bee 215 Understanding the keyframe controller 000 cece eee eens 215 Adding Keyone S x dee cinta dae cdc vaccacd see Sauce Lacie nga Sth ae a aa a Gags aiud ora E ii E 216 Deleting keyframes senaera beatin FA Ee bE be boy bse b ow ee Gea eee es 216 Navigating in the keyframe controller 000 ccc eee eens 216 Moding keyframes 24 324 32natoen eb rpe eke mace eee eee eerste eee
129. age 1323 height LZ Maximize track Maximizes track height For more information see Changing track height on page 133 height Restore track Restores track height For more information see Changing track height on page 133 height psl Expand track Displays the A B roll For more information see Understanding track layers on page 212 layers Expand track Displays track keyframes on the timeline For more information see Working with keyframes keyframes in track view on page 217 Track motion Track motion is used to move a video track across a background Picture in picture effects and scrolling title sequences are two simple cases where this tool is important For more information see Adding track motion on page 223 mil H Track FX Adds track effects plug ins For more information see Using video effects on page 193 E Mute Temporarily disables playback of the track so that you can focus on other tracks For more information see Muting a track on page 136 Al Solo Isolates a track for playback by muting the other tracks For more information see Soloing a track on page 1 36 areas Track name Allows you name a track To name a track double click the scribble strip and type the scribble strip track s name For more information see Naming or renaming a track on page 132 Levet 100 0 2 Composite Determines the opacity transparency of the video track Drag the slider to control the level slider transparency or blending of t
130. all box appears at the _ bottom of the event thumbnail with the frame offset time or timecode The small black arrow marks the exact position of that frame in time When the workspace is zoomed in far enough each thumbnail represents a single numbered frame in the source video file At intermediate zoom levels marks between the frame numbers show the location of intermediate frames These frame marks are not visible at lower magnifications 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences 2 Click the Video tab 3 Select an option from the Show source frame numbers on event thumbnails as drop down list 4 Click OK Changing the ruler format The ruler in Vegas can be customized to display a number of different standard formats The format that you select affects how the ruler and Time Display window display time units For more information see Timecode in Vegas on page 270 To change the ruler s format right click the ruler and select the desired time format from the shortcut menu or from the Options menu choose Ruler Format and select the desired time unit You may also change ruler settings on the Project Properties dialog s Ruler tab For more information see Ruler tab on page 255 CHP 17 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS 252 p ____ The following is a description of the different time units available in Vegas hh hours mm minutes ss seconds and ff frames Time format name Units Samples numbered startin
131. ame attributes are copied from the previous keyframe Click the first keyframe to select it Drag the Noise level slider to O Click the last keyframe to select it Drag the Noise level slider to 0 Click the second keyframe to select it From the Preset drop down list select Grainy oO a A O Hold and drag the second keyframe to duplicate it Position this new keyframe between the second and final keyframes CHP 14 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 222 z The effect is off at the first keyframe and smoothly transitions to a grainy effect at the second keyframe at which point the effect remains constant until the third keyframe Then the effect gradually fades out until it reaches a minimum value at the last keyframe Keyframe 1 Keyframes 2 and 3 Keyframe 4 Noise None Noise Grainy Noise None 00 00 00 00 The results of gradually transitioning into an effect using keyframe animation Animating generated text You can add a generated text event to a project by dragging a text generator from the Text Backgrounds window For more information see Using generated media on page 198 You can then animate the text by adding keyframes Not all attributes of generated text media can be animated using keyframes however You cannot for example morph one text message into a different one Some aspects can be easily and smoothly animated using the keyframe controller such as text color transparency l
132. an be a big performance advantage CPU usage If you have checked your RAM usage and disk usage and you are still experiencing gapping you can try to adjust how Vegas utilizes the central processing unit CPU Try the following to optimize CPU usage s Zoom out ctri riel fully on the track view while playing so that the screen does not have to scroll to keep the cursor on it e Run fewer DirectX plug ins e Make sure that the peak files are built for all of the audio data in the project before playing Peaks are only built for those files on screen You can get into the situation where the screen scrolls as it plays and Vegas ends up building peaks on the fly You can play while peaks are being built but gapping is a distinct possibility Press before playback to rebuild peaks for all of the events on or off of the screen Why do mono events increase 6 dB when panning a track hard In Vegas all audio events are considered stereo A mono audio event is interpreted as a stereo event with the same data in both channels If you re using the Add Channels panning mode this duplication doubles the amplitude and results in a 6 dB increase in volume when you pan a track hard left or right Try using the Constant Power panning mode instead Right click the multipurpose slider and choose Constant Power from the shortcut menu For more information see Adjusting stereo panning on page 135 Why do buffer underruns occur during a test or real write
133. an be used to control a plug in over time Keyframes are added to the keyframe controller at the bottom of the Video FX window Since a number of plug ins can be added to a single event track or project click the plug in s button in the chain and modify the particular attributes and keyframe controller for that plug in For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 215 and Animating video effects plug ins on page 221 Using generated media Generated media is a special class of plug in that creates virtual media files contained in events on the timeline These virtual files are stored in the Media Pool and their properties can be viewed and modified there Generated media provide an easy way to add text backgrounds or test patterns to your project You can view the generators by choosing Text Backgrounds from the View menu to display the Text Backegrounds window Generated media events can be animated using keyframes For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 215 and Animating generated text on page 222 Generated media Description Color gradient Creates gradient colored events to be used behind overlays as masks or for fades Credit roll Creates events that format your test into credits Solid color Creates solid colored events to be used behind overlays or for fades Test pattern Creates standard test patterns that can be used to calibrate your video output stream Many studios and broadcast fa
134. ange any of the values for a media file these changes are saved for that file in the current project only If you want to change the default settings for a particular type of video file whenever that type of file is used in Vegas click the Save settings to video profiles for future auto detection button 1 to the right of the Stream list This adds an entry to a file called vegas video profiles ini that can be referenced for future use e Stream If the file has more than one stream of the given type this allows you to select the particular stream to work with CHP 12 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 192 yz e Attributes Format Frame rate Displays basic information about the file e Field order This is used to control how the video file is handled on a television monitor and depends on your hardware If a media file is jittery or jumpy when played on a television changing this setting may help e Pixel aspect ratio This can be changed but should always match the source video s properties e Alpha channel The alpha channel determines how transparency is handled in a file The default Alpha Channel setting for most video files is None PNG image files can have an alpha channel that is automatically detected by Vegas Modifying output properties Final output properties can be adjusted when you render your final movie For more information see Creating custom rendering settings for AVI files on page 243 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEAT
135. ans every other line from top to bottom twice for every picture or frame For example the first scan from top to bottom might scan all of the odd numbered lines first then jump back to the top of the screen and in the second scan draw all of the remaining even numbered lines completing the frame The two fields are said to be interlaced together to form a single frame The illustration that follows shows how two frames in a video are actually composed of two fields each for a total of four fields These fields can be referred to as field one F1 and field two F2 Obviously it is critical that these two fields are paired together to create a whole frame What may not be so obvious is that the actual order of these two fields is not particularly important In other words F1 could be scanned first and then F2 or F2 could be scanned first and then Fl Both situations would create a perfectly valid error free frame of video While that may sound like good news in reality this is the source of all of the problems associated with field order Since both methods are technically correct both methods have been used It is important to use the correct order when rendering video files for your particular hardware capture card APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING 268 pI TT ER aAa T PR frame 1 frame 1 frame 2 frame 2 frame 1 frame 2 The next illustration shows the effects of incorrectly interlacing a frame of video In this case F2 from fram
136. applied to a track apply to every event in that track Vegas Video provides unlimited audio and video tracks and fourteen compositing modes Vegas Video LE limits you to four audio tracks two video tracks and source alpha compositing Managing tracks Once you have added a track to your project you may perform basic editing tasks on it such as duplicating deleting and renaming Adding an empty track Vegas creates tracks for you when you drag events to empty spaces in the timeline You can also add empty eventless tracks to a project These tracks can be used to directly record into or serve as placeholders for specific media that you will add later For example you may want to create an empty track and then record a voiceover directly into a project 1 Right click in either the track view or the track header to display a shortcut menu 2 Choose Insert Audio Track or Insert Video Track 00 00 09 29 You may also add an empty track from the Insert menu by choosing Audio Track or Video Track Vegas adds an empty track at the bottom f the Track List Right click to Open Suip O t e ac St view shortcut jw er Sudio Track Cti menu 59 Insert Video Track Ctrl Shift O Duplicating a track Preferences You may duplicate a track in your project including all of the events contained on it When a track is duplicated it is placed directly below the original track Other existing tracks are moved down on the track header
137. aptions that Template Untitled g x match the voiceover script The sixth command clears Command TEXT lt the display of the last caption in the Windows Media Player The final command opens a browser window to a Parameter jit WAS an amazing summer adventure i O URL Double click a command marker to view the ooo Bg settings for the command Position 0o 00 0021 Cancel You can also view all commands in the Edit Details window Choose Edit Details from the View menu and then choose Commands from the Show drop down list For more information see Working with command markers on page 103 and Adding closed captioning to Windows Media Video WMV files on page 184 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS CHP 2 L B 1 Rendering for Web delivery Render the project asa WMV file Select a higher rate Kbps template in the Render As dialog to increase the video quality For more information see Rendering a project on page 239 Play the rendered file in Windows Media Player 7 or later to view the closed captioning and open the URL ee Note For the closed captions to display select Now Playing Tools from the View menu in the Windows Media Player and choose Captions from the submenu E Panning with still images This sample project adds motion to still images using the Event Pan Crop window Track effects The video track has a Sepia effect applied to it to make the images look like old photographs Clic
138. ast on page 233 A Soola barni YH T Invert out of range colors F CHP 12 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 190y Be aware that applying the Broadcast Colors effect results in recompression of the video As a result render times can increase significantly when the effect is applied to the entire project With the Sonic Foundry DV codec and the smooth clamping capability of the Broadcast Colors effect you will not see any serious degradation in picture quality The only noticeable difference will be in pure white portions of the video which will be smoothly clamped to legal broadcast levels Modifying video properties Modifying project video properties Project video properties can be accessed by clicking the File menu and choosing Properties or by clicking the Project Video Properties button amp on the Video Preview window Many of these settings are identical to the settings found on the Project tab of the Custom Settings dialog Final render properties set up in the Custom Settings dialog override the following Project Properties settings For more information see Video tab on page K These properties control all of the default settings for your project Without making any changes these are also the settings that are used to create a final rendered movie file e Template Select a preset template to automatically Project Properties HE configure the remaining video controls in this dialog Video Audio Rule
139. at can be set appear in the Set Default Track Properties E a d 3 l Audio track properties Video track properties Og IZ Volume IZ Composite Mode g r Q PanT w Height 1 Set up a track in your project with the properties to use as nee 5 dite default settings for new tracks ed Tied j 2 Right click the track number and choose Set Default Track Properties The Set Default Track Properties dialog appears T Restore original defaults D Cancel 3 Select the check boxes that you want to set as defaults 4 Click OK Vegas creates any new tracks in the project with these defaults To return to the original settings for new tracks select the Restore original defaults check box in the Set Default Track Properties dialog rking with track envelopes Track envelopes allow you to control and automate volume audio panning opacity and fade to color effects of a particular track over time The following are available envelope types Track Type Envelope type Description Color Audio Volume Controls track volume Blue Audio Bus send volume Controls track level sent to bus Lilac Audio Assignable effects send volume Controls track level sent to assignable effects control Green Audio Pan Controls the position of a track in the stereo field pan Red Video Composite level Controls track opacity transparency Blue Video Fade to color Controls fading of a track to color Designate a top and Blue bottom color by right clicking the t
140. at once Track at once Track at once writing records individual tracks to the disc and results in a partially recorded disc However the CD R disc remains unplayable on most systems until you close the disc The advantage of track at once writing is that you can record tracks onto the disc as you finish them versus waiting until you have finished your whole album Track at once writing burns the entire Vegas project as a single track Disc at once Single Session or Red Book Disc at once writing is the most common burning method in the music industry This writing mode is used when creating a master disc to be sent to a disc manufacturer for mass replication Disc at once works just as it sounds Multiple tracks of audio are written to the CD in one recording session Understanding tracks and indices You are ready to burn an audio CD If you plan to use track at once to record a single track you can proceed right on to writing the entire project to an audio CD However you are more likely to set up tracks and perhaps indices within your project and burn several tracks at once Tracks distinguish songs in the project and have a starting and ending point Tracks are used to indicate to the CD R device where to mark the beginning and ending of a track during the writing process Indices are single markers that subdivide a track Indices are useful for navigating to specific areas within a track For example a sound effects CD may
141. at you record into is not affected or deleted Instead the event now contains two media files each listed as a separate take in the event For more information see Working with multiple recorded takes on page 165 CHP 10 RECORDING AUDIO 164 1 Place the cursor before the event to allow for pre roll 2 Press and click the event to select it Selected Non selected event event i adil a _ 4 Note You may record into multiple events by pressing and making selections Ee 7 3 Click the Arm for Record button Wl on the event s track When recording into multiple selected events arm their respective tracks at this time 4 Click the Record button on the transport bar to begin recording 5 Click the Record button again or the Stop button 1 on the transport bar to stop recording Recording into an event with a time selection Recording into a time selection allows for a pre and post roll during recording The time selection is adjustable to increase or decrease the pre and post roll duration During recording the selected event s edges serve as the punch in and out points Multiple punch in and out points can be created by selecting more events within the time selection You may need to split an existing event into three pieces so that you can select a smaller portion of the event to record into For more information see Splitting events on page 94 1 Click the Arm for Record button l on th
142. ate the crop area scrolling right across the corporate_logo event ending at 32 000 seconds Notice that a new gray keyframe diamond has been created on the keyframe controller TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS CHP 2 53 6 In the Smoothness box enter 0 This will limit the first panning motion to a straight horizontal movement r Crop E T TLL CH ja TO EPP C Keyframe controller New keyframe 7 Click the project timeline at 33 000 seconds to move the cursor to that position Use the left and right arrow keys to position the cursor more precisely Watch the Time Display window to the upper left of the timeline to find this position 8 Right click the crop area and choose Restore from the shortcut menu The crop area is restored to its original size 1 280 X 960 and position 640 X 480 A new keyframe is created 9 In the Smoothness box enter 100 This will smooth the arc of the second panning motion The result is that the logo appears to zoom out and away between the two final keyframes 4 49 26pm Ele B lt rS T fwo E feon E A E zd I 10 Close the Event Pan Crop window CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS BA yp Preview the project to see the results of this procedure click the Play button below the timeline or press the Spacebar on your keyboard Again there is a lot going on here that we have only touched on briefly If you are not familiar with keyframe animation techniq
143. ate the overlay To rotate the overlay by a precise number enter a value in the Angle degrees box Alternately you can use the mouse for freehand rotation Rotating Moving the center of rotation 0 0 r ET C N RS x z Engle 30 2 _ ft a Gy yl THT TT 1 Move the cursor outside of the track area box The cursor changes to a rotate icon C 2 Drag to rotate The clock icon in the Track Area shows the orientation of the track and the exact angle is displayed in a small ToolTip below the cursor 3 To change the center of rotation drag the clock icon to a new location Flipping the overlay You can flip the overlay horizontally or vertically to further augment a track motion effect 1 Right click the overlay A shortcut menu appears CHP 14 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 228 2 Choose either Flip Horizontal or Flip Vertical The overlay flips and the Video Preview window shows the effect Original Flip Horizontal cal E m O ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 14 229 CHAPTER Previewing Video As you work in Vegas you can preview your video by using the Video Preview window or by connecting to an external monitor You can optimize previews by adjusting preview quality prerendering video or building a dynamic RAM preview The Video Preview window also provides features such as safe area overlays and histograms to further enhance your productivity MY External monitor
144. ated examples of each transition Transitions can be dragged from this window to the crossfade between two video events or to the fade in or fade out region of a video event For more information see Understanding basic transitions on page 211 Preset Clock Wipe Cross Effect Dissolve Iris Linear Wipe k 7 s Vertical Out Ho Horizontal In NG Border Border Venetian Blinds Zoom Vertical In white Border Horizontal Out White Border Horizontal Out NG Border Video Fe Test Backgrounds Media Fool Transitions o Explorer Trimmer Video FX window Alt 8 The Video FX window contains the video effects available in Vegas The thumbnails display animated examples of each plug in preset You can drag plug ins from this window to an event track or to the Video Preview window video output effects For more information see Using video effects on page 193 INTRODUCTION Preset Add Noise Black and white Black Restore Border Brightness and L Broadcast Colors Chroma Keper Color Balance Color Curves Convolution Kerr Cookie Cutter Deform Film Effects Gaussian Blur Glow HSL Adjust Invert Lens Flare Levels Light Rays K a Explorer Trimmer 7 Media Fool g Veru Bright Darker Very Dark Brighter More Contrast E C E nA Test Back
145. ation see CD Settings tab on page 260 Adding a still image sequence If you ve exported a video clip as a still image sequence using another application a 3D rendering application for example Vegas can add the sequence to the Media Pool as a single event Each image in the sequence will be displayed for one frame in the event 1 Click the Import Media button in the Media Pool window The Import Media dialog appears Choose the folder where the sequence you want to open is stored Select the first image in the sequence or the image you want to start the event Select the Open still image sequence check box 5 In the Range box enter the number of the last image you want to open For example if you d selected AnimationOne_00001 tga in step 3 you could enter 120 in this box to create a new event using AnimationOne_OO001 tga to AnimationOne_00120 tga Click Open Vegas adds the still image sequence to the Media Pool Adding media to the timeline Sl Sf lea Bl l Machinery a_O0012 t lt l Machinery ai_O0013 t lt l Machinery ai _00014 t aa Machinery ai_O0015 t aa Machinery ai _O0016 t lt l Machinery ai_OO017 t gt Machinery ai_00000 tga Files of type AI Media Files lt Cancel YEevinc_dualhmedias Still Sequence z Import Media Look irr E Still Sequence l Machinery a_OO000 tga lt l Machinery a_O0001 taa lt l Machinery a_O0002 toa lt l
146. ation see Zooming in on a still image on page 218 One of the sample projects included on the Vegas CD demonstrates options for working with still images For more information see Panning with still images on page 61 Creating still images for use in Vegas Many image formats can be imported into Vegas BMP GIF JPG PNG TIFF requires QuickTime PSD flattened and TGA If you have the option to create PNG files in your graphics software this is the recommended file type PNG files use lossless compression and can also include alpha channel information which is one of the cleanest methods of creating transparency for overlays Vegas can automatically detect an alpha channel if present in PNG files ee Note Vegas may not automatically detect the alpha channel in TGA images Right click a TGA image in the Media Pool or an event on the timeline and choose Properties Then in the Media Properties dialog select the type of alpha channel from the list ES If you know your media file has an alpha channel and Vegas is not detecting it properly right click the media file in the Media Pool or an event on the timeline and choose Properties from the shortcut menu Then in the Media tab select the appropriate alpha channel type from the Alpha channel drop down list Premultiplied is the recommended setting You can save this setting so that Vegas will properly detect the alpha channel on other media files with the same properties For more i
147. ays SREE NS any number of other actions can be programmed to occur pee bai Por S E These commands are a part of the Microsoft WMV and mr a all ommand Properties HA RealMedia streaming formats Most frequently these e actions add text or open a related Web site where the Template gt viewer can find more information about the topic at hand Command JURL The specific commands available vary depending on the Parameter Jhttp www sonicfoundry com final format of your project Comment You can use command markers to add closed captions to Postion 0000005 Cancel introduction 4 UW Woiceoyer your project For more information see Adding closed captioning to Windows Media Video WMV files on page 184 Command markers can also indicate when an instruction function will occur in a WAV file being used in a radio broadcast environment Scott Studios data The following two sections define the markers for both streaming media and Scott Studios files ee 9 Note While streaming media files can be played on any hard drive or CD ROM they require a special streaming media server provided by your ISP to stream properly across the Internet e CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 104 r Defining streaming media commands In a streaming media file command markers can be used to display headlines show captions link to Web sites or any other function you define Vegas i
148. back buffering seconds c Fei H 0 25 3 Start playing back the project 4 If the playback still gaps increase the Playback Buffer seconds slider slightly You may have to experiment to find the correct settings If you continue to experience gapping you can try the following to control the gapping within Vegas e Decrease the number of events you are trying to play back This may mean muting tracks or soloing a couple of tracks RAM is mostly affected by the number of unique events that are playing back simultaneously e Use the Render to New Track command to combine all the events into one event For more information see Rendering to a new track on page 141 CHP 17 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS 260 T CD Settings tab The CD Settings tab allows you to set preferences for burning CDs and extracting audio from CDs in Vegas CD burning is only available in Vegas Video Burn drive Sets the device where you burn CD R discs Burn speed Sets the speed at which the device burns the CD R disc Extract optimization Sets the amount of buffering and restitching done to recover audio from older CD drives Adjust this setting if your extracted CD audio has occasional gaps or glitches J guy gap g Autoname extracted tracks Automatically names extracted CD tracks based on the ISRC number the track number and the number of times the track has been extracted Editing tab Enable looping on events by default Sets events that are trimmed longer tha
149. been selected as the audio device type on the Preferences Audio tab The Sound Mapper allows you to choose how the signal will be recorded stereo or R Mono left mono Click this button to view a menu with Stereo Left or Right Al Mono right H Stereo This button appears when Windows Classic Wave Driver has been selected as the audio device type on the the Preferences Audio tab When you choose this option you can specify which device e g sound card AL Mono left you will record from on any given track prior to recording Click this button to view a menu with Stereo 18 Mono right Or Mono and a submenu with all available devices for either option Selecting recording settings After the track has been armed for recording select whether the track records the signal in stereo in mono from the left channel or in mono from the right channel If you are using the Windows Classic Wave Driver you also must select the device from which the track will record Selecting recording settings for Sound Mapper 1 Click the Record Device Selector button fii A menu appears 2 From the menu choose the recording method Stereo Left or Right Ii Voiceover mg S k amp J o c B 18 CHP 10 RECORDING AUDIO 162 Selecting recording settings for Windows Classic Wave Driver 1 Click the Record Device Selector button M A menu appears 2 Choose either Stereo or Mono from the menu 3 From the submenu choose the input device
150. board not the numeric keypad Note Jump the cursor to the next or previous marker by pressing ctri 4 or gt eee Deleting markers 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker that you want to delete The pointer changes to a hand dh 0829 100001829 x ne 10000929 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Delete The marker is removed from your project Vegas does not renumber the tags as you remove them For example if you have five markers in your project and delete markers 3 and 4 the remaining markers will be listed as 1 2 and 5 However as you add markers again Vegas begins numbering the missing sequence first in this case 3 and 4 then 6 7 8 etc Deleting all markers and regions 1 Right click the marker bar 2 From the shortcut menu choose Markers Regions 3 From the submenu choose Delete All Working with regions Regions identify ranges of time and provide a way to subdivide your project A region is defined as the area between two region markers that share the same number Regions can function as semi permanent time selections Region information can be displayed in the Explorer by clicking the arrow next to the View button and selecting Region View CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 102 Inserting regions 1 Make a time selection For more information see Selecting a time range on page 85 2 From the Insert menu choose Re
151. button For more information see E About Customizing the rendering process on page 241 Video 23 97 fps 720x480 Lower field fist P copr ang tin media with project Render loop region only Stretch video to fill output F ize do not letterb e Render loop region only Renders only the portion ee ele seeders IZ Save project markers in media file of your project within the loop selection e Stretch video to fill output frame size do not letterbox Adjusts the aspect ratio so the output frame is filled on all edges When the check box is cleared Vegas maintains the current aspect ratio and adds black borders to fill the extra frame area letterbox This option is useful when the desired output format does not match the frame aspect ratio of your project e Save project markers in media file Saves any regions and markers in your project to the final rendered file CHP 16 SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 240 z 7 Click the Save button A small dialog box appears displaying the progress of the render and a status bar appears in the lower left portion of Vegas You may cancel the rendering process by clicking the Cancel button on the status bar Selecting a file format The following table describes the formats available for rendering your Vegas project Format Name Extension Definition Audio Interchange File Format aif The standard audio file format used on Macintosh computers V MPEG 1 a
152. by clicking the Cancel button on the status bar KR After Vegas renders the new track it appears at the bottom of the track view If you render the entire project you may delete or mute the other tracks from the project since they are all contained on the new track WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 143 CHAPTER R a Se cx Adding Audio Effects v x ae eo Audio effects or plug ins can be used to improve the quality of the audio in a production or can be used as special artistic effects Additional DirectX plug in effects both from Sonic Foundry and other third party plug ins can also be used Using audio effects Vegas Video contains the complete set of audio effects plug ins while Vegas Video LE contains a subset Multiple audio busses and assignable effects chains are only available in Vegas Video There are three ways to use audio plug ins in Vegas track effects bus effects and assignable effects These plug ins can be accessed by clicking the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX buttons 4 The mix of these various methods of applying audio effects is important to the final mix of a project For more information see Audio Signal Flow on page 33 Track FX Bus FX Assignable FX E if Music a g S 0 0 dB Pan Center z Mixer 44 100 Hz 16 bit Audio Properies CE Insert F Insert Bus lar J Track Fe i Gl IN Inf Inf OUT Inf InF amp g o
153. can Keyframe be accessed from the Preset drop down list controller ble S a g 6 moon 1 Modify the settings in the window to create your desired transition effect For help on the different controls in the window click the Plug In Help button 2 to access online help 2 Click the name in the Preset drop down list The current text Untitled is highlighted 3 Enter a name for the new preset 4 Click the Save Preset button 1 Any additional changes can be instantly saved to the custom preset by clicking the Save Preset button ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 14 L 21 B Using keyframe animation Keyframe animation is a technique that computer artists use to quickly make complex animated sequences Instead of drawing every frame of a title scrolling in from top to bottom by hand an animator simply has to set a starting and ending position for the animation and let the computer interpolate the intermediate frames The animation pictured on the right has three keyframes a starting middle and ending keyframe More complex animations use more keyframes While keyframing motion may be the most obvious use for keyframe animations just about any parameter of an effect can be animated with keyframes Vegas uses keyframe animation techniques in many areas including transition effects video effects event panning and cropping generated media and track motion Color brightness transparency motion size perspec
154. channel Note especially the dashed line ellipse in the lower left of the mask this is the alpha channel Alpha channels can be based on a color or can be defined in a graphics program that supports alpha channel creation Masks with alpha channels must be saved in a format that supports this method of transparency such as PNG or TGA As in this example the alpha channel may be invisible in the actual mask 00 00 00 900 10 00 01 000 Luminance Mask track Parent Masked track Child Blue The top right example uses luminance to determine the transparency in the mask The white area is completely transparent Since white is made up of 100 values of red green and blue 255 255 and 255 those three colors are all 33 transparent as well In the lower right example blue is the selected transparent index The blue area is 100 transparent and so are all areas that have a value of 255 for blue 0 0 255 including white 255 255 255 CHP 13 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 208 r Chromakeying Chromakeying or blue screening is a special case of overlay transparency A color key is a specific color or a range of similar colors in an image that are made transparent allowing a background video to show through The idea is to take a video subject and film it against a solid uniform background color It is critical that the color be smooth and uniformly lit with no shadows and that the color chosen for the backg
155. choose Post Volume from the shortcut menu ae Routing assignable effects chains to busses When assignable effects are added to your project they may be assigned to a specific bus for output The bus mixes the assignable effects chain s plug ins along with any tracks that may be routed to the same bus For more information see Audio Signal Flow on page 33 This option is only available if the project contains multiple busses For more information see Adding busses to a project on page 153 1 Click the Bus button on the assignable effect control A menu displays all the busses in your project E Distortion l m IM Int tie Master Microsoft Sound Mapper 73 K E us 4 Microsoft Sound M apper 2 Choose the bus to which you want to route the assignable effects chain Bus B Microsoft Sound Mapper The assignable effects chain displays the letter of the bus to which it is routed CHP 9 USING THE MIXER USING THE MIXER CHP 9 159 CHAPTER gan Recording Audio Vegas can record audio into multiple mono or stereo audio tracks while simultaneously playing back existing audio and video tracks You are limited only by the performance of your computer system and audio hardware Audio is recorded to a media file on your computer and into an event on the timeline You may record into an empty track a time selection an event or a combination of time and event selection Audio output from your
156. chronization are critical aspects of any multimedia production Because complex multimedia projects are challenging for any computer Vegas provides a number of tools to maintain real time playback even though the computer may not be able to process the data quickly enough PREVIEWING VIDEO CHP 15 231 Reducing preview quality The resolution of the Video Preview window and the quality of the preview rendering can be adjusted to improve playback Lower resolution previews are less clear but allow Vegas to display more frames This may be particularly important with projects that use overlays transitions and effects Click the Preview Quality button to choose different preview resolutions Best Quality A Good Quality P Draft Quality m Draft Quality k Draft Quality 3 Draft Quality t Preview Quality Preview Quality i Preview Quality Good Quality 6 Good Quality Good Quality Best Quality Best Quality Best Quality Prerendering video There are times where nothing but a full high quality preview will do In these cases Vegas can take the time necessary to selectively render only the portions of your project that need extra processing Vegas prerenders these sections and creates short files to use for previews The prerendering can take anywhere from a few seconds to a few minutes depending on the length and complexity of the video Once these temporary files have been created Vegas uses them wh
157. cilities require a color bar pattern at the beginning of your video so that engineers can calibrate their equipment Text Creates events containing text for titles or simple credits Text can be formatted with color shadows and other effects Adding a generated media event Text Backgrounds Preset Credit Roll Solid Color Test Pattern Text Legacy Plug In Te Legacy Plug In Wid l Scrolling on Transparent Plain Scrolling on Black Timed Fade on Timed oom In Out Black on Blue You may add a generated media event by choosing Generated Media from the Insert menu This adds the event at the cursor position in the selected track But perhaps the simplest way to add generated media is through drag and drop 1 From the View menu choose Text Backgrounds The Text Backgrounds window displays 2 Drag a generator from the Text Backgrounds window to the project The mouse cursor changes B to indicate when you can drop the generator 3 Modify the generator in the Video FX window and close the window when you are finished To modify settings at a later time click the Generated Media button W on the event For help on the different controls in the Video FX window click the Plug In Help button l to access online help 9 S Generated Media button A generated media event is ten seconds long as a default However you may trim the event to any length For more information see Trimming an event on page
158. cks 2 From the Tools menu choose Lay Out Audio CD from Events BURNING AUDIO CDS CHP 11 L 173 The new audio CD track markers appear on the CD layout bar above the timeline Vegas uses the name of the media file for each event to name the tracks Marking tracks manually You may make a time selection and then mark that selection as an audio CD track 1 Make a time selection that includes the audio for the new track 2 From the Insert menu choose Audio CD Track Region The markers for the new audio CD track appear on the CD layout bar Marking indices You may create an index marker in much the same way as you create track markers 1 Position the cursor where you want the index mark to appear 2 From the Insert menu choose Audio CD Track Index The new index marker appears on the CD layout bar Working with tracks and indices Once you have marked your tracks and indices you can edit move rename or delete them as needed Navigating to and selecting tracks and indices Vegas provides several shortcuts for navigating to and selecting audio CD tracks on the CD layout bar Double click a track marker to select the track Press period to jump the cursor to the next track or index marker Press comma to jump the cursor to the previous track or index marker Press Ctri period to jump the cursor to the next track marker index markers are skipped Press TI comma to jump the cursor
159. click the Bisley button The Favorites tab allows you to keep topics that you revisit often in a separate folder To add a topic to your favorites click the 4 button on the Favorites tab What s This help What s This help allows you to view pop up descriptions of Vegas menus buttons and dialog boxes 1 Click the What s This Help button WF in the toolbar or the question mark 21 in the upper right corner of a dialog box Alternately you can choose What s This from the Help menu or press Shift F1 2 The cursor changes to a question mark icon R 3 Click an item in the program s interface PDF manual There is a PDF version of the manual available on the Vegas CD ROM To view this manual you will need Adobe Acrobat Reader also included on the Vegas CD ROM Please read the vegas_readme doc for more information on the latest updates and changes Help on the Web Additional Vegas help and information is available on the Sonic Foundry Web site From the Help menu choose Sonic Foundry on the Web to view a listing of Web pages pertaining to Vegas and Sonic Foundry INTRODUCTION CHP 1 ag Overview M Vegas is designed to be an easy to use program with many tools that provide power and flexibility when creating and working with multimedia files Many Vegas operations menu items and shortcut keys are consistent with other popular Windows software applications The following sections are a graphica
160. computer during recording is not necessarily recorded with the new audio Recording in Vegas does not alter any of the source media files in your project Even when recording into an existing event you are not overwriting the data in that event Instead the data is recorded into a new take for that event and saved to a media file on your hard drive Setting up your equipment There are numerous ways to connect your equipment to your system Refer to your equipment s documentation for specific setup instructions The following are some possible general configurations Basic setup This setup includes a simple microphone and speaker that are connected to the computer s sound card With a more sophisticated microphone you would typically want to use a preamplifier for input to the sound card Sound card out Sound card in CHP 10 RECORDING AUDIO 160 r Setup with mixer This setup includes a mixer where the speaker and microphone connect The mixer is then connected to the computer s sound card Mixers usually have pre amps built into them This diagram does not show you an instrument or a physical preamplifier such as a rack mounted component The reason for this omission is because these types of setups vary widely based on your mixer instrument and pre amp type Refer to your components documentation for specific setup configurations Mixer out Sound card out Sound card in gt Mixer in Setup with digita
161. contained We will remove those errors and synchronize the remaining voiceover to the video Vegas allows you to edit both time and events We will use both methods to edit the voiceover Locking the original events Time selection edits affect all tracks in the project unless a specific track is selected Before we start editing the voiceover we will lock the original audio and video events which are our references to prevent them from accidently being edited 1 Select the original video and audio events Hold the key while clicking each of these events 2 From the Edit menu choose Switches and then Lock Editing a time selection By looking at the waveform you will see where the um and cough occur You will also see where the narrator is speaking We will delete the um using time selection 1 Click the new voiceover event to select it 2 On the timeline drag to make a time selection where the um occurs g 3 Click the Play button 1 to play back the error to ensure that your time selection does not include part of the voiceover that we need 4 Increase or decrease the time selection by dragging an edge of the selection 5 Once the time selection is made choose Delete from the Edit menu or press to remove the um Next we will split the event that contains the narrator s cough and then delete the error CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS 42 Splitting an event using time selecti
162. copying and pasting envelope points 1 Select the Envelope Edit Tool button FT on the toolbar The Envelope Edit tool is active 2 Click within a track to select it 3 Drag along the timeline to select envelope points 4 From the Edit menu choose Cut or Copy D Click to position the cursor where you want to paste envelope points Click within a different track if you want to paste envelope points across tracks 6 From the Edit menu choose Paste The envelope points are pasted in the new position Copying an envelope to another track 1 Select the Envelope Edit Tool button F on the toolbar The Envelope Edit tool is active 2 Click within a track to select it 00000000 aaa 0000AN a 000029 ad 3 From the Edi hoose Select All ile Met From the Edit menu choose Select All envelope 4 From the Edit menu choose Copy A AIA i wand the newly WU a Mal a u WA 5 Click within a track to select it pasted copy d I I RUMKI at mabat Fala ala au D Click Go to Start H if you want the envelope to appear exactly as it was in the original track or click to position the cursor where you want the envelope to start 7 From the Edit menu choose Paste The envelope is pasted on the track WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 141 Locking envelopes to events Track envelopes extend for the length of a track and are independent of the events on the track This means that the envelope remains in place when you move the even
163. cting this option does not affect other dual processor operations Automatically create backups of your project files Select this option to have Vegas periodically display information from Sonic Foundry at startup Creates a temporary project file that can aid in crash recovery When enabled autosave occurs every five minutes The autosave process does not overwrite the original project file When enabled the scrub control uses a linear range When disabled the scrub control uses a logarithmic range Vegas allows scrubbing on empty sections of the timeline using Ctrl drag on the cursor Select this option to enable timeline scrubbing over events as well Changes the spacebar and F12 keys to start and pause playback rather than start and stop Marker and region lines do not appear when snapping is disabled Select this option to make Vegas draw marker and region lines even when snapping is disabled Vegas builds 16 bit peak files as a default Select this option to build 8 bit peak files instead Disables the animation applied to windows such as Video FX Event Pan Crop and Track Motion when these windows are opened Select the number of files to be listed at the bottom of the File menu Select a location for all temporary files CUSTOMIZING VEGAS 289 r Video tab The Video tab in the Preferences dialog controls the display of video media video events and video tracks in Vegas Dynamic RAM Preview max Determines the size
164. cular audio track The fader s range is inf to 12 dB To adjust the fader drag it to the desired volume level As you drag the fader the volume level displays to the left of the fader Double click the fader to set it to 0 0 dB or double click the current volume value to enter a specific number 92 Soundtrack 12 4 A i J l Soundtrack G 6 do E 7 EI Soundtrack O wo O Mat 16 7 dB m Ayo 0 0 08 SL S Pan Center Pan Center Drag to change volume Double click the fader Double click the current level to to set to 0 0 dB enter a value aaaea Note Press while dragging or use the mouse wheel for finer control of the fader You may also move the fader by clicking it and using the right or left arrow keys ae Volume envelopes provide greater control over track volume For more information see Working with track envelopes on page 137 Using the multipurpose slider audio only This slider controls several features including panning bus 2 i BO d send levels and assignable effects send levels The options for the multipurpose slider depend on what your project contains Click the slider ppal i button to select Par Center and what version of Vegas you are using You may select what a control S the slider controls by clicking the multipurpose slider button Bus A Inf Each item s slider position is independent from the others Bus B Inf p p aa Note If you do not see this slider on a track increase t
165. d Inserting empty events and time You can insert events into the timeline that do not have any contents and are not references to any media files Empty events are useful as placeholders in the timeline that can be filled with media or recorded into at a later time In either case the new media is added to the empty event as a take For more information see Working with takes on page 113 To add an empty event to a track from the Insert menu choose Empty Event It is also possible to make space in a project by inserting a length of time across all tracks To insert a period of time into the timeline from the Insert menu choose Time Trimming events This section describes simple ways to trim events You may also use the Trimmer window to trim events For more information see Using the Trimmer window on page 115 Trimming an event During the trimming process for a video event the last thumbnail image on the event shows the last frame in the event allowing you to edit events very accurately 1 Move the cursor over the edge of the event The cursor changes when properly positioned 5 2 Drag the edge of the event to trim it Since a multimedia file often has both a video and an audio component both events are trimmed or extended as a group unless you ungroup them or temporarily disable grouping by clicking the Ignore Event Grouping button For more information see Grouping events on page 128 grouped events a
166. d assignable effects chains Multiple audio busses and assignable effects chains are only available in Vegas Video Using the Mixer window The Mixer is a dockable window where you can control audio busses and assignable effects chains within your project and adjust the outgoing signal s volume and routing Viewing the Mixer window The Mixer window appears in the window docking area by default when you first start Vegas However you may drag the Mixer within the workspace at any time to float it For more information see Window docking area on page 22 To hide view the Mixer window choose Mixer from the View menu or press Alt 3 Preview display optional Busses Assignable effects dixer 44 100 Ii 16 bit er Audio Properties OE Insert PX Insert Bus 161 Master A Bus 6 Bus B E Distortion B f E pE A lr 1 e Inf Inf 22 2 48 47 54 55 MO 54 4 3 OUT 6 4 6 1 pa pa F 2 f 2 F 2 2 F 2 2 SIS 15 Fig 15 pail 21 21 21 ef aT PS at 33 33 33 33 aR 34 739 34 45 45 45 45 pa 51 Pa 51 57 af 57 5r 0 0 Bog oo amp 42 42 Bo Ai Ai m Float handle CHP 9 USING THE MIXER 182 Sp Using the Mixer toolbar The Mixer s toolbar allows you to access project properties add busses and add assignable effects chains to the Mixer Mixer 44 100 Hz 16 bit a ef Button Description The Project Audio Properties button accesses the project properties dialog pg 255 ie The Inse
167. d hc eeu Rae 189 Eliminating out of range colors e eee eee eee eee 189 Modifying video properties 0 ee eee eee eee 190 Modifying project video properties lt eee eee 190 Modifying media file properties 00 ccc eee eee eens 191 Modifying output properties n lt lt heehee eet eds eset etd eed wed Cad bee 192 Using Video FX Compositing and Masks 193 Using Keene erer aausrisb ean ae we Seer a ee eke be we ee 193 Adding a video effects plug in 0 ccc eee teen eee eens 194 Working with video effects plug in chains lt lt nannaa cece cece eee eee eee eens 195 Modifying a video effects plug in 1 1 0 eee eee eee eens 197 Saving custom plug in settings as a preset e ccc eee eens 197 Using keyframe animation with plug ins e e eens 198 Using generated Media ccc eee cece eee eee eee eee estan 198 Adding a generated media event 0 00 cc eee eee 198 Duplicating a generated media event 0 00 ees 199 COMPOSING ina enc tee sua et hea ar araa a paren wheres a aaly 199 Understanding the parent child track relationship eee eee eee eee eee 199 Selecting compositing modes cc eee teens 200 Creating IMaSKS 14 eseeeecech eer aean a eu cose beeeeeauedeeeetaits peat alone 203 Creating TG COS 2i si1 sete ta eet Geheeciee NE ARNA NoN RRR N o Nee te 203 Creating video MISS inaia ei a a a A a a a es ee 204 Fine tunn
168. d more than once you can save command properties as a template You can then reuse the command properties by selecting the template from the Template drop down list 1 Create a command and complete the Command Properties dialog 2 Click in the Template box and enter a name for the template 3 Click the Save Template button Hl ee Note Vegas saves your metadata command templates in the cmdtemp xml file in the Vegas program folder You can edit this file directly to modify your templates T 2 CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 106 Q ______ Deleting command markers 1 Place the mouse pointer on the command marker The pointer changes to a hand icon Jha 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Delete The command marker is removed from your project Working with CD layout markers Markers on the CD layout bar indicate the locations of tracks and indices in an audio CD layout project These markers are discussed in a later chapter For more information see Understanding tracks and indices on page 169 Using an external audio editing program Vegas is a nondestructive editing environment which means that the original source files remain unchanged by any editing done in Vegas Destructive constructive edits that modify the actual source media file may be done in a separate application such as Sonic Foundry s Sound Forge By setting up a separate au
169. d over events From the Options menu choose Preferences and select Allow Ctrl drag cursor style scrub over events on the General tab GETTING STARTED CHP 3 81 Scrubbing with the keyboard Vegas uses three letters JKL as a keyboard scrub control Press J for reverse and L for forward playback Press k to pause playback Keyboard scrub letters Reverse Pause Forward There are several ways to adjust playback speed Press J or lL multiple times twice for 1 5x playback or three times for 2 0x playback e Press and hold K while pressing J or L to emulate a shuttle knob mode Press k J to turn the knob to the left or K L to turn the knob to the left Press K again or to return to normal mode Previewing to media player A preview file is mixed and rendered according to the project s properties and is played back using the media player associated with the file type 1 From the Tools menu choose Preview in Player The Preview dialog appears 2 Select the file type from the drop down list 3 Click OK to begin the mixing and rendering process A progress dialog appears indicating the percent complete of the new file A 4 Note You may cancel the preview by clicking the Cancel button on the status bar ES DC When mixing is completed the associated media player opens and begins playback Prerendering video previews Playing a project using the transport controls can instantly s
170. d the final format you have selected For longer movies you might want to plan to render your movie overnight or when you are not using your computer The process for rendering a project is essentially the same regardless of the final format of the rendered file Using custom settings to render to streaming media formats is only available in Vegas Video Vegas Video LE requires you to select from several predefined templates 1 From the File menu choose Render As The Render As dialog appears 2 Select the drive and folder where you want to save the rendered file 3 Type a new name in the File name box if necessary jn E Medi 7 je K 4 In the Save as type drop down list choose the iia SIS l appropriate format For more information see Selecting a G s implosion avi Sample Projects fan mountains avi file format on page 240 1 Vegas Projects man powderskier avi EH Capital Dome avi sn sunset avi 5 In the Template drop down list select the appropriate S Cube Clip OD1 avi a takinghead avi template egl fireweed avi ir traffic avi If your source media is in DV format select a DV D File name FinalVersiomavi 0000 5 template For more information see Working in DV OOO M format on page 189 save ag Ipe Video for Windows avi lt Cancel You can customize the rendering settings by clicking Template NTSC DY Custom Description laude 48 KHz 16 bit Stereo PEM About the Custom
171. d then we will group the voiceover and video together 1 Right click the track header for the original audio track aa Note To avoid accidentally altering any other settings in the track header right click the track header on the track number EN 2 From the shortcut menu choose Delete The entire track is removed from the project and the new voiceover becomes the second track 3 Press and click the video event and the voiceover events to select them 4 From the Edit menu choose Group and then Create New or press G to group the events Edit y Undo Delete Track R e S Heda Et ES HAE Switches Take K _ Undo All Remove From U Clear Edit History Clear Ctrl L Select All Shift G CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS 44 T Summary In this section we edited the new audio synchronized it with the video and grouped the events together Here is what the project should look like at this point 00 00 10 677 Talkinghead D qp Level 100 0 al 00 00 05 T H Voiceover G ok S U Vol 3 0 dE i 3 Music bed 03_musicbed veg Adding background music to the talkinghead event is very easy You can use a track envelope to lower the volume while the narrator speaks and then raise it for the remainder of the video Placing the music bed 1 Press Ctri Home to move the cursor to the beginning of the project 2 In the Explorer drag the musicbed wav file to the timeline be
172. de feature turns the overlapping portions of two events into a smooth crossfade This feature is enabled as a default Click the Automatic Crossfades button 1E or press X to disable or enable automatic crossfades Events before crossfade Events after crossfade 7 a E MATI Drag one event to HL overlap the other Vegas also provides an option for creating automatic crossfades when you add multiple media files to a track For more information see Automatically crossfading inserted events on page 73 Manually setting a crossfade Vegas does not insert an automatic crossfade if a shorter event is placed on top of and within the same time frame of a longer event In this case the longer event begins playing then the shorter event plays and then the longer event resumes playing at the timeline position You can manually create a crossfade to fade in and out of the shorter event 1 Place the mouse pointer on one of the shorter event s handles The envelope cursor appears 2 Drag the handle to the desired position Events with manual crossfade This is a fast and effective method of inserting a voiceover on top of a background music track although the music fades out completely or to replace a bad section of audio For more information see Punching in and crossfading events on page 91 CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES QS yp Changing crossfade curves You can set the crossfade curves that Vegas uses t
173. de higher fidelity than lower sample rates such as 11 025 Hz However more storage space is required when using higher sample rates Sampling rate is to time as quantization is to level Sample Size See Bit Depth GLOSSARY APPENDIX B e 281 Sample Value The sample value also referred to as sample amplitude is the number stored by a single sample In 16 bit audio these values range from 32768 to 32767 In 8 bit audio they range from 128 to 127 The maximum allowed sample value is often referred to as 100 or O dB Sfap0 Sonic Foundry audio proxy file For more information see Audio proxy files sfapO on page 267 Stk See Peak File Shortcut Menu A context sensitive menu that appears when you right click certain areas of the screen The functions available in the shortcut menu depend on the object being clicked on as well as the state of the program As with any menu you can select an item from the shortcut menu to perform an operation Shortcut menus are used frequently in Vegas for quick access to many commands An example of a shortcut menu can be found by right clicking any event along the timeline Signal to Noise Ratio The signal to noise ratio SNR is a measurement of the difference between a recorded signal and noise levels A high SNR is always the goal The maximum signal to noise ratio of digital audio is determined by the number of bits per sample In 16 bit audio the signal to noise ratio is 96 dB wh
174. deo renders performed should therefore be minimized ps 1 Select the tracks that you want to combine To mix specific events make a time selection 2 From the Tools menu choose Render to New Track or press Ctrl M The Render to New Track dialog appears CHP 7 WORKING WITH TRACKS 142 z 3 Complete the dialog as follows e From the Save in drop down list select the drive or folder to save the new media file e Type a file name in the File name box e From the Save as type drop down list choose the file format e g wav for audio or avi for video e From the Template drop down list choose a format from the template list Alternately click Custom to set custom rendering settings For more information see Customizing the rendering process on page 241 e Select Render loop region only if you only want to render the time selection area e Select Stretch video to fill output frame size do not letterbox to adjust the aspect ratio so the output frame is filled on all edges When the check box is cleared Vegas maintains the current aspect ratio and adds black borders to fill the extra frame area letterbox 4 Click Save to render to a new track As the tracks are being rendered mixed down a small dialog appears displaying the progress of the render A status bar also appears in the lower left portion of Vegas Cancel z Th Rendering Mu Tutorial avi if Start aa Note You may cancel the rendering process
175. dio editor you can quickly access the program from Vegas via the Tools menu or by pressing Ctri E Setting up an audio editing program If you already have Sound Forge loaded on your computer when you installed Vegas the installation should have detected it and made it your default audio editing program However if you do not have Sound Forge or want to specify a different audio editor you may do so in the Preferences dialog 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears ERT S Gaee Ha a s 2 In the Preferences dialog choose the Audio tab a 3 Click the Browse button to the right of the Preferred audio editor box The Preferred Audio Editor dialog appears 4 From this dialog navigate to the application to use for editing audio files Aamo l Files of type Executable Files evel lt Cancel 5 Select the application s executable icon exe and Geen click Open to set the application as your default audio editor The application s path displays in the Preferred audio editor box Opening an audio editor from Vegas All events in your Vegas project are references to media files on a storage device When you edit an audio event in an audio editor you can choose to open the original media file or a copy of the file Opening a file in an audio editor You can directly edit the media file to which an audio event is referenced Any changes you make and save in the
176. disable snapping F8 Clear group without deleting events Ctrl U Quantize to frames Alt F8 Insert show hide track volume envelope V Snap to markers Shift F8 Remove track volume envelope Shift V Snap to grid Ctrl F8 Insert show hide track panning envelope P Ripple edit mode Ctrl L Remove track panning envelope Shift P Auto crossfade mode X Insert region R Normal edit tool Ctrl D Insert marker M Next tool D Insert command C Previous tool Shift D Insert audio CD track region N Render to new track Ctrl M Insert audio CD track index Shift N Change the track that has Alt Shift Up Insert transition numeric focus Down Arrow keypad Insert cut transition Ctrl numeric keypad Trimmer commands These commands apply to the Trimmer window a 4 Note Many of the shortcuts that apply to the timeline e g cursor placement selection commands etc also work in the Trimmer aN Description Keys Description Keys Add Media From Cursor A Toggle selected stream audio video both Tab Add Media to Cursor Shift A Toggle audio video stream height Ctrl Shift Up Down Arrow Transfer time selection from T Next media file in Trimmer Ctrl Tab timeline to Trimmer after cursor Transfer time selection from Shift T Previous media file in Trimmer Ctrl Shift Tab timeline to Trimmer before cursor Miscellaneous commands These commands allow you to move items access help and refresh the screen Description Online help What s This help
177. displays the progress of the render When finished the file automatically plays in the appropriate media player PREVIEWING VIDEO CHP 15 e 23 B Using an external monitor v Support for external monitors is only available in Vegas Video Vegas allows you to feed video directly from the timeline to a television monitor With this feature you can make your final editing decisions on a broadcast monitor which differs significantly from a computer monitor before printing the project to tape To use an external monitor you must have e OHCI compliant IEEE 1394 DV card e DV camcorder or DV to analog converter box While configuring your computer for DV external monitor previewing is not difficult the setup may require some troubleshooting The Sonic Foundry Vegas Forum is a good resource for peer to peer system troubleshooting http www sonicfoundry com forums Setting up an external monitor The diagram below shows the preferred setup for sending video from the Vegas timeline to an external television monitor Video to camcorder Analog to television Television monitor Audio to speakers Speakers Vegas conforms the video to DV format and feeds it through the 1394 card to the DV device camcorder or DV to analog media converter The DV device sends analog output to the television monitor ee Note The DV device must support pass through in order to use an external monitor Some PAL camcord
178. djust the media that is played by an event e When you slip an event your event maintains its place on the timeline but the media file moves in the direction you drag e When you slide an event the media file maintains its place on the timeline but the event moves in the direction you drag You can slip or slide grouped events all at the same time or slide a crossfade between two events For more information see Grouping events on page 128 or Sliding a crossfade on page 98 Shifting the contents of slipping an event Hold while dragging an event The slip cursor appears As you drag the event the contents of the event shift but the event does not move You can use this technique when you want to maintain an event s length and position but have the event play a different section of the source media file CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 06 p Slip trimming an event Hold while dragging the right or left edge of an event The slip trim cursor appears As you drag the event edge the media moves with the event edge Sliding an event Hold ctri Alt while dragging an event The slide cursor appears As you drag the relative position of the media remains fixed on the track and the event position changes You can use this technique when you want to maintain an event s length but have the event play a different section of the source media file at a different point in your project The original media f
179. down the key and clicking individual files Right click and drag the files to the track view timeline GETTING STARTED 72 pe 3 When you release the mouse a shortcut menu appears Select a placement option from the menu e Add Across Time e Add As Takes lt You will see one event on the track The other events are listed at takes beneath the the topmost event For more information see Working with takes on page 113 Video Only and Audio Only allow you to isolate either the video or audio and add that stream from a multimedia file either across tracks across time or as takes ee Note A left click drag and drop automatically inserts files across time The various modes can also be cycled through by right clicking without releasing the left mouse button while performing the drag and drop operation _ _ E ooo _ lt Double clicking a media file This method places the event at the cursor s position in the selected track If the selected track is a video track and you double click an audio event or vice versa Vegas creates a new track for the event Once an event is placed you can move it from one track to another or change its position on the timeline Inserting a video file with associated audio Media files with video frequently include associated audio When you insert a media file into the timeline the associated audio is automatically inserted int
180. e Trac acy ST ntitled To enable the plug in again click its Move Left check box or choose Bypass from Moel the shortcut menu SONIC FOUNDRY ae 72 0 dB Attack time 0 to Track Noise Gate LJ Track EQ Track Compressor Release time 1 t You may bypass plug ins from the appropriate FX window or from the Plug In Chooser dialog Removing plug ins from a chain Plug ins may be removed from a chain in either the appropriate FX window or the Plug In Chooser dialog Removing a plug in from the chain in the FX window 1 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button 44 The appropriate FX window Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX appears 2 Select the plug in that you want to remove 3 Click the Remove Selected Plug In button Removing a plug in from the chain in the Plug In Chooser dialog 1 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button 44 The appropriate FX window Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX appears 2 Click the Plug In Chain button 48 The Plug In Chooser dialog appears with the plug in chain displayed at the top 3 Select the plug in that you want to remove and click Remove to remove it from the chain 4 Click OK to save the chain and close the Plug In Chooser dialog CHP 8 ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS 148 r Saving plug in chains You may save and edit the plug in chains that you added to tracks or busses or created as assignable effects chains Saved chai
181. e Pan Center s FX 1 10 0 dB Bus B 29 1 dB Using assignable effects chains Assignable effects are only available in Vegas Video Assignable effects allow you to send various levels of multiple tracks to a single audio effect chain Like busses these controls reside in the Mixer window and support plug in chains In addition assignable effects outputs can be routed to project busses Click the Insert Assignable FX button E in the Mixer window to add an assignable effects chain to your project For more information see Adding Audio Effects on page 143 Assignable Effects in Mixer Window Number Name Number and name of assignable effects DONDE Hane 58 S a alae Double click the name to edit it Mute 4 2 Solo i 0 mf OUT Inf Ink Mute Prevents the assignable effects chain A from processing the track s signal ASSINALE B Solo Plays only the output of that assignable BUS ashignment effects chain R Assignable FX Displays the Assignable FX window and E allows you to adjust the plug in settings Bus assignment Allows to you assign the assignable 79 effects chain to a bus 39 Input Fader Adjusts the input volume 45 Output Fader Adjusts the output volume Lock Unlock 51 Meter Displays the incoming and outgoing signal Fader P level to the assignable effects chain Channels oa oo oo 0 0 Lock Unlock Fader Locks the faders so the left and right Channels channels of stereo files always move Inp
182. e mountains awi Project S20K240e32 29 9 p Frame Preview 320K240e32 29 97p Display 320K240 16 powderskier avi So what way sunset avi KS o a Audio 44 100 Hz 16 bit Stereo 00 04 29 06 Uncompressed 2 In the Plug In Chooser dialog select the effect that you would like to apply and click OK 3 Modify the effect in the Video FX window and close the window when you are finished For help on the different controls in the Video FX window click the Plug In Help button to access online help USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 13 L 1 08 Adding a plug in from the Video FX or Plug Ins window 1 If the Video FX or Plug Ins window is not currently visible choose either Video FX or Plug Ins from the View menu to view the appropriate window V i d eq Fx Preset Black and white Black Restore Border Brightness and Cont Broadcast Colors Chroma Keper Color Balance Color Curves Convolution Kernel Cookie Cutter Deform Film Effects Gaussian Blur k Plug In H E Audio EH vide Grainy Speen Fx a Transitions LJ Filter Package Hie Sonic Foundry Border aa Media Generators Hike far Fil Alex _ Filter Packages m Sonic Foundry Add Noise m Sonic Foundry Black and White m Sonic Foundry Black Restore fa Sonic Foundry Brightness and Contrast fn Sonic Foundry Broadcast Colors fa Sonic Foundry Chroma Keper fa Sonic Foundry Color Balance m Sonic F
183. e Border Brightness and Cont Broadcast Colors Chroma Keper Color Balance Color Curves Convolution Keme Cookie Cutter Deform Film Effects Gaussian Blur Glow The mix of video effects applied at different levels to events tracks files etc is important to the final mix of a project For more information see Video Signal Flow on page 34 H In general effects are applied in the following order to files in the Media Pool to events to tracks to the project video output effects CHP 13 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 194 n Adding a video effects plug in Video effects can be applied to events tracks files in the Media Pool or to an entire project You can adda plug in by selecting it in the Plug In Chooser dialog or you can drag and drop the plug in from the Video FX or Plug Ins windows Adding a plug in using the Plug In Chooser 1 Click the Video FX button 21 in one of the following locations see the illustration e Media FX are applied before a media file is inserted into an event on the timeline Every occurrence of this media file in a project has the effect applied to it e Event FX are applied to events on the timeline Track FX are applied to the output of a particular track Video Output FX are applied to the final output and affect every event in a project Track FX EventFX Media EX Video Output FX Video Preview ee Zh Preview Quality AS Gi N aati l
184. e database can be organized and sorted according to a large number of attributes For more information see Using the Edit Details window on page 118 Edit Details Show BIS fields L W Sas Dez Stat End Number of Takes Active Take Name File Path Select _ Mute Loop Iv 00 04 29 22 00 04 32 11 00 00 02 19 Sonic Foundry Text 1 00 00 00 00 Sonic Foundry Text 8 UU 04 21 22 00 04 34 10 00 00 02 18 Sonic Foundry Text 1 00 00 00 00 Sonic Foundry Text 9 00 04 38 17 00 04 49 21 00 00 11 04 Sonic Foundry Color Gradie 00 00 09 05 Sonic Foundry Color Gradie 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 11 00 00 10 11 sunset 00 00 00 00 Bling userfolders q 2 TBr 00 00 09 09 00 00 13 11 00 00 04 02 beach 00 00 00 00 Bling userfolders g 2 TBr 00 00 12 13 00 00 21 18 00 00 09 05 Cube Clip 001 00 00 17 27 Bling userfolders g 2 TBr 00 00 20 18 00 00 26 19 00 00 06 01 powderskier 00 00 00 00 Bling userfolders g z TBr 00 00 25 17 00 00 29 08 00 00 03 21 boat 00 00 00 00 Bling userfolders g 2 TBr 00 00 28 02 00 00 38 20 00 00 10 18 Cube Clip 001 00 00 17 27 Bling userfolders g 2 T Br Cube 00 00 37 11 00 00 42 1 00 00 05 06 mountains 00 00 00 00 Bling userfolders g z TBr ONAN ATTA NANNAN nn nn 272 26 Cube Phe NNI NIN N N219 AABlinakisarkaldarskakTRr uha Nia lalala lalala lalala 199 99190999 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 9 INTRODUCTION CHP 1 CHP 1 Media Pool Alt 5 25 The Media Pool is used to o
185. e one is combined with F1 from frame two Remember that there is nothing inherently right or wrong with a field order of F2 F1 it just happens to be wrong in this case At a minimum this can create slightly blurry or hazy video In most situations the video is jumpy or jittery and is unwatchable Interlacing problems can be especially noticeable when two adjacent frames are significantly different for example at a cut or in video with fast moving action It can also manifest itself in certain computer generated special effects for example in slow motion sequences F1 frame 2 F2 frame 1 frame on television The basic problem is that there is no standard correct field order Some capture cards use F1 F2 and some use F2 F1 If this were the extent of our troubles we could check out our hardware manual look up the correct field order and that would be that Unfortunately if this information is even available the terminology used can be equally baffling Fl may be called the odd upper or A field or more rarely it may be called the even lower or B field Add into the mix the fact that the first scan line might be numbered 0 or 1 which changes whether the field is considered odd or even and that cropping may change which line is ultimately scanned first and you can see that this is not a very clear cut problem The remainder of this section deals with how to sort this out in Vegas Fortunately you only have to determine the correc
186. e Allows you to select the device that the bus uses 39 for playback 45 Bus FX Displays the Bus FX window and allows you to Lock Unlock 51 adjust the audio effects plug ins Fader N Meter Displays the playback level of the bus pg 154 Channels 00 Adding busses to a project You may add up to 25 busses at any time during the development of your project Adding a bus Click the Insert Bus button on the Mixer window Adding multiple busses 1 Click the Audio Properties button on the Mixer window The Project Properties dialog appears with the Audio tab displaying 2 In the Number of stereo busses box enter the desired number of busses up to 25 to appear in the Mixer window Project Properties 71 x Video Audio Ruler Summary Audio co Enter the number Number of stereo busses 3 of busses 3 Click OK to add the specified number of busses and close the Project Properties dialog The new busses are labeled with letters and appear in the Mixer window Deleting busses from a project You may remove busses from your project at any time When you remove a bus from a project any tracks assigned to it are reassigned to the previous bus in the Mixer window For example if you have tracks assigned to four additional busses Busses A D in your project and remove Bus D the tracks that were assigned to Bus D are reassigned to Bus C Deleting a bus 1 Right click the bus to be deleted in the Mixer window 2
187. e and click Updates Click the Vegas Video update link to access the update page APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX A 273 APPENDIX F E ied ry N Glossary kg K MS L ow K K d E A Law A companded compression algorithm for voice signals defined by the Geneva Recommendations G 711 The G 711 recommendation defines A Law as a method of encoding 16 bit PCM signals into a nonlinear 8 bit format The algorithm is commonly used in United States telecommunications A Law is very similar to u Law however each uses a slightly different coder and decoder Adaptive Delta Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM A method of compressing audio data Although the theory for compression using ADPCM is standard there are many different algorithms employed For example Microsofts ADPCM algorithm is not compatible with the International Multimedia Association s IMA approved ADPCM Aliasing A type of distortion that occurs when digitally recording high frequencies with a low sample rate For example in a motion picture when a car s wheels appear to slowly spin backward while the car is quickly moving forward you are seeing the effects of aliasing Similarly when you try to record a frequency greater than one half of the sampling rate the Nyquist Frequency instead of hearing a high pitch you may hear alias frequencies in the low end of the spectrum To prevent aliasing an anti aliasing
188. e desired track s 2 Select the event to record into _ 4 Note You may record into multiple events by pressing and making your selections ee 3 On the marker bar drag a time selection You may adjust the time selection by dragging the selection bar s starting and ending points Make the time selection start before the event for a pre roll 4 Click the Record button on the transport bar to begin recording RECORDING AUDIO CHP 10 165 Using a pre roll The previous technique allows you to define the playback region with a time selection and sets the punch in and punch out points in the recording to the event boundaries When the Record button is pressed playback begins at the beginning of the time selection The event is then filled with the newly recorded material The audio file that is recorded to your hard disk is the full duration of the time selection The event only contains a portion of the full recorded performance and can therefore be trimmed both shorter and longer and repositioned within the event Time selection bar E defines the recorded PT audio file s duration ge 00 00 03 00 El Voiceover Mal S r O Bel Ree Oo s Pre roll Post roll Punch in Punch out Triggering from MIDI timecode Recording can be triggered and synchronized in Vegas by an external MIDI device that outputs generates MIDI timecode MTC When triggering from MIDI timecode you should have your audio devic
189. e for your rendered file This section provides descriptions of the Custom Settings options for creating a Video for Windows AVI file For descriptions of the options used to customize other formats use the What s This button 2 in the specific Custom Settings dialog for that format For more information see What s This help on page 18 Some of the rendering settings are identical to your Project Properties and can be saved as a part of a project template Final render settings override Project Properties settings For more information see Modifying project video properties on page 190 The Custom Settings dialog for rendering to an AVI file has three tabs Project Video and Audio Project tab Video rendering quality Higher quality settings result in longer rendering times Good is the default Motion blur type Motion blur can be used to smooth any animated effects created in Vegas including track motion panning and cropping effects Exposure time seconds This determines the amount of Motion blur to apply Specify a duration over which the blur will occur Smaller fractions of a second are recommended Resample the frame rate of all video This option resamples the frame rate for all source media files in a project that differ from the target frame rate of the final movie where necessary This may or may not improve the quality of the final video but will almost certainly increase rendering times For more informatio
190. e multimedia format RealMedia rm The RealNetworks standard for streaming media via the Web This option renders both audio and video into one file Sonic Foundry Perfect Clarity pca A Sonic Foundry proprietary format that is compressed and completely Audio lossless Sonic Foundry Wave64 w64 A Sonic Foundry proprietary format that allows wave files that are practically unrestricted by file size Video for Windows avi The standard video file format used on Windows based computers This option renders both audio and video into one file Wave Microsoft wav The standard audio file format used on Windows based computers Windows Media Audio wma The Microsoft audio only format used to create files for streaming or downloading via the Web Windows Media Format wmv The Microsoft standard used for streaming audio and video media via the Web More detailed instructions for rendering to a specific format appear later in this manual For more information see Saving Rendering and Printing Projects on page 237 Creating a movie To create a movie you render the Vegas project into an appropriate media file output The final output format depends on the destination of the new media file Some examples are AVI MOV and WMV 1 From the File menu choose Render As 2 In the Render As dialog box choose the appropriate option from the Save as type drop down list 3 Click the Custom button to select custom compression settings The default co
191. e plug in from the Video FX window to the event to remove the color For more information see Adding a video effects plug in on page 194 3 Drag a Brightness and Contrast plug in from the Video FX window to the event 4 Adjust the Brightness and Contrast to create the mask Video Event Fx Watch the Video Preview window for a real time Video Event FX Beach preview of the mask Adjust the effect so that parts of the K Black and White HIY Brightness and Contrast J7 Invert fo video are completely black opaque and other parts are Preset oea completely white transparent This can often mean increasing the Contrast while decreasing the Brightness E3 SONIC FOUNDRY Brightness and Contrast Brightness B LS Contrast a 0 96 Contrast center j 0 50 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 13 205 5 If necessary mask areas can be inverted reversing the black and white areas with an Invert plug in or by selecting the Invert check box in the Mask Generator window For more information see Using the Mask Generator on page 206 s IK X Original color event Black and White Brightness and Contrast Invert plug in plug in plug in After you have created the mask place it in the highest track Add another video event to another track below the mask and click the Make Compositing Child button on that track Any video that appears in a lower track below the Parent mask track and its Child shows
192. e the audio track HI O yok 3008 Fan Center We are preparing to place and work with the new voiceover Eventually we will delete the original audio but for now it can be used as a reference Placing the new voiceover A new voiceover was recorded in a studio to replace the original audio stream from talkinghead avi aa Note We could have recorded the new audio straight into Vegas For more information see Recording Audio on page 159 EE T In the Explorer select the file titled voiceover wav Drag the file into the timeline below the lowest track Vegas creates a new track for it Double click the scribble strip on the new track and name the track Voiceover A O N gt Click either the Play 1 or the Play From Start button to play the voiceover 5 Click the Stop button GJ to stop playback During playback the narrator pauses to review notes and cough These are the types of problems that will be fixed in the next section The following is a map of the voiceover E A Welcome to Sonic Foundry B Um C This tutorial will D Cough E Found in the new These errors B and D will be removed in the next section Also during playback you probably saw that the new voiceover and the video are out of sync Next we will align the voiceover with the video Aligning the new voiceover with video We will now position the voiceover so that it is roughly aligned with the video W
193. e will use the poor quality audio as a reference Since we can see the audio waveform synchronizing is made easier To make it easier to see the audio events we can zoom in on the project There are several ways to manage the project s view For more information see Changing track height on page 133 1 Press lai 0 or click the timeline so the track view timeline takes focus of keyboard commands 2 Hold the Ctri Shift keys and then press either the JA or keys to toggle through different track heights 3 Click the Zoom In Time button 1 at the bottom right corner of the track view to zoom in on the audio CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS 40 4 Drag the new audio event to align it under the original audio Use the waveforms as a guide to align the event Original audio muted New voiceover 5 On the timeline drag to select a time region that includes the beginning of the audio Selection bar 6 Click either the Play J or the Play From Start 11 button to play just the time selection Click the Loop Playback button on the transport bar to have playback loop continuously within the selection 7 Watch the Video Preview window to see if the new voiceover is roughly in the correct position You will fine tune the alignment in the next section 8 Click the Stop button to stop playback Saving a Vegas project A Vegas project file contains all of the information about a single proj
194. eading tracking and position Other aspects of generated text do not allow interpolated keyframe animation For example if you set the text to One initially and then at five seconds change it to Two the text will suddenly jump to the new value at the five second keyframe This behavior is different from the behavior of other keyframe animation techniques In this example keyframes are used to make a title appear one letter at a time across the screen 1 Drag a text generator from the Text Backgrounds window to the timeline 2 Right click the new event and choose Edit Generated Media 3 Enter the first letter of the title for example T A Click the keyframe controller at the 1 000 second mark and enter the second letter for example y The title now reads Ty A new keyframe is added to the keyframe controller at the 1 000 second mark S SRD D 5 Proceed down the keyframe controller to 2 000 and enter the letter p 6 Proceed down the keyframe controller repeating this process until the title is finished Typing ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 14 223 7 Preview the event in the Video Preview window The word Typing appears one letter per second until finished Video Event Fs Video Media Generator Sonic Foundry Test Frame size e55 x jaso Length 0000 09 29 ajh 4 Preset Untitled SONIC FOUNDRY Text Edit Placement Properties Effects Aria
195. ears just below the title bar in the FX window Adding plug ins via the Plug Ins window The Plug Ins window is a dockable window that allows you to view and choose plug ins to be added to a track bus or assignable effects chain 1 If the Plug Ins window is not displayed press ctri Alt 1 2 On the Plug Ins window navigate to the Audio folder and select the FX folder Plug ns 1 FX Packages Ela Audio A Sonic Foundry Amplitude Modulation Sie Fa Sw Sonic Foundry Chorus E Pe _ Fs Packages Hi Sonic Foundry Distortion Hl Track Optimized F Hih 2 Sonic Foundry Dither H Video v Sonic Found ExpressF Amplitude Modulation Y Sonic Foundry ExpressFs Chorus Y Sonic Foundry ExpressF Delay Y Sonic Foundry Express Distortion Y Sonic Found ExpressF Equalization Y Sonic Foundry ExpressF Flange ah Wiah Y Sonic Foundry ExpressFs Reverb Y Sonic Found ExpressF Stutter L L 3 Drag a plug in to a track bus or assignable effects chain 4 Note You may add multiple plug ins at the same time when you click them while pressing or and then dragging them to the desired location EE Ee E 4 Confirm that the plug ins were added by clicking the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button 4 to view the FX window The effects may be customized at this time CHP 8 ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS 146 r Saving customized plug in presets Each plug in has a number of preset settings that can be used to qu
196. ecommended e When creating vertically scrolling titles CHP 12 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 188 oo H__CCCCCC LCCC When any of the above situations is true there are only ten frames of source material for every second of project time When the project is rendered there must be roughly thirty frames in each second Vegas must create the frames between the source media frames sometimes known as padding The easiest way to do this is to simply duplicate the previous frame This can result in less than smooth video playback Resampling allows Vegas to interpolate the intervening frames more smoothly Using Edit Decision Lists EDL Vegas Edit Decision Lists EDL are text lists of all of the media files used where they are placed and how they are trimmed As such Vegas EDLs are not the same as EDLs used in traditional linear edit suites These simple text lists can be used as a printed summary of your project can be used to open a Vegas project in another compatible application or can be used to convert a project from another application into a Vegas project There are some necessary limitations to this conversion process because of the great disparity between video editing applications Creating an EDL 1 From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog appears 2 From the Save as type list choose EDL Text File txt 3 Enter a name for the file and browse for a destination 4 Click Save EDLs created in another applicatio
197. ect However it does not contain any media but maintains the references to media files used in the project 1 From the File menu choose Save The first time you save a project the Save As dialog appears Save As IEM Save inc Sample Projects ce i UT voiceover veg 7 07 fades veg W Track mot a 0z_editing veg 08_trackmotion veg C TV spoti a O3_musicbed veg C 09 velocity veg wa Web spat S 04 background veg Ng Audio mis veg ba UB overlay veg C Compositing with masks veg mE UG panning veg LC Panning with still images veg L File name M yTutorial veg Save as type Vegas Project File veg Cancel T Copy and trim media with project 2 Select the drive and folder where you want to store the project 3 Type the project name MyTutorial in the File name box 4 Click the Save button The subsequent times you save the project the Save As dialog is bypassed your existing file name is retained and your project is updated to include any changes TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS CHP 2 e 41 Summary In this section we replaced the audio from the original video with a cleaner audio track recorded in a studio and saved the project Here is what the project should look like at this point 00 00 02 169 S Talkinghead D ap Level 100 0 2 Voiceover editing 02_editing veg When you played the new voiceover you noticed the interruption errors that it
198. ecting multiple events on page 84 2 Place the cursor at the timeline position where the split will occur 3 From the Edit menu choose Split Splitting all events at the cursor All events are split at the cursor s position unless the event is locked The split occurs across all tracks if no events are selected Events before splitting Events after splitting DU DWZ29 a Splitting selected events Only the selected events are split at the cursor s position Events before splitting Events after splitting OOOD24 29 a N BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L DB Splitting a time selection Unless locked all events within the time selection are split at the starting and ending points of the time range meaning that two splits are made The split occurs across all tracks Events before splitting Events after splitting O0 00 24 29 a l Splitting a time selection across selected events Only selected events within the time selection are split at the starting and ending points of the time range Events before splitting Events after splitting 7 00 00 24 29 Slipping and sliding events To help you picture what happens when you slip and slide events think of an event as a window to a media file The window can display the entire media file or a small section When the window displays only a portion of the media file you can move either the window or the underlying media to a
199. ectory as the file or is deleted Vegas regenerates it the next time you open the file GLOSSARY APPENDIX B e 279 Plug In An effect that can be added to the product to enhance the feature set Vegas supports DirectX compatible plug ins The built in EQ Compression and Dithering effects are also considered plug ins because they work in other DirectX compatible applications Plug In Chain Plug ins can be strung together into a chain so that the output of one effect feeds into the input of another This allows for complex effects that couldn t otherwise be created Pre roll Post roll Pre roll is the amount of time elapsed before an event occurs Post roll is the amount of time after the event The time selection defines the pre and post roll when recording into a selected event Preset A snapshot of the current settings in a plug in Presets are created and named so that you can easily get back to a sound or look that you have previously created A preset calls up a bulk setting of a function in Vegas If you like the way you tweaked that EQ but do not want to have to spend the time getting it back for later use save it as a preset Presets appear in the top of plug in windows in Vegas Pulse Code Modulation PCM PCM is the most common direct binary representation of a level of an uncompressed audio signal This method of coding yields the highest fidelity possible when using digital storage Punch In Punching in during
200. ed At this point we want to add a flashy introduction and nice closing To do this all of the events in the current project must be repositioned One way to do this is to group all of the events together and drag them The Selection tool provides an easy way to select multiple events 1 Make sure the Lock Envelopes to Events button 2 1 on the toolbar is selected This makes the volume envelope on the music bed track move with the musicbed event as it is moved TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS CHP 2 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 20 2 Click the Selection Edit Tool button 1 on the toolbar 3 Drag a rectangle encompassing all of the events to be moved 4 Right click one of the selected events and from the Group menu choose Create New 5 Click the Normal Edit Tool button on the toolbar 6 Drag the group of events down the timeline so that the musicbed and powderskier events begin at the 13 000 second mark Inserting the introduction splash In this section we will insert an introductory sequence at the beginning of the project Parts of the introduction will overlay or appear on top of other video events 1 Locate implosion avi in the Explorer 2 Drag implosion avi onto a blank location on the timeline below the lowest track so that a new track is created This new event should start at the very beginning of the project 3 Drag vegas_logo bmp onto the same track Position it so that it ends at 13 000 w
201. ee Using keyframe animation on page 215 1 Right click the second corporate_logo event and choose Video Event Pan Crop The Event Pan Crop window appears 2 Resize the crop area at the middle to roughly 336 X 252 Enter the numbers manually in the Size boxes on the left side of the dialog This will zoom in on the corporate_logo event 3 Reposition the crop area off of the left edge of the event at roughly 180 X 130 as pictured Use the Center boxes on the left side of the dialog to enter the coordinates Event Pan Crop Event Pan Crop corporate logo Preset Untitled Position Size Crop area pen Bajen E Center Fiend fs oo E Angle degrees po Smoothness ZT foo Magnify view ZT 16 1 k Els Arm 0000 00 0000 05 00 00 Keyframe controller Ble A N d S 00 00 00 000 button 4 On the project timeline click a blank space on the timeline at 32 000 seconds to move the cursor to that position Use the left and right arrow keys to position the cursor more precisely Watch the Time Display window to the upper left of the timeline to find this position Then back in the Event Pan Crop window click the Sync Cursor button 8 in the keyframe controller This positions the cursor on the keyframe controller at 32 000 seconds to match the cursor on the timeline 5 Drag the crop area to the right edge of the event to 1140 X 130 Use the Center boxes to enter the coordinates This will anim
202. ee ee eee ee een ae eee 58 TV ee eeina sed ee hehe heed a a a ieee a bea a 59 Web SDOL WITH Eeee l ocs 6 cc cedic anda die be 8 Ge Eales wise aa Sidra dead earns Saeew aes 60 Panning with still Mages c2c ce ea ek chk ee eee bh hh hae ee elisa a hey a eke eted 61 COMPOSING WIAMaASKS vsu5sht coca tca teat eet sce heehee a T tee totet etek 61 Erak MONON 662 00 demscuse dan vantanodee edad tastes emstetlie ste tee aes es eee nis 62 Getting Started s 4 cccaccacthcadheanhe ae hnawtden ad os aaa 2 65 Creating OF Ol OCIS saree inate ee aie Bai ha ees Sa oie ae aces ea aaa ae 65 Setting video properties based ona media file 0000 cece eee cette eee eee 66 Saving a ea arerin e r eet ei a Goi see hie che Shad ead eee ce aaa ede 66 Renaming a project using Save AS cece te eee eee eee eens 67 Getting Media fes 2icenesecne secre easeneet eee d Gees fae eee 67 SCISCTING ACC a teats Hos Meck eeinecuee 8s Gas Goes 6 2 ooo ree L Bae eee 67 Previewing a media file 2 00 c cc eee eee eee eee eee ena 68 Usmo the Medid aG Ad NT E G H Ga Samal dears Wr bre bd RAR Wa Sto wig ede de data deal dete ae aes 68 Adding media to the timeline 0 ccc eee eee eens 71 VV OFIKINIG With CVC IIIS sassanida ura eae akin ter ee ahah w da ahaa ae ae eck aa 73 Understanding files and events ccc ccc eee eee eee eee eee eens 73 Moving events along the timeline 0 ccc eee ees 73 WOrkNg WIN LEACKS pescaren eai eee eS hee ee
203. ee eee eee eeenenees 232 identifying sate areas 4 RN R Via T REG a A eh ee ea 232 LISIMGMISLOG LAN S G 4 260 4 6 are 2 etry oS whee eee a ee Ee eee ones bo bee ee 233 TABLE OF CONTENTS 12 yz Preparing projects for broadcast lt 233 Previewing in a playa TTT 234 Using an external MONItOT n n e e e nannan nannan 235 Setting up an external MONItOr a an nnana nnana nn eee eee eens 235 Configuring an external MONItOr 0 ce eee eee eens 236 Verifying the external monitor configuration 00 0c cette eae 236 Saving Rendering and Printing Projects 237 Saving a PlOleCta risa oda wre over eae ks Bee bee e oe nee he eae eee 237 Creating a copy of a project using Save AS 2 eee eens 238 Saving a Project with media sisi he eee A K HN HoN HAAR aN HEAR eas das pede 238 AULOSAVING a Projet ict vaurad beads beeen end tes bedensiaddwed a aa 239 Rend rng A DOST dain a ae Oe lo Ae OO Sp OE a ee ed bee ee de 239 Selecting a file format 0 ccc eee eee eee eee aes 240 More about the MPEG format 0 e eee eee eee eens 240 More about the Wave64 and Perfect Clarity Audio Tomate lt n nananana ennn 240 More about video formats lt sa 59 Sg 2 0 N nsei valves ets cake sedate ers esse RRR ARR AR 241 Customizing the rendering PrOCeSS 0000 ees 241 Customizing the Render As settings 0 ccc ccc eee eens 242 Saving custom settings as a template
204. ees 21 SAIS TT waeeeceun ie etree eae Gaeta ie eee oka eee tenet a eae en Eee Aes 22 FUN CO NO lars creas te arate Bae ass pee ee aria HT 22 Window docking arGd sc beat t ihe ke Dee tte eee eee ae ESTEE hl eee eee 22 Keyboard command reference 000 cece eee eee eee eee eee enna 28 GUSOP INCICAtIONS 6 at wc eulaunod sate apres ae baa eine heehee wee Oda Be aa ade eed 32 Audio Sonal FOW fiat ocd oat dee E A aie banter ae ee ale we ae 33 Video Signal FIOW 0 ccc cece eee eee e eee eeeeee 34 Tutorial and Sample Projects 0 0000 cece eee eee 35 TEU OP 1 oe AEE tg E E N OE er eaten es E E A 35 stalling CNS SE ea IT 36 TABLE OF CONTENTS d 1 Voiceover narration 01_voiceover veg e 37 2 Voiceover editing O2_editing veg 2 cece eee eee eee eens 41 3 Mu sic bed OS m sicbed Veg ene aciviw tee See nire Toa seer eae dies sees eeuedoess ects 44 4 Background video 04_background veg 2c c cece eee eee eens 46 5 Overlay titles 05_overlay veg esa eae bee taGn sweden ale eeuadeted eee adadd eee 48 6 Pan Crop motion O6_panning Veg e eee eee eee eens 52 7 Fades 07 fades yeg soci veoh cee ee eee red ae ae tae eee eee ead 54 8 Track Motion 08_trackmotion veQG 0 22 e eee 55 9 Velocity 09 velocity Veg herrie ie eo aieariewema eS oy Sao es ete Baten e euch s 57 10 Rendering the project as an AVI 6 e 58 Sample projects e 58 AUOD saraaa a a n a aaa aaa a a
205. egas displays the HY Gain is 0 9 dB Decibel level event s decibel level Setting an event s fade in and out The event handles allow you to affect an audio event s fade in and out volume The type of curve that the event uses to control the volume s fade in or out can also be changed 1 Place the mouse pointer on a handle upper corners of the event and the pointer changes to the envelope cursor 55 2 As you drag the cursor the volume line appears Vegas displays both the time in the event when the volume will be maximized and its decibel level Fade in Fade out T KE H T M Gain at 00 00 00 271 is 0 0 dE bil san a rnb nl Taa at 000000 Ta 10d agu L aaah al CHP 6 WORKING WITH EVENTS 126 Changing an event s fade curve You can set the shape of the fade curve fast linear slow sharp or smooth that an event uses to raise or lower the volume over time To access the different fade curves right click anywhere in the event s fade in or out region and choose Fade Type from the shortcut menu Right click to select the fade curve type Linear FA w _ Smooth Sharp Z Velocity envelopes are only available in Vegas Video alia Envelopes are a method of controlling some of the attributes of an event over time Video event envelopes include Opacity and Velocity Envelopes appear as blue or white lines on an event The Velocity envelope offers the added cont
206. el 100 0 ddl B PT cs crn H set of keyframes ee eee eee eare L displays You can move any keyframe by dragging it to a D T eee new position Keyframe Adding new track keyframes You can add new track keyframes to an existing track level effect by double clicking the track keyframe area Editing track keyframes Double click a track keyframe to open the associated window and adjust the settings To change a keyframe interpolation curve right click the keyframe and choose a curve type from the shortcut menu Locking track keyframes When track keyframes are locked you can move events along the track and the keyframes move along with them Only keyframes that occur within the selected events move Select the Lock Envelopes to Events button to lock track keyframes to the events on the track Hiding track keyframes If track view becomes too cluttered you may hide track keyframes from view 1 From the View menu choose Show Video Envelopes 2 From the submenu choose Track Keyframes to hide track keyframes Sample uses for keyframe animation The following section provides several examples of how keyframe animation can be used with features such as event panning and cropping video effects plug ins and generated text events Animating event panning and cropping You can combine event panning and cropping tools with keyframe animation to create several special effects For more information see Cropping video on page 177
207. enever it plays back those sections of the project increasing playback quality and performance As long as no changes are made to the events in the prerendered sections Vegas continues to use the newly created files for previews even if changes are made to other sections of the project 1 To prerender a portion of the project create a selection containing the portion you want to prerender 2 From the Tools menu choose Selectively Prerender Video The Prerender Video dialog appears 3 Select the type of preview file to create in the Prerender as drop down list Click the Custom button to configure any custom compression options 4 To preview just a portion of the project verify that Render loop region only is selected To create a preview of the entire project clear this check box 5 Click OK A progress bar displays the progress of the render When prerendering is complete green bars appear at the top of the timeline indicating the sections that have been prerendered Prerendered sections pN 00 00 12 05 eE a S a ee E aea QU ae RE P Level 10004 T CA RU R 9 k ik K gt BIR video S oth S 0 Ranar KT 7 D qp Level 100 0 dl B As a default Vegas saves these preview files when a project is closed To delete these files when you close the project from the Options menu choose Preferences and on the General tab clear the Save active previews on project close check box The location of these preview files can
208. ent Unselected Selected event event Selected Unselected event event CHP 4 gy Editing and ripple editing events How Vegas cuts and pastes material depends on whether or not ripple editing is enabled Vegas is in ripple edit mode when the Ripple Edits button Wal is selected In ripple edit mode cutting pasting or deleting material can affect the position of events appearing later in the track The effect of a ripple edit depends on what is being cut deleted or pasted For example Cutting or deleting a time selection eliminates that section of the timeline across all tracks Cutting an event or selected events has no effect on the events that follow Pasting an event in a track pushes all events after the pasted event down the timeline Pasting events to several tracks at once pushes all events after the pasted events down the timeline Only the tracks where events are pasted are affected Ripple editing also affects how Vegas adds material from the Trimmer window For more information see Using the Trimmer window on page 115 Copy this event and paste it in this track at the cursor position T Fy c In Ripple Edit mode the pasted event pushes the existing event down the timeline Copying events Vegas allows you to copy events or portions of events to the Clipboard and paste them into your project You may copy a single event or multiple events Copying preserves the original event informatio
209. eptable artifacts in the rendered video Turning off this option can correct the artifacts but it increases rendering time significantly e Select the Play movie inside web page check box to create an HTML page and embed the finished video in it e Select the Include movie player installer check box to include a media player installer on the CD Click the Browse button to locate the installer file e From the Speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to record The Max option records using the fastest speed possible with your drive Decrease the speed if you have difficulty recording Click OK ee Note You can use this same command to burn an existing file to a CD Select the Use an existing file option in the Burn to Data CD dialog to record a file to the disc EE T SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 16 251 CHAPTER 1 17 7 m mn are Vegas may be customized to your project needs and working preferences Many of the settings depend on your equipment or studio setup Vegas can be set to work with the components that you use in your studio In this chapter you will find information about functions that allow you to customize the appearance of Vegas set a project s properties and set the application s preferences Displaying frame numbers You may display frame numbers on video events Once you n0 00 00 00 have enabled frame numbering a sm
210. erent source media file During recording with loop playback enabled Vegas continually repeats the time selection and starts recording a new take until you stop recording Takes can be previewed selected renamed and deleted For more information see Working with takes on page 113 CHP 10 RECORDING AUDIO 166 Specifying where recordings are stored When you record into Vegas the event appears on the timeline while its media source file is written to your hard drive The first time you arm a track to record in a project Vegas prompts you to identify the location where the recordings will be stored By default Vegas stores recorded media source files in the Vegas program folder Changing where recorded files are stored when arming a track 1 Press and click the Arm for Record button l on a track The Project Recorded Files Folder dialog appears 2 Browse for the location where you want Vegas to save recorded files 3 Click OK Changing where recorded files are stored when starting to record 1 Press and click the Record button 1 on the transport bar The Project Recorded Files Folder dialog appears aa Note You can also press Ctri Shift R to specify the location for recorded files when starting to record eee 2 Browse for the location where you want Vegas to save recorded files 3 Click OK RECORDING AUDIO CHP 10 r 1 67 Changing where recorded files are stored in the Project Propertie
211. ers do not support this feature ae T Previewing audio External monitor previewing differs in one respect from printing to tape from the timeline no audio is sent through the 1394 card As shown in the illustration above Vegas routes the audio to the sound card and then on to the mixer if present and speakers This allows you to mix your audio on better speakers than are typically found in television monitors Before printing to tape you may wish to preview the audio through the television monitor speakers to ensure a good TV mix You can use the print to tape feature to send the full video and audio to the external monitor Follow the steps for printing to tape from the timeline pg 246 but do not set the camcorder to record Vegas sends both the video and audio through the 1394 card to the external monitor CHP 15 PREVIEWING VIDEO 236 r Optimizing preview quality Keep in mind that complex effects and or transitions may not play back in real time from the timeline What effects can and cannot be played back depends on the speed of your computer You may want to prerender more complex portions of a project For more information see Prerendering video on page 231 _ 4 Note The compression settings used to create the prerendered video must be identical to your captured files for timeline playback to work SEN Configuring an external monitor 1 Connect your camera to the IEEE 1394 card and tu
212. ert menu choose Audio Envelopes and then choose Volume A blue envelope line appears across the middle of the track 3 On the Musicbed volume envelope line place the mouse pointer slightly ahead of the voiceover s starting point The mouse pointer appears as a hand Ja TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS CHP 2 45 4 Right click and choose Add Point from the shortcut menu A square point appears on the envelope line 5 Repeat step 4 to add three more points on the line for a total of four The initial position of the points is Add Point bad T unimportant E e Linear Fade l Fast Fade Setting the volume envelope Slow Fade f Smooth Fade Now we will use the points on the envelope to lower and raise Siew the volume so that the music bed does not interfere with the ert voiceover When you click or hover over a point information Beset Al about it appears 1 Drag the points so that two are near the start of the voiceover and two are near the end You can set one point at a time or use the Envelope Aina MAA alll lh il ill 444 La 999 tool to select and move ech dab tae bb LL tee bs multiple points at a time ii ae A R A ART Volume at 00 00 04 974 ts 7 0 dB 3 Set the outer points so that their volume level is 0 0 dB 4 Click the Play 571 or the Play From Start 11 button to play the project and check the timing of the volume envelope 5 Adjust the outer and inner points along the timeline as
213. es connected together via a master digital word clock The word clock keeps the audio hardware locked together eliminating the need for the software to constantly vary its playback rate to stay synchronized The incoming timecode is only used for an absolute time reference For more information see Sync tab on page 261 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and go to the Sync tab 2 From the Trigger from MIDI Timecode settings drop down list select the device that you want to trigger Vegas 3 Click OK The Preferences dialog closes 4 Click the Arm for Record button l on the desired track s 5 Right click the Time Display and choose MIDI Timecode In The Time Display now shows the timecode being generated from your MIDI device The top of the display reads MTC Input Waiting MITC Input Yvaiting 00 00 00 00 6 Begin generating MTC from your MIDI device The top of the Time Display now reads MTC Input Locked the time updates from the MIDI device and Vegas automatically begins recording Typically there is a short delay between when you begin generating MTC and synchronization MITC Input Locked 00 00 02 05 Working with multiple recorded takes Clicking the Loop Playback button on the transport bar enables you to continually create takes during recording Takes are different versions of a recorded event that you can quickly switch between to choose the best one Each take within an event references a diff
214. ess FX 1 and 2 only Assignable effects chains Multiple audio busses Rubber audio time stretch and pitch shift events Render to new track Customizable render to streaming media formats Presets only Print to tape from timeline MPEG 1 and 2 encoding Project compacting copy and trim media with project External monitor support Z lt P lt S Q C ja o D El 6 l B C O o o g 7 EL a mee ct ala T a gt H gt H gt lt H gt H lt H gt H gt H lt lt E Bit depth sample rate 24 96Khz 16 48Khz Overall level of video control Moderate Most versions can be immediately upgraded to a more advanced version over the Internet From the Help menu choose Instant Upgrade to purchase a license and unlock these more powerful features oy This manual covers all of the features available in both Vegas Video and Vegas Video LE Since different versions have different features more advanced features available only in Vegas Video are marked with a special icon INTRODUCTION CHP 1 L 17 Installing Vegas 1 Insert the Vegas CD ROM The Vegas Installation screen appears if CD ROM AutoPlay is enabled If CD ROM AutoPlay is disabled click the sanl button and choose Run In the Run window that appears type the CD ROM drive s letter and add setup exe Click the OK button to start the installation 2 Click Install Software The installation process begins 3 Follow the screen prompts and enter the necessary information
215. est themselves with jerky video playback although the stutters are less frequent and of longer duration than if the video subsystem is the problem Slower hard disks e g 5400 RPM IDE can cause an occasional dropped frame DV enthusiasts have fewer problems due to the low data rate 3 6 MB sec of that format The following section outlines some recommendations arranged in order of importance e Buy a dedicated video drive This is easily the most important piece of hardware advice A dedicated physically distinct hard drive is almost a requirement for any type of serious video work This means that you have one primary C drive or wherever Windows is installed and a separate drive for video You can use your dedicated drive for other purposes especially storage but it is a good idea not to run any applications from it and to keep Windows virtual memory off of it It is very important that the drive only be used for video when playing and capturing and that other programs including Windows are not trying to access it Since video files are so large a dedicated drive is not an unreasonable item even if digital video is just a hobby You can never have too much hard disk space e Buy a faster hard drive Older 5400 RPM hard drives may not be fast enough for capturing and playing back video for any length of time while newer 7200 RPM drives are almost always adequate Be careful manufacturers are usually talking about burst transfer rates when
216. etch Ctrl Position the cursor over the edge of an event press Ctrl and drag the edge to stretch or compress it This makes the media in the event play slower or faster Slip Alt Press Alt and drag on the middle of a clip to move the media H H within the event without moving the event itself Trim Ctrl Alt Position the cursor over the boundary between two adjacent Adjacent events press Ctrl Alt and drag Both events are edge trimmed simultaneously Z Slide Ctrl Alt Position the cursor over the middle of an event press Ctrl Alt and ree drag to simultaneously trim both ends Slide Ctrl Alt Position cursor over a crossfade press Ctrl Alt and drag ona Crossfade crossfade to move it INTRODUCTION CHP 1 33 Audio Signal Flow V Multiple audio busses and assignable effects are only available in Vegas Video Audio event Normalize event Event ASR Pp Assignable FX Bus pre post volume pre post volume Track FX DuA ink Mee ares N me eae Post Yolume T Track FX e a Bus send Track fader v Assignable FX send Vol 2 0 dB N BusA 3 1 dB v R KIO 520 R Pan track v Assignable FX Pan Center gang input Chain Mute track y N R ne Mute Output Mute OUT Mute N Bus assignment Bus assignment A Master Microsoft Sound Mapper A s Bus amp Microsoft Sound Mapper h Master ad sl Sound Mapper A Microsoft Sound Mapper k Bus Master Fader Mute Hardware Control output aA
217. etronome eden wie kare dae Sue BW ee ee eS Se te Weta ee een bala Wea ee ere awe 162 Disabling playback during reCOrding 2 cc eee eee ees 162 Fe CONG e euer eee ee abe OU aa ce eee een ee eae a 162 Recording into an empty track 0 20 eee eens 162 Recording into atime selection 0000 ees 163 Recording Into an event 44 2 2225508 ae da Mae aa sted sid eee i a 163 Recording into an event with atime selection 0c ee es 164 Triggering from MIDI timecode 0 cc eee eens 165 Working with multiple recorded takes 000 00 165 TABLE OF CONTENTS e 9 Specifying where recordings are stored 00 eee eee ee eee 166 Changing where recorded files are stored when arming a track eee eees 166 Changing where recorded files are stored when starting to record 0000ee cues 166 Changing where recorded files are stored in the Project Properties dialog 167 BUINGAUGIO CUS s atu24cbeecsibatedewstades wneesedess 169 Understanding track at once and disc at OnCe cece eee eee eee 169 TAG Kea ONG ica E TE ao ached tad a Re dees a oS eRe Re Re Re ee aa 169 Disc at once Single Session or Red Book 0000 cece eee eee eee eee eee eens 169 Understanding tracks and indices 0 000 cee ees 169 Setting Up to burn audio CDS 1 046 sina knw eee Ree Seed ae CR WER wee See 170 Viewing the ruler and time display cece cece eect ee eee eect eee eee eee 170
218. evant information and reminders about your project Width 720 Field order Lower field first b Height 480 Pixel aspect ratio fo 9091 NTSC DY z Frame rate 23 970 NTSC lt e Audio CD Enter information for burning audio CDs Full resolution rendering quality Goca 9 from Vegas Prerendered files folder C PROGRAM FILESSSONIC FOUNDRY WEGAS 3 05 Browse aa Note The easiest way to set the often complex properties on the Video tab is to select a template that matches your media e g NTSC DV 720x480 29 970 fps E 3 Click OK CHP 3 Free storage space in selected folder 3 174 0 Megabytes Advanced F Start all new projects with these settings Cancel GETTING STARTED 66 gt gt 4 From the File menu choose Save Enter a name browse for a location and click the Save button to save your project VEG file The project settings can be changed at any time while you are working on a project From the File menu choose Properties to change any of these settings Setting video properties based on a media file You can automatically set your project video properties to match an existing video file 1 From the File menu choose Properties 2 In the Project Properties dialog click the Match Media Settings button 1E 3 Browse for a media file that has the settings you wish you use for the project 4 Click Open Vegas automatically detects the frame size
219. ey are uncompressed the performance increase is significant The file is saved as a proprietary sfap0 file with the same name as the original media file and has the same characteristics as the original audio stream So movie avi yields a movie avi sfapO audio proxy Additional audio streams in the same file are saved as movie avi sfap1 movie avi sfap2 etc This is a one time process that greatly speeds up editing The conversion happens automatically and does not result in a loss of quality or synchronization The original source file remains unchanged the entire process is nondestructive Audio proxy files can be safely deleted at any time since Vegas recreates these files as needed aa Note Audio proxy files are saved to the same folder as the source media If the source media folder is read only e g a CD ROM the files are saved to a temporary directory nnn n Interlacing and field order Field order in interlaced video is an important parameter that can severely impact the quality of video on a television monitor While the concept is easy enough to understand the lack of standards in both technology and terminology clouds the issue The path of the electron gun across the screen is fundamentally different between television monitors and computer monitors Computer monitors scan every line in order from left to right and top to bottom This is known as progressive scanning On a standard television monitor the electron gun sc
220. f subdividing a project s time This may be useful if you want the ruler to display SMPTE video timecode but you need to create your music in terms of beats and measures The grid spacing may be set in time frame measure or note units The grid may also be set to match the ruler s time format The grid appears across all tracks in your project and the grid s lines can be used as snap points Ruler and grid increments can be different This new project is set with Ruler SMPTE non drop and Grid Quarter notes 00 00 00 00 i Wk 4 o S ta ap Level 100 0 ee A PA 00 00 00 00 ee S EJ H ik e D an Level 100 0 E SESI ae Vo TT E H H Pan Center Jo CUSTOMIZING VEGAS CHP 17 _ S S IZ 1 From the Options menu choose Grid Spacing A submenu appears 2 From the submenu choose the desired time unit The grid spacing changes to reflect your selection _ 4 Note In some cases the grid lines and the ruler do not match This is because they are two independent functions ee eee Using the Time Display window The Time Display window reflects the cursor s position on the timeline and the end point of a time selection The Time Display window s time settings may be customized including what time the window displays and what colors it uses The Time Display window may be moved from its docked position above the track headers to float on the Vegas workspace In add
221. files Vegas neither operates on nor changes these files Files can be accessed from the Vegas Explorer window e Events are periods of time on the timeline in Vegas that act as windows into media files either whole or in part When dragging a media file onto the timeline you are automatically creating an event that contains that file s contents An event can contain video audio still images and some special generated media The event window may contain only a small portion of a much larger media file A single media file can be used repeatedly to create any number of different events since each event can be trimmed independently The original media file An event trimmed from the original media file a ssa ee ON ea een eer ene ae eee emer a fee ea ee See sero ae OO aaron ae dE The event as it appears in Vegas Audio events are created from audio files on your computer e g WAV MP3 or can be a part of a video file e g AVI You can change many characteristics of an audio event such as speed volume and equalization Audio events can be mixed with other audio events Video events are created from video files captured to your computer typically AVI MOV QT or images BMP JPEG PNG or TGA You can change many characteristics of a video event such as speed color and size Video events can overlay other video events and are visual elements that appear on top of a background video image or color Moving events
222. filter is used to remove high frequencies before recording Once the sound has been recorded aliasing distortion is impossible to remove without also removing other frequencies from the sound This same anti aliasing filter must be applied when resampling to a lower sample rate Amplitude Modulation AM A process whereby the amplitude loudness of a sound is varied over time When varied slowly a tremolo effect occurs If the frequency of modulation is high many side frequencies are created which can strongly alter the timbre of a sound Analog When discussing audio this term refers to a method of reproducing a sound wave with voltage fluctuations that are analogous to the pressure fluctuations of the sound wave This is different from digital recording in that these fluctuations are infinitely varying rather than discrete changes at sample time see Quantization Attack The attack of a sound is the initial portion of the sound Percussive sounds drums piano guitar plucks are said to have a fast attack This means that the sound reaches its maximum amplitude in a very short time Sounds that slowly swell up in volume soft strings and wind sounds are said to have a slow attack Audio Compression Manager ACM The Audio Compression Manager from Microsoft is a standard interface for audio compression and signal processing for Windows The ACM can be used by Windows programs to compress and decompress WAV files APPENDIX B GLO
223. format However Vegas can read and write to many other file formats so you can maintain compatibility with other software and hardware configurations Frame Rate Audio Audio uses frame rates only for the purposes of synching to video or other audio GLOSSARY APPENDIX B e 277 Frame Rate Video The speed at which individual images in the video are displayed on the screen A faster frame rate results in smoother motion in the video However more times than not frame rate is associated with SMPTE standard frame rates for video 29 97 for NTSC 25 for PAL or 24 for film Frequency Spectrum The Frequency Spectrum of a signal refers to its range of frequencies In audio the frequency range is basically 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz The frequency spectrum sometimes refers to the distribution of these frequencies For example bass heavy sounds have a large frequency content in the low end 20 Hz 200 Hz of the spectrum Hertz Hz The unit of measurement for frequency or cycles per second CPS Insertion Point The insertion point also referred to as the cursor position is analogous to the cursor in a word processor It is where pasted data is placed or other data is inserted depending on the operation The insertion point appears as a vertical flashing black line and can be moved by clicking the left mouse button anywhere in the timeline Markers Saved locations in the sound file Markers are stored in the Markers and Regions l
224. fter the Free wheel slack time has been exceeded Synchronization delay time Specifies the amount of time required for Vegas to synchronize itself to incoming timecode On slower computers this time should be set to around two seconds On faster computers it may be set lower Offset adjust quarter frames If Vegas is consistently behind or ahead of the MTC generator enter a value to adjust a synchronization offset with quarter frame accuracy e If Vegas is behind the MTC generator enter a negative number such as 4 e If Vegas is ahead of the MTC generator enter a positive number such as 4 CHP 17 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS 262 p ___ MTC Output Advanced Sync Preferences ME This tab contains controls for MTC output It is displayed only if a MTC Input MTC Output MIDI Clock Output device is selected for MTC output on the Sync tab I Use intemal timer for MTC generation Ate rral finer resolution miliseconde zj Eull frame message generation Use internal timer for MTC generation When selected the MIDI timecode that Vegas generates is based off of your computer s internal L Never clock Otherwise Vegas generates MTC based on the sound card s On statt and stop of playback and record clock For all cursor postion changes Internal timer resolution Allows you to control MTC resolution Full frame message generation Specifies when Vegas sends full Cancel ing frame timecode messages when the Sync t
225. g MIDI Port A MIDI Port is the physical MIDI connection on a piece of MIDI gear This port can be a MIDI in out or through Your computer must have a MIDI port to output MIDI timecode to an external device or to receive MIDI timecode from an external device APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 278 r MIDI Timecode MTC MTC is an addendum to the MIDI 1 0 Specification and provides a way to specify absolute time for synchronizing MIDI capable applications Basically it is a MIDI representation of SMPTE timecode Mix The process of combining multiple audio events and effects into a final output The analogous process of combining video events together is called compositing Musical Instrument Digital Interface MIDI A standard language of control messages that provides for communication between any MIDI compliant devices Anything from synthesizers to lights to stage equipment can be controlled via MIDI Vegas utilizes MIDI for synchronization purposes Noise shaping Noise shaping is a technique that can minimize the audibility of quantization noise by shifting its frequency spectrum For example in 44 100 Hz audio quantization noise is shifted towards the Nyquist Frequency of 22 050 Hz See also Dithering Nondestructive Editing A type of editing used by Vegas that involves a pointer based system of keeping track of edits When you delete a section of audio in a nondestructive system the audio on disk is not actually deleted Instead
226. g The Plug In Chooser dialog is accessed from the track bus or assignable effects chain into which you are adding the plug in 1 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button 44 The appropriate FX window Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX appears EST Music SI viel 0 0 dB Pan Center aoa Track Pe Audio Plug In Track 4 fly Track Noise Gate Track EG IZ Track Compressor fo Preset Untitled Z SONIC FOUNDRY Track Noise Gate f2 0 dE Attack time 0 to 500 ma ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS CHP 8 L 1 48 2 Click the Plug In Chain button 4 on the window The Plug In Chooser dialog appears Plug ins already in the chain appear at the top of the dialog Plug ins already contained in Plug In Chooser Track 4 the chain S Track Noe Gate Track EQ Track Compressor fo ae at Cancel 5 weas FX Aea amp Fa _ FX Packages ty Sonic Foundry Amplitude Modulation Y Sonic Foundry Chorus Y Sonic Foundry Distortion Y Sonic Foundry Dither Y Sonic Foundry Express Amplitude Modulation k H LT FX Packages R L Track Optimized Fx Remove Save Ag ee ee 0 3 Select a plug in and click the Add button 4 Repeat step 3 to add as many plug ins as you need to create the desired effect 5 Click OK to save the track s plug in chain and close the Plug in Chooser dialog The plug in chain app
227. g a transition to the cut from the Transitions window The duration of the newly inserted transition event is determined by the Cut to overlap conversion time set in the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog To access this dialog choose Preferences from the Options menu This event s media is After the conversion both events are longer than the trim Cut longer and extend into the transition This event s media extends before the beginning ty Note There must be enough media in the respective events to cover the transition e g the end of the first event must not be the end of the media file ps Cuts between audio events can also be converted to crossfades Position the timeline cursor on the cut and press on the numeric keypad to create a crossfade There must be enough media on either side of the cut to create the crossfade CHP 14 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION Previewing a transition The easiest way to preview a transition is to set the preview area to the duration of the transition and then loop the playback You can then adjust the transition while it is playing quickly making your changes in real time 1 Double click the transition This automatically creates a time selection equal to the length of the transition 00 00 04 29 0000 0823 2 Click the Loop Playback button 29 1 to toggle automatically repeated playback The selection area bar is dark blue when Loop is turned on 3 Click the Play bu
228. g the Save As and Render As functions In addition you will find reference information for the rendering options available in Vegas This chapter also describes the different options for delivering your projects such as printing to DV tape burning a Video CD or burning a multimedia CD Using custom settings to render to streaming media formats is available only in Vegas Video Printing to tape from the timeline and CD burning are only available in Vegas Video Saving a project A project in Vegas is saved as a small VEG file This file contains all of the information Vegas needs to recreate your project source file locations trimming track and bus plug ins volume and panning envelopes bus assignments assignable effects settings etc This is not the same as creating a final media file which is done with the Render As command Vegas also provides the option of saving a project as an Save AE HE Edit Decision List EDL For more information see eae Creating an EDL on page 188 CD Audio Sample Projects 1 Click the Save button 271 The first time a project is eee saved the Save As dialog appears In subsequent saves the Save As dialog is bypassed your existing file name is retained and your project is updated to include any changes Filename Untitled veg 2 Select Vegas Project File veg from the Save as type list Save as type Vegas Project File T veo z Cesl default N T Copy and trim media with project
229. g with zero Time hh mm ss sss Seconds sssss sss to three decimal places Time amp Frames hh mm ss ff Absolute Frames frames are numbered starting with O Measures amp Beats measures beats ticks where 64 ticks 1 beat Feet amp Frames 16mm 40 fpf feet frames where 40 frames 1 foot Feet amp Frames 35mm 16 fpf feet frames where 16 frames 1 foot SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps hh mm ss ff SMPTE EBU 25 fps Video hh mm ss ff SMPTE Non Drop 29 97 fps Video hh mm ss ff SMPTE Drop 29 97 fps Video hh mm ss ff SMPTE 30 30 fps Audio hh mm ss ff Audio CD Time 75 fps hh mm ss or hh mm ss ff when zoomed in tightly Editing the ruler offset The ruler doesn t necessarily need to start with zero at the far left side You can enter an offset to change the orientation of the ruler in a project One use of this is to create a lead in into a project A five second offset would mean that the ruler would start at 5 seconds and would be at 0 five seconds into the project 1 Position the cursor to the desired location along the timeline 00 00 00 00 aa ee l dl d 2 Right click the ruler and choose Set Time at Cursor from the shortcut menu The current ruler value is highlighted 3 Enter a time value 4 Press to set the rulers time The value that you enter at the cursor s position affects the entire ruler Changing grid spacing Grid spacing is different from the ruler and provides an alternate method o
230. ge 2 Click the Save Timeline Snapshot to File button H1 on the Video Preview window The Image Filename dialog appears 3 Select a file format JPEG or PNG and enter a name for the new still image file 4 Click Save The image is added to the Media Pool CHP 12 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 192 gt Creating a slide show A slide show composed of still images and an accompanying soundtrack can be an excellent way to show off your pictures Multiple images can be inserted to instantly create a slide show complete with crossfades Importing high resolution still images and using panning cropping and track motion tools can add interest to an otherwise static slide show For more information see Cropping video on page 177 and Adding track motion on page 223 1 In the Options menu verify that Automatic Crossfades is selected 2 From the Options menu choose Preferences Adjust the following settings on the Editing tab e Enter the length for the still images in the New still image length box e Select Automatically overlap multiple selected media when added e Enter the length of the automatic overlap in the Amount box in the Cut to overlap conversion section of the dialog Preferences E x General Video Audio CD Settings Editing Synce Video Device New still image length seconds 5 000 149 frames at 29 970 fps Default time between CD tracks 2 00 M Automatically overlap multiple selec
231. ge as it is trimmed Slide trim both ends of event simultaneously Slide Crossfade move crossfade Keys Alt drag inside the event Alt drag edge of event Ctrl Alt drag middle of event Ctrl Alt drag over a crossfade Event selection commands These commands apply to selecting events Description Range selection Multiple selection Select all Unselect all Select all events in group INTRODUCTION Keys Shift click range of objects Ctrl click individual objects Ctrl A Ctrl Shift A Shift G Description Move selected event s right by the first selected event s length Move selected event s left by the first selected event s length Move selected event s up one track Move selected event s down one track Select next take Select previous take Description Trim Adjacent trim selected event and adjacent event simultaneously Stretch compress the media in the event while trimming Open in audio editor Keys Ctrl Alt Right Arrow numeric keypad 6 Ctrl Alt Left Arrow numeric keypad 4 Up Arrow numeric keypad 8 Down Arrow numeric keypad 2 T Shift T Keys Ctrl Alt drag edge of event Ctrl drag edge of event Ctrl E CHP 1 r 31 Track commands These commands refer to editing functions related to the tracks in your project Description Keys Description Keys New audio track Ctrl Q Group selected events G New video track Ctrl Shift Q Remove event s from group U Enable
232. ges for DV pixel aspect ratios on page 181 Make the default canvas background color a solid color The background will be transparent in the final image so any solid color works 3 Select the Text tool and enter the text for your title p a Note Size and position your titles carefully to fit within the Title Safe Area or the titles may extend beyond the edges of your television For more information see Identifying safe areas on page 232 a 4 From the File menu choose Save As 5 From the Save as type drop down list choose TGA PNG PSD or BMP PNG is recommended Make sure that you save the alpha channel information for TGA and PNG which is used for transparency 6 Enter a name and click Save 7 In Vegas insert the image in a track just above the one with the video that will be in the background 8 Click the Compositing Mode button on the title track and choose Source Alpha default if your image has an alpha channel associated with it If it does not you may need to add a Chromakey filter to the image and key out the background For more information see Chromakeying on page 208 Video Preview 00 00 03 05 das 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 29 00 00 01 29 T eb Akp Preview Quality A g A J Title H k Q I o g ap Level 100 0 My Z Background amp 4 k 50 7 o te p Level 100 0 Ty las P Project 72048032 29 971 Frame 95 Preview 360424032
233. ghly classified as any plug ins that output a different amount of time than what goes in This includes all plug ins such as time compress expand gapper snipper and pitch shift without preserving duration However these types of effects plug ins may perform suitably as bus effects but only if just one bus is used in the project Plug ins that require a lot of pre buffering such as Sonic Foundry Acoustic Mirror when using long impulse files may also perform poorly Also make certain that the plug ins you use in Vegas are DirectX plug ins and not DXi plug ins DXi plug ins are not supported in Vegas and do not perform properly Why do I hear gaps in my audio playback Check to see if any Vegas updates have been posted on the Sonic Foundry Web site http www sonicfoundry com Go to the Download page and click Updates to access the Updates page Any updates to Vegas are posted at this location If software updates do not address the playback problem check these other reasons that your audio playback can gap Playing back too many tracks simultaneously can overload your hard drives Not enough physical RAM can cause Windows to use virtual memory which is slower Your CPU may not be able to process a complex mix of plug ins Problematic video card settings For more information see Trouble free video hardware solutions on page 265 The following are some things you can check and do to make sure your system is optimized to prevent gap
234. ght click the keyframe controller at the position where you want to paste the keyframe 4 From the shortcut menu choose Paste Duplicating keyframes 1 Right click and drag a keyframe to a new position 2 From the shortcut menu choose Copy A duplicate keyframe is created at the new position You can also duplicate a keyframe by holding the key while dragging it ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 14 L 217 Changing the interpolation curve You can right click a keyframe to choose a different shape for the interpolation curve The shortcut menu provides five options Hold Linear Fast Slow and Smooth Selecting Hold from the shortcut menu prevents any animation from being interpolated between two keyframes The color of the keyframe indicates which interpolation curve is being used Hold red 00 00 00 00 00 00 09 23 00 00 19 23 Cut Chrl SO oe eee Aaa es ope eCity be ee be Paste Ctrl V 00 00 14 11 we Linear gray Fast green Delete Delete Slow gold Linear a Fast Slow Smooth OOOO Smooth lilac Changing the relative spacing of keyframes The relative positions of the keyframes can be changed as a group This can be useful if you need to change the overall length of an animated sequence or if you need to copy a set of keyframes to another event that has a different duration than the original 1 Hold the key and click the first and last keyframes in the sequence to select all
235. ght colors Color are used for glow effects but you can emphasize bright text on complex Picker backgrounds by using a very small black glow with little or no CHP 14 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION ee Creating a picture in picture effect Picture in picture is an easy effect to reproduce using track motion This effect is used in the tutorial at the beginning of this manual For more information see 8 Track Motion 08_trackmotion veg on page 55 Track motion is also used in one of the sample projects included on the Vegas CD For more information see Track motion on page 62 1 Insert the background video into a track 2 Insert the overlay video into another track just above the background video track 3 Click the Track Motion button on the upper overlay track 4 In the Track Motion window position and resize the track area The illustration below shows some of the relevant parts of this procedure Note the shadow cast by the overlay video This is added by selecting the Shadow check box on the keyframe controller The Video Preview window displays the results Track Motion Track Motion Track 3 Preset Untitled J J yx 0 0 D 720 aaa es J lt r a Er sie J HE epee ted Smoothness ST 100 0 ef 1 Magnify view gt T F R 32 5 z 4 a l Grid density 8 j o fi 6 X i Note While overlay picture in picture windows are often completely opaque you can
236. gion or press R 3 Type a name for the region and press Enter If you do not want to name the region simply press Enter Region markers display at the beginning and end points of a time selection Region start Region end Right click the marker bar voiceover Cy Loop Playback U D U Mew section 3 L Marker bar a Set Selection to wiew Set Selection to Project Select Loop Region Shift Markers Regions Insert Marker M Selectively Prerender Video Shift h Clean Up Prerendered Video Delete Al Delete Al th Selector Moving regions Drag a region marker to reposition it To move both region markers start and end markers at once hold while dragging a region marker Naming regions 1 Place the mouse pointer on the left region marker you want to name or rename The pointer changes to a hand icon d 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Rename A text box appears next to the region EEE marker e a i introduction 4 Type the region s name 5 Press or click anywhere in the track view to set the name Selecting regions You may select the events across all tracks within the region for editing or playing back 1 Right click one of the region markers to display a shortcut menu Selected region GoTo Goto End Select Region Rename 2 From the shortcut menu choose Select Region _ 4 Note You can also select a region by press
237. grounds Transitions Yideo FX CHP 1 CHP 1 27 Text Backgrounds window Alt 9 The Text Backgrounds window contains the different media generators provided in Vegas Media generators make it easy to create events containing text credit rolls test patterns color gradients and solid color backgrounds You can drag a media generator to the timeline to create a new generated media event For more information see Using generated media on page 198 Test Pattern Text Legacy Plug In Te Legacy Plug In Wid Timed Fade on Black Scrolling on Transparent The Tert The Tert tertre Tre a bes Timed oor In Out on Blue Scrolling Left Side on Semi Black Timed Scroll Right on Frosty White ann ann nn RT i RS Timed Wipe In Out Backward Scrolling Media Pool Transitions Video FX Text Backgrounds lt j Plug Ins window Ctrl Alt 1 This window organizes all of the plug ins available in Vegas including video and audio effects media generators and transitions The plug ins which are organized in a folder structure can be dragged into the project For more information see Using audio effects on page 143 or Using video effects on page 193 ie 12 e T _ FX Packages lv Sonic Foundry Flange ah wah ty Sonic Foundry Amplitude Modulation FS onic Foundry GapperSnipper E Y Sonic Foundry Chorus HK Sonic Foundry G
238. gs display 3 Double click a setting to edit it e Position Adjust the track starting position or index position e End Adjust the track ending position e Length Adjust the track length e Name Enter the name of the track or index e Copy protection Determine whether or not a track may be copied from the final disc e Emphasis Enable a simple noise reduction process that is implemented by a CD player For more information see Emphasis on page 276 e ISRC Enter ISRC number if used Copying a track list from the Edit Details window You can use the Edit Details window to copy your track list and paste it into another application 1 Click the gray box in the upper left corner of the Edit Edit Detaile Details window to select all the cells Show Audio CD Track List gt a fields i x 2 Press Ctrl C to copy the cells 3 Switch to another application and paste the information into a document or spreadsheet Burning CDs T CD burning is only available in Vegas Video You can burn either single tracks track at once or the entire disc disc at once Burning single tracks You can burn your Vegas project as a single track Once you have burned all your tracks to the CD you must close the disc before it can be played Burning a track at once CD Create CD E x 1 From the Tools menu choose Burn CD and choose 7 E E ees Track at Once Audio CD from the submenu The Create R R CD dialo appear
239. h of the cells to specify the command type 4 In the third column enter the text that you want to display as a closed caption Enter each line in its own cell _ 4 Note If you have a script you can copy and paste individual lines into the cells oN 5 In the fourth column enter a label to identify your captions An entry such as Line 001 can help you sort the captions once you paste them into Vegas 4 00 00 00 00 TEXT But soft What light through yonder window breaks Line O01 2 00 00 00 00 TEXT tis the east and Juliet is the sun Line 002 3 00 00 00 00 TEST Arise fair sun and kill the envious moon Line 003 4 00 00 00 00 TEXT ho is already sick and pale with grief Line 004 1S 00 00 00 00 TEXT That thou her maid art far more fair than she Line 005 6 00 00 00 00 TEXT Be not her maid since she is envious Line O06 7 00 00 00 00 TEXT Her vestal livery is but sick and green Line 007 8 00 00 00 00 TEXT And none but fools do wear it cast it off Line OOS 9 00 00 00 00 TEXT Itis my lady O it is my love Line O09 10 00 00 00 00 TEXT 0 that she knew she were Line O10 11 00 00 00 00 TEST Line 011 eE Note The final caption displays in the Windows Media Player until the end of the video To clear the final caption sooner add a final command with no text as shown above SS eee CHP 12 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 186 p Copying and pasting captions into Vegas 1 Select the cells
240. have one track of breaking glass The track is then indexed to allow navigation to a specific glass breaking effect within the track However be aware that not all CD players allow navigation to indices Tracks and indices are identified in a track list which is a chronological text list of all tracks and indices defined in the audio CD project CHP 11 BURNING AUDIO CDS 170 n Setting up to burn audio CDs CD burning is only available in Vegas Video You can adjust the Vegas environment to help you work on audio CD layout projects You can set the project properties and adjust Vegas preferences to better accommodate writing audio CDs Vegas sets up the ruler and Time Display window for you automatically Viewing the ruler and time display Vegas automatically changes the ruler and Time Display window to audio CD time for you when CD tracks are marked Audio CD time formats are as follows Display Format Ruler hh mm ss hours minutes seconds or hh mm ss ff hours minutes seconds frames with fps 75 when zoomed in tightly Time Display window tt mmi ss ff track number minutes seconds frames with fps 75 Setting project properties Click the Properties button l on the toolbar to access project properties On the Audio CD tab you can set the Universal Product Code Media Catalog Number UPC MCN or set the number for the first track on the CD For more information see Audio CD tab on page 256 Setting preferences F
241. he Media Pool window click the Open Video Capture button The Sonic Foundry Video Capture application starts ee Note If your video camera is properly connected the Video Preview window in the center of the application area should display Device connected ee 3 Capture your video For information on how to capture video with Sonic Foundry Video Capture click the Help menu within the Video Capture application and choose Contents and Index The Video Capture online help file displays Once you have captured your video the file s are added to the Media Pool window If any captured clips go offline you can recapture the clips using Video Capture Right click an offline file in the Media Pool and choose Recapture from the shortcut menu Getting images You can bring images directly into Vegas from your scanner digital camera or other TWAIN device Vegas adds the images to the Media Pool as JPEG image files 1 Make sure your device scanner or digital camera is on and connected to your computer 2 In the Media Pool window click the Get Photo button 15 Vegas starts the software for the device 3 Use the device software to get an image and send it to Vegas sl Once the image has been sent the Scanned Files dialog C Program Files Sonic FoundnytWegas 3 0 appears S e Click Rename to give the new image a more meaningful name e Click Delete to cancel the process of adding the image 4 Click Done The
242. he ordering of multi byte data that is used by a computer s microprocessor Little Endian specifies that data is stored in a low to high byte format this ordering is used by the Intel microprocessors Big Endian specifies that data is stored in a high to low byte format this ordering is used by the Motorola microprocessors Envelopes Audio and Video Envelopes as used by Vegas are a way of automating the change of a certain parameter over time In the case of Volume you can create a fade out which requires a change over time by adding an envelope and creating an extra point to the line that indicates where the fade starts Next you pull the end point of the envelope down to infinity For more information see Working with track envelopes on page 137 Equalization EQ The process by which certain frequency bands are raised or lowered in level EQ has various uses The most common use in Vegas is to simply adjust the subjective timbrel qualities of a sound Event Media files that have been dragged onto the timeline in Vegas are referred to as events An event is actually a window into a media file and is a reference or pointer to the file It can display all or part of a media file and can be edited without altering the source media nondestructive File Format A file format specifies the way in which data is stored on your floppy disks or hard drive In Windows for example the most common audio file format is the Microsoft WAV
243. he timeline from within Vegas or by mixing the entire project to a preview file Using playback from within Vegas The transport bar allows you to play back your entire project or portions of your project based on a time selection or the current cursor position L Play T G GU e SE lt a gt gt U EI K 2 ald Play from Pause culsor start to start If your project includes video make sure the Video Preview window is displayed for playback from the View menu choose Video Preview or press Alt 6 Playing an entire project 1 Click the Play From Start button 1 to begin playback at the beginning of the project 2 Click the Stop button to stop playback Most of the time you will only want to preview a small portion of the project to perfect a section This can be done by creating a time selection Playing a time selection 1 Place the mouse pointer above the ruler on the marker bar The Loop bar mouse pointer changes to include a left right arrow cursor 2 Drag to select the time region To increase or decrease the time aan L selection drag its start and end points The time selection is highlighted and the Loop bar appears above the ruler on the timeline 3 Click the Play button 1 to begin playback Only the non muted tracks and events within the time selection play back 4 Click the Loop Playback button 251 to continually play back the events within the time selection Cl
244. he track Left is 100 transparent and right is 100 opaque You can also double click the label to enter a specific numeric percentage D Compositing Determines how the transparency in a video track is generated For more information mode see Selecting compositing modes on page 200 CHP 3 GETTING STARTED Jj Audio track header Eni Musicbed o Ea S Vol 0 0 08 T TT WANE Button or Control Name Musicbhed El e la E A Track number type and color Minimize track height Maximize track height Restore track height Track name scribble strip Bus assignment Arm for record Invert Track Phase Track FX Mute Solo Vet 0 008 Volume fader Pan Center lt GETTING STARTED Multipurpose slider Description The icon identifies whether this is an audio track or video track Track numbers and colors help organize a multitrack project For more information see Managing tracks on page 131 Minimizes track height For more information see Changing track height on page Tad Maximizes track height For more information see Changing track height on page ICG A Restores track height For more information see Changing track height on page 133 Allows you name a track To name a track double click the scribble strip and type the track s name For more information see Naming or renaming a track on page 132 Assigns an audio track to a specific output bus Thi
245. he track height eee WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 L 1 35 Adjusting stereo panning When you choose Pan from the multipurpose slider button the slider controls the position of a track in the stereo field Vegas audio tracks are preset to center the signal Move the slider to adjust the signal s output left or right As you move the slider Vegas displays the signal s percentage going to either the left or right channel For example moving the slider to 60 L means that sixty percent of the signal is mixed to the left channel while forty percent is mixed to the right You can further control the panning by right clicking the multipurpose slider and selecting an option from the shortcut menu e Add Channels The Add Channels panning model is most useful for panning stereo source material This model makes the stereo image appear to move as a unit between the speakers As the fader is moved from the center to a side more and more of the signal from the opposite side is folded into the side you are panning towards until at the extreme both channels are fed at full intensity into a single channel This panning model uses a linear panning curve e Balance The Balance panning model is most useful for adjusting the relative signal levels of the right and left channels in stereo source material In this model moving from the center to a side the opposite side starts at a base dB level either O dB 3 dB or 6 dB and decays to no sig
246. headers of the instrumental tracks to see p the panning settings For more information see Using the multipurpose slider audio only on page 134 Audio event envelopes 00 00 00 00 EST B Guitar Melody 4 E 4 EEEE edd ed GeO ek ed TTT H I H IIT HHR Events on tracks 4 9 12 and 13 fade out using audio event envelopes For more information see Using audio event envelopes ASR on page 125 EST B Percussion Da ik Bd D vol 25dE ma T Barr 12 L lae Volume envelopes Tracks 7 and 8 use volume envelopes to control volume levels over time For more information see Adding track envelopes on page 137 Tracks routed to busses The instrumental tracks are organized by type guitar strum guitar rhythm guitar melody bass and percussion and routed to busses This allows you to adjust the volume or to apply effects to multiple tracks at once For more information see Assigning audio tracks to busses on page 155 Mixer 44 100 Hz 16 bit Audio Properties CE Insert PX Insert Bus B Ahythrne Ld Melodies Dl Pec ENBas or E peA Plea Plro se loo elo 0 7 3 0 19 8 21 0 21 6 14 6 12 1 34 r3 95 r3 12 3 F 2 F 2 F 2 3 F 2 F Sl Fl ed 2 Fl 15 SIS IS 15 IS 21 21 PS 21 21 PS par pan aT ef 33 33 33 33 33 34 34 34 34 Pers 45 45 45 45 45 51 51 51 51 pa on on on on S oo of amp an o Soa Ja S Ai Ai 47 of og Bus effects
247. hen the powderskier event begins This means that it overlaps the implosion event by approximately two seconds and an automatic crossfade is created 4 Click the track number on the left side of the new introduction track and drag the track to the top of the timeline above the Talkinghead track This is necessary if the logos are to appear as overlays on top of other video events 5 Double click the scribble strip on the new track and name the track Introduction The first track in the project now contains the introductory splash and logo Like the talkinghead event that appears on top of the background video the introduction also appears over all lower tracks D Introduction Sy ath 1 PR Takinghead Gg ik E 7 D qp Level 100 0 dll B El Voiceover G do i I Ovo OOd Pan Cener l Inserting the overlay logo We will add a corporate logo to complete the introductory sequence 1 Drag the corporate_logo png to a new track at the bottom of the timeline 2 Double click the scribble strip on the new track and name the track Overlay 3 Drag the track header of the new Overlay track to the very top of the timeline so that the Overlay track is track one the Introduction track is track two and the Talkinghead track is track three 4 Position the corporate_logo event so that it also ends where the powderskier event begins 5 The default duration for an image event is five seconds Drag the left edge of the
248. her events in a group Dragging one event in a group moves all events in the group WORKING WITH EVENTS CHP 6 L 1 20 Creating a new group Grouping is useful when you want to preserve timing of events and move them together along the timeline 1 Select the events you want to group Press Ctrl Shift or use the Selection Edit tool F1 to select them For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 84 2 From the Edit menu choose Group to display a submenu and then choose Create New Adding an event to an existing group 1 Select an event in the existing group 2 Right click the event and choose Group Choose Select All from the submenu to select all of the members of the group 3 Press and click the event to be added to the group 4 Right click the event and choose Group Choose Create New from the submenu ee Note Events can only be in one group at a time Adding an event to an existing group essentially deletes the old group and creates a new one that includes all of the selected events ee Removing events from a group Individual events may be removed from a group without affecting the other members of the group The event you are removing from the group is not deleted from the project and remains on the timeline 1 Right click the event you want to remove from the group 2 From the shortcut menu choose Group and then choose Remove From on the submenu The event is removed from
249. hoose Delete Active to immediately remove the active take or choose Delete to open a dialog with a list of all of the takes contained in this event Working with take names Displaying take names on events Take names may be displayed on the events in the timeline 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog ae ae appears 2 On the General tab select the Show active take name in events check Before preference After preference box to enable it is enabled is enabled 3 Click OK ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 5 L 1 1 B Changing take names Changing the name of a take does not affect the source media file in any way Typically you may want to change an event s name after recording multiple takes into a track or event For more information see Working with multiple recorded takes on page 165 1 Select the take to be renamed For more information see Selecting takes on page 113 2 Right click the event to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Properties The Properties dialog opens 4 Type the new name in the Active take name box 5 Click OK to set the new take name Using the Trimmer window The Trimmer allows you to work with and edit one media file at a time The entire file is opened into the Trimmer in contrast to events on the timeline that may only contain a portion of the actual source file The main function of the Trimmer window is to allow you to trim a media file
250. how how a movie is progressing but it does not actually render your movie as it will appear in its final form The preview you see in the Video Preview window may be different from your final movie in a number of ways frame size frame rate and quality In most cases the Video Preview is all you need for checking the timing of events in your project Eventually however you may need to output a full quality preview of a section of your project To do this from the Tools menu choose Selectively Prerender Video For more information see Prerendering video on page 231 CHP 3 GETTING STARTED 82 yz Rendering a Vegas project Rendering refers to the process of creating a new media file from a Vegas project The project file is not affected overwritten deleted or altered during the rendering process You may return to the original project to make edits or adjustments and render it again The following table describes the formats available for rendering your Vegas project Format Name Extension Definition Audio Interchange File Format aif The standard audio file format used on Macintosh computers MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 mpg Vegas Video supports MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 file creation through the use of MainConcept MPEG technology MPEG Layer 3 mp3 Compressed audio format You may render up to 20 mp3 files without registering the optional plug in OggVorbis Ogg A patent free audio encoding and streaming technology QuickTime MOv Apple QuickTim
251. ick the button again to toggle this feature off 5 Click the Stop button to stop playback By looping the playback you can repeatedly watch the same section of the project over and over as you make changes to filters and effects in real time Selection areas can be quickly defined automatically depending on what you would like to preview For more information see Selecting a time range on page 85 and Time selection commands on page 29 CHP 3 GETTING STARTED 80 r Playback reference The following table describes all the transport bar buttons and their keyboard equivalents You may use these playback functions at any time while working in your project A 4 Note Vegas also supports the use of many multimedia keyboards for controlling playback E N Button Keyboard Function trl R Begin recording into record enabled tracks B Turn on off loop playback during time selection playback AES 3 hift Space Begin playback from the start of the project pace Begin playback from cursor position Pause playback cursor stops and holds at pause position el or Esc Stop playback cursor stops and returns to prior cursor position me Place cursor at the beginning of project f O Place cursor at the end of the project LF eeyyie e QII QII U BIENE Q m Q ee gt Note You can use the Spacebar to stop or pause playback depending on your preference From the Options menu choose Preferences and on
252. ickly determine the behavior of the plug in There are also a number of plug in controls to customize the effect Any custom configurations can be saved to a new preset 1 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button 48 The appropriate FX window Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX appears In the plug in chain at the top of the window click the plug in you want to customize Set the controls for the effect Enter a preset name in the drop down list Click the Save button H Qn A W N to save the preset Note You may delete any presets that you have saved by selecting it from the list and clicking the Delete button X NK Arranging the order of plug ins Plug ins are cumulative during playback Because of this cumulative effect you may need to arrange plug ins in a certain order so that one plug in s processing does not adversely affect the next plug in on the chain There is no right or wrong way to order plug ins but some plug ins work better when arranged in a particular order Arranging the plug in order in the FX window 1 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button 4 The appropriate FX window Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX appears 2 On the plug in that you want to move right click to display a shortcut menu and choose Move Left or Move Right Alternately drag a plug in to a new position Audio Plug In Track 4 h oie ofl Track Hose Gate Track en Lit Track Cra
253. iew Time selection commands Description Keys Move left to marker s Ctrl Left Arrow Move right to marker s Ctrl Right Arrow Move left to event edit Ctrl Alt Left Arrow points including fade edges Move right to event edit Ctrl Alt Right Arrow points including fade edges Nudge cursor on timeline Move one frame Jump to next audio CD track Period region or index Jump to previous audio CD track region or index Comma Left or Right Arrow Alt Left or Right Arrow Jump to next audio CD track Ctrl Period region Jump to previous audio CD track region These commands refer to creating time selections or preview ranges ee 4 Note Many of the preceding cursor placement commands when combined with the Shift key are also selection commands rnn n Description Snap select to event edge Select loop region Recover previous selection areas Select left by grid marks Select right by grid marks Mark in out locations Create time selection while dragging on an event Expand selection one frame Select to next audio CD track marker Select to previous audio CD track marker Keys Ctrl Shift Alt Left or Right Arrow Shift Q Backspace Shift Page Up Shift Page Down I in and O out Ctrl Shift drag with mouse Shift Alt Left or Right Arrow Shift period Shift comma Ctrl Comma Keys Shift Up Arrow Shift Down Arrow Ctrl Up Arrow Ctrl Down Arrow Enter location for end of selection Ctrl Shift G V
254. iew commands These commands refer to magnification in the timeline and minimizing maximizing different areas of the window Description Keys Description Increase track height Ctrl Shift Up Arrow Zoom in on audio waveforms Decrease track height Ctrl Shift Down Arrow Zoom out on audio waveforms Minimize all tracks l Zoom in Set track height smaller Shift Zoom out Set track heights to default size Ctrl Zoom in time incremental Up Arrow Zoom in time until each thumbnail Alt Up Arrow represents one frame Zoom out time incremental Down Arrow Show hide window docking area Show hide track header area Show hide window docking area and track header area F11 Shift F1 1 Ctrl F11 INTRODUCTION 3j Event commands These commandes apply to selected events Description Move selected event s right one pixel Move selected event s left one pixel Move selected event s right on grid Move selected event s left on grid Move selected event s right by the project frame period Move selected event s left by the project frame period Keys Right Arrow numeric keypad 6 Left Arrow numeric keypad 4 Ctrl Right Arrow numeric keypad 6 Ctrl Left Arrow numeric keypad 4 Alt Right Arrow numeric keypad 6 Alt Left Arrow numeric keypad 4 Event editing commands These commandes apply to event editing Description Slip move media within event without moving the event Slip Trim move the media with the ed
255. ile DUBBED The event on the timeline 00 00 00 09 00 00 00 08 l 00 00 00 07 I T 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 05 I ee 00 00 00 06 Slipping the event two frames to the right 00 00 00 09 00 00 00 04 0000 00 05 tu 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 07 0000 00 08 Slip trimming the event 00000004 E 00 00 00 00 00 04 two frames to the right T Sliding the event two 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 09 frames to the right Deleting events Deleting an event removes it from its track Multiple events can be deleted and time selections can be used to modify the process Ripple editing also applies to delete actions Deleting operates exactly like a cutting operation but the removed information is not placed on the Clipboard For more information see Cutting events on page 88 1 Select the events to be deleted 2 Press Delete BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 Crossfading events Vegas allows you to crossfade between two events audio and Fade in video on the same track For audio events crossfading fades volume tine out one audio event s volume while another event s volume fades in For video events crossfading creates a transition Fade out volume line between two events one fading out while the other fades in Lines appear indicating how and when the event s volume or transparency is being affected Using automatic crossfades The automatic crossfa
256. ile in 8 bit audio the ratio is 48 dB However in practice this SNR is never achieved especially when using low end electronics Small Computer Systems Interface SCSI A standard interface protocol for connecting devices to your computer The SCSI bus can accept up to seven devices at a time including CD ROM drives hard drives and samplers Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE SMPTE timecode is used to synchronize time between devices The timecode is calculated in Hours Minutes Seconds Frames where Frames are fractions of a second based on the frame rate Typical frame rates for SMPTE timecode can be 24 25 29 97 or 30 frames per second depending on your local standards SMPTE Drop Frame Timecode A method of measuring time in video Drop frame involves skipping two frame numbers no frames are actually dropped every ten minutes to compensate for the difference between NTSC 29 97 fps video and 30 frame counts per second Tempo Tempo is the rhythmic rate of a musical composition usually specified in Beats Per Minute BPM Time Format The format by which Vegas displays the ruler and selection times These include Time Seconds Frames and all Standard SMPTE frame rates Time Signature See Beats per Measure APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 282 _ ____ Timecode For more information see Timecode on page 269 Track A discrete timeline for audio or video data
257. in eyed eee See Looping is off The elongated event repeats freezes the final frame L L ee ET Looping is on The entire event repeats Invert phase audio only This switch inverts the audio event at its baseline in effect reversing its polarity Inverting an event while creating no audible difference is occasionally useful for matching transitions when mixing audio on separate tracks or fine tuning a crossfade You can also phase invert a track If a track is inverted and you invert an event on the track the event is doubly inverted restored to its original state For more information see Phase inverting a track audio only on page 136 Normalize audio only You may normalize an event to maximize its volume based on the waveform s highest peak without clipping the event during playback F Selected event Selected event after before normalize normalize is applied Recalculating the normalization When you normalize an event Vegas analyzes the event and raises the volume based on the waveform s highest peak and then adjusts the rest of the event accordingly If you have adjusted the edge of an event to exclude the formerly highest waveform peak you may Highest peak used want to recalculate the event s normalization for recalculating the normalization Highest peak used for normalization before editing a lt i Event edited after normalization 1 Right click the event to di
258. ing Playback is mono and is centered between the two channels e Swap Exchanges the right and left channels stereo playback You can also pan from one channel to the other using either the multipurpose slider or a pan envelope For more information see Adjusting stereo panning on page 135 WORKING WITH EVENTS CHP 6 L 1 2 B Using audio event envelopes ASR You may apply envelopes to individual events Envelopes also known as ASRs attack sustain and release give you the ability to control an audio event s fade in fade out and overall volume level ee Note Event envelopes only affect an event Track envelopes affect the entire track For more information see Working with track envelopes on page 137 When you place an event into your project Vegas adds handles that are used to set the envelope As you use these handles on audio events a volume line appears indicating how the event is being affected The waveform also graphically displays the volume change B Envelope handles Audio event envelope Setting an audio event s volume When you place the mouse pointer at the top of the event the pointer changes to a hand cursor d that you may use to lower the event s overall volume 1 Place the mouse pointer at the top of the event urged Poa Volume line 2 When you see the envelope cursor t drag the volume line to the TP KEEP T desired level As you drag the volume line down V
259. ing a number on your keyboard not the numeric keypad or by double clicking a region marker eee aa BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L 1 023 Navigating to regions You can move the cursor to the start or end of a region by clicking either region marker You may press or gt to move the cursor to the next or previous region markers Right click a region marker to display a shortcut menu that allows you to navigate to the beginning Go to Start or the end Go to End of a region Deleting regions 1 Place the mouse pointer on the region marker s starting or ending point The pointer changes to a hand icon dh 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Delete The region is removed from your project Vegas does not renumber the tags as you remove them For example if you have five regions in your project and delete region 3 and 4 the remaining regions are listed at 1 2 and 5 However as you add regions again Vegas begins numbering the missing sequence first in this case 3 and 4 and then 6 7 8 etc Deleting all regions and markers 1 Right click the marker bar 2 From the shortcut menu choose Markers Regions 3 From the submenu choose Delete All Working with command markers Command markers add interactivity to a multimedia UL http sonifoundry cam presentation streamed over the Internet by inserting metadata into streaming media files As your video pl
260. ing busses 155 CD layout markers 173 markers 101 projects 67 238 tracks 132 Rendering 82 239 245 controls and templates 241 custom settings 241 file formats 82 240 to a new track 141 Reordering tracks 132 Resampling 187 188 at final render 187 243 event 123 127 187 Reversing a video event 128 Ripple editing 87 92 across all tracks 91 cutting events 88 Ruler 20 offset setting 252 project property settings 255 time formats 252 271 Ruler tab 255 Safe areas 232 Saving a project 40 66 237 239 autosaving 239 using Save As 67 238 with media files 238 Scott Studio commands 100 104 file format 67 240 Scribble strip 38 77 78 132 Scrolling 75 Scrubbing 80 81 keyboard 81 scrub control 22 80 timeline 80 Selecting all members of a group 129 INDEX vili e audio CD tracks 173 envelope points 140 events and a time range 86 events to the end of the track 85 erouped events 129 media files 67 multiple events 84 range of events 84 regions 102 takes 113 time range 85 SFAP files 267 Shadow 225 Signal flow 33 34 Simultaneous play and record 162 Single session CD burning 169 Slide show creating 182 Sliding crossfades 98 events 96 Slipping events 95 Slip trimming events 96 SMPTE timecode 269 changing 252 Snap offset 110 Snapping events 109 110 quantizing to frames 109 snap offset 110 to a selection
261. ing where someone goes through the movie and moves the crop area back and forth to follow the action or subject 1 Click the Event Pan Crop button t on the event The Event Pan Crop window appears 2 Confirm that the Stretch to fill frame check box is selected 3 Right click the selection area and choose Match Output Aspect from the shortcut menu 4 Select a starting position size and angle of rotation for the crop rectangle This is the start position first keyframe 5 Click in the keyframe controller and press Ctri End This moves the cursor to the end of the event 6 Click the Create Keyframe button A new keyframe appears in the keyframe controller at the end of the event 7 Change the position size and angle of rotation This is the final position last keyframe 8 Preview the event Add and adjust keyframes as needed to create the desired effect You can adjust both temporal and spatial interpolation for each keyframe e Temporal interpolation how the pan occurs over time is controlled by the keyframe interpolation curve type Experiment with temporal interpolation by right clicking a keyframe to change the interpolation curve type hold linear fast slow smooth and previewing the result For more information see Changing the interpolation curve on page 217 e Spatial interpolation how the pan occurs within the video image is controlled by the Smoothness setting of each keyframe If you have three
262. ings 244 still images 181 Placing media as takes 72 dragging dropping 71 multiple files 72 same track 72 separate tracks 72 Playback buffer control 259 event playback rate 124 interpolate cursor position control 259 keyboard shortcuts 28 position bias control 259 pre roll buffer control 259 scrubbing 80 transport bar controls 21 video 39 Plug in chain audio hierarchy 33 changing order 146 147 195 196 creating 144 194 INDEX saving presets 146 197 video hierarchy 34 Plug ins animating 198 audio 143 bypassing 147 196 keyframes 198 masks 203 media generators 198 ordering 146 195 removing 147 197 transitioning into 221 transitions 211 video 193 window 27 Post roll 164 PQ list See Track list Preference settings 256 262 Audio tab 258 Audio tab advanced settings 259 CD Settings tab 260 Editing tab 260 General tab 256 Sync tab 258 261 Sync tab advanced settings 261 Video device tab 262 Preparing video for broadcast out of range colors 233 safe areas 232 Preparing video for television DV format guidelines 189 190 Prerendering video 231 Pre roll 165 Preset chains 148 149 editing 148 organizing 149 saving from existing chains 148 Presets saving 146 197 214 Preview fader adjusting for clipping 155 adjusting volume 152 hiding viewing 152 meter resolution 152 Previews 79 in media players 81 optimizing 230 prerende
263. ings for custom effects You may also save custom settings to be used again as a new preset 1 Click the FX button i on the event track Media Pool file or Video Preview window that has the plug in applied to it The Video FX window appears 2 Select a preset from the Preset drop down list or adjust the parameters as needed For help on the different controls in the Video FX window click the Plug In Help button F to access online help Video Event Fes E T Video Event FX apital Dome amp Vid E FH E ID fly Film Effects Y Sepia IZ Add Noise fo Preset Low Quality Color Film ty Plug In Help SONIC FOUNDRY Film Effects Gan J ITB Tint j 0 350 Color S T Convert to greyscale Particle Settings Dust lt IZ Enabled Amount l IE poe EE 00 00 00 00 00 04 29 BID OD WISo gt Changes you make are automatically updated in the Video Preview window using the current cursor position as the example To see the effect as applied to the video in motion create a time selection looped region and preview in loop playback Saving custom plug in settings as a preset 1 Click the Preset text box The name of the current preset is highlighted 2 Type a new name for the preset and click the Save button 1 To use a saved custom preset simply choose it from the drop down list CHP 13 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS Using keyframe animation with plug ins Keyframe animation c
264. ion a track must be prepared for recording You may arm multiple tracks prior to recording 1 Click the Arm for Record button 311 in the track header The first time you arm a track to record in a project the Project Project Recorded Files Folder TS Recorded Files Folder dialog displays 2 Browse to the location where you want Vegas to save your recorded audio files 3 Click OK re a Note You can change the location where Vegas saves recorded files at any time For more information see Specifying where recordings are stored on page 166 ee Recorded files folder C PROGRAM FILESSSONIC FOUNDAYSVEGA Browse Free storage space in selected folder 3 293 4 Megabytes T Do not prompt for the record folder in new projects Cancel Once a track is armed a record meter appears on the track header Depending on your hardware a record gain fader may also appear z Emi Voiceover k z EKI V a R U D C N D aia R A 3 Val O fo Record AE 1 2 Pan Center L Arm the track first Track is ready for recording Track is ready for recording using the Sound Mapper from a specific device In addition one of two Record Device Selector buttons appears or 11 The button that appears is based on the Audio device type selected in the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog For more information see Audio tab on page 258 Button Description pi Stereo This button appears when Use Microsoft Sound Mapper has
265. ist and can be used for quick navigation Markers can be displayed in the Trimmer window for sound files that contain them but more often markers and regions are used at the project level to mark interesting places in the project Media Control Interface MCI A standard way for Windows programs to communicate with multimedia devices like sound cards and CD players If a device has a MCI device driver it can easily be controlled by most multimedia Windows software Media File A media file or multimedia file is any image audio or video file on a computer In Vegas you can browse for these files in the Explorer window You can drag media files to the timeline or insert them into the Media Pool Media files that have been dragged to the timeline are referred to as events Media Player A Microsoft Windows program that can play digital sounds or videos using MCI devices Media Player is useful for testing your sound card setup For example if you can t hear sound when using Vegas try using Media Player If you can t play sound using Media Player check the sound card s manual Please contact your sound card manufacturer before calling Technical Support at Sonic Foundry MIDI Clock A MIDI device specific timing reference It is not absolute time like MIDI timecode MTC instead it is a tempo dependent number of ticks per quarter note MIDI clock is convenient for synchronizing devices that need to do tempo changes mid son
266. ist for video For the most part these critical components do not affect the capture or playback of video This does not mean that a faster CPU or more RAM will not help because bigger and faster is always better CPU and RAM definitely impact rendering speeds Creating a final AVI file especially in a movie project that uses a lot of effects and transitions can take a long time A thirty minute movie could easily take six or more hours to render depending on the format and effects used CPU speed is also important for more advanced compression codecs such as MPEG and newer streaming formats TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX A 2067 Audio proxy files sfap0 Working with certain types of media files with particular audio compression schemes can be inefficient and slow To compensate for this Vegas creates audio proxy files for formats that are known to dramatically impact performance There are two cases where this occurs Multimedia video files often contain both video and audio information In certain formats these two streams can be packed together in such a way as to make editing slow and inefficient Vegas therefore takes the audio stream from these files e g type 1 DV QuickTime 4 and saves it to a separate and more manageable audio proxy file QuickTime 4 audio only files can also be compressed in a way that makes editing slower Vegas also uses audio proxy files in this situation as well While audio proxy files may be large because th
267. it is contained in an event 1 Move the cursor over the timeline 2 Press Ctrl Homd to place the cursor at the beginning of the project CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS 38 y 3 Double click the media file talkinghead avi in the Explorer window The video portion stream is placed on a video track and the audio portion stream is placed on an audio track at the cursor s position Track header Timeline 00 00 08 533 EJ CETE D Video track gp Level 100 0 dl F Audio track Scribble strip Empty portion of timeline track name Video event Audio event A media file on the timeline in Vegas is an event There are two events on the timeline for talkinghead avi a video event that serves as a window into the video stream of the media file and an audio event that serves as a window into the audio stream Edits that are made to either of these events do not affect the source media file talkinghead avi in any way Naming a track It is a good idea to label the tracks using the scribble strip on the track header 1 Double click the scribble strip on the track header of the video track 2 Type Talkinghead 3 Press Enter The new track name appears on the scribble strip Displaying a preview The Video Preview window shows a preview of your project To view the Video Preview window from the View menu make sure Video Preview is se
268. ition the Time Display window may be docked in the window docking area For more information see Window docking area on page 22 Changing the Time Display settings The Time Display window always reflects the ruler settings that are selected You may change the ruler settings via the Time Display window or vice versa For more information see Changing the ruler format on page page 1 Right click the Time Display window A shortcut menu appears 2 From the shortcut menu choose Time Format and choose the desired time format from the submenu Both the Time Display window and ruler display the chosen time format Changing the Time Display colors You may change the background color and text color used in the Time Display window 1 Right click the Time Display window to display the shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Text Color or Background Color The Time Display Color dialog appears 3 On the Color dialog choose the color setting that you want 4 Click OK to set the text or background color or click Cancel to keep the existing color settings and close the Color dialog n Note To return the Time Display window s text or background color to its default settings choose either Text Color or Background Color from the shortcut menu and then choose Default from the submenu oT CHP 17 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS 254 gt Setting the Time Display to monitor MIDI timecode The Time Display window can
269. itles creating 182 fading 184 safe areas 232 text generator 198 e IH Toolbar 19 Track envelopes 137 adding 137 adding points 138 changing fade curves 139 colors 137 deleting points 138 Envelope Edit Tool 140 hiding on track s 139 locking to events 141 moving points 138 removing from track s 139 types 137 Track FX button 77 78 Track header 21 77 78 Track list audio CD creating from events 172 editing in Edit Details window 174 exporting 174 Track motion 223 227 button 77 flipping 227 glow 225 keyframes 225 picture in picture effect 226 position 225 rotating 227 shadow 225 shortcut menu 224 workspace 224 Track name 77 78 changing 132 Track view 21 Track at once CD burning 169 174 Tracks 131 142 adding empty 131 arming for recording 78 assigning plug ins to 143 194 assigning to a bus 78 155 color changing 133 compositing modes 77 200 202 default properties 137 deleting 132 duplicating 131 height changing 133 making compositing child 77 203 mixing to a single track 141 multipurpose slider 78 muting 77 78 136 naming renaming 132 number 77 78 organizing 132 phase inverting 78 136 reordering 132 resizing 133 scribble strip 77 78 132 soloing 77 78 136 track effects 77 143 149 193 198 Track FX button 78 track keyframes 77 217 218 track layers 77 212 track motion 77 223 227 view buttons 77 78 vie
270. ive Take C F E 9 n HHHH gt ae Use the scroll bar to view other columns in the window Audio CD track list The Audio CD track list category displays information about the track and index markers placed on the CD layout bar Vegas uses this information to burn audio CDs For more information see Understanding tracks and indices on page 169 Commands The Commands category displays information about commands that are placed along the project s timeline This category displays four columns the command s position along the timeline the command type its parameters and any comments that were entered when the command marker was placed in your project Right click a command entry to display a shortcut menu For more information see Working with command markers on page 103 Events The Events category displays information about all of the events in your project You may sort any of the information by clicking a column s header The number of columns in the Events category requires that you use the scroll bar to view them all The following table explains each column in the Events category and describes its function Column Description Edit function Track Displays the track number where Move the event to a different location by entering a different track the event is located number pg 74 Start Displays when on the timeline the Enter a different value to cause the event to begin playback sooner or event starts playback
271. ject for later reference or to mark timing cues e Regions ranges of time that you mark along the timeline Regions identify ranges of time for your reference and can function as permanent time selections Command markers markers that enable metadata in streaming media files These markers can be used to display headlines or closed captions link to Web sites or perform any other function you define For more information see Adding closed captioning to Windows Media Video WMV files on page 184 In addition these markers can be used to embed Scott Studios data information which is used extensively in broadcasting The Sonic Foundry Web site http www sonicfoundry com has a number of metadata examples complete with source code e CD layout markers markers that indicate tracks and indices for an audio CD layout Vegas uses these marks to create tracks and index points when burning an audio CD For more information see Understanding tracks and indices on page 169 Working with markers Markers are useful for identifying and navigating to specific locations in longer projects As you place markers in your project Vegas automatically numbers them in the order that they are placed Markers appear as orange tags above the ruler You may name them and reposition them along the project s timeline Mark arkers Right click the marker bar Marker voiceover Loop Playback U aay mins iss bar 00 30 eae E Set Selection
272. k list You can also change track height by clicking the buttons 51 m on the track Action Button Resulting Track height Minimize Track Height Restore ey 2 L Soundtrack A g A Track Height B anale D 21 Soundtrack Pee Track Height D You can also use several different keyboard shortcuts to change all track heights at once Press Ctri Shift A or Ctrl Shift y to change the height of all tracks in your project at once Press to minimize all tracks Press the key again to restore the tracks to their previous height Press Tro make all tracks a uniform height slightly shorter than the default Press to make all tracks the default height Resizing a track Tracks can be resized by dragging the bottom or the right border Place the mouse pointer at the bottom of the track The pointer turns into an up down arrow Drag up or down and release the mouse to set the desired track size The width of the track header can be resized in a similar way Drag to change track height or to change track header width CHP 7 WORKING WITH TRACKS 134 r Using track headers Each track in your project has its own controls faders and sliders that are contained in the track header on the left side of the track You can work with these controls to affect the event s that are contained on the track Using the volume fader audio only This fader controls the volume of the events on a parti
273. k system but events are not mixed on the A B roll Instead either the A roll or the B roll is playing with the two trading places during a transition You could mix the two for as long as you want with a transition but they do not blend po without an intervening transition Transitions move from one roll and into Transition direction arrow the other This could be from A to Bor from Bto A The direction of the transition is automatically set by Vegas The small arrows on the side of the transition event indicate this direction ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 14 As the sequence at the right shows the video output can _ gt shift from the A to the Band back to A many times during a mmm production but there is only one video output from any particular roll at a time This means that the A and B rolls are not composited Converting a cut to a transition The transition between two events that are adjacent to each other on the same track is instantaneous and is called a cut If the first event is trimmed back from the end and the second event is trimmed back from the beginning both have enough media to overlap the cut can be transformed to a transition effect using this extra media 1 Right click the line between two adjacent events at the cut position 2 From the shortcut menu choose Transition and then choose the transition that you want to insert e g Insert Sonic Foundry Iris You can also dra
274. k the Track FX button on the track header to view the effect settings For more information see Using video effects on page 193 Event panning and cropping The four still image events use panning and cropping to create motion The markers indicate the motion generated for each event Click the Event Pan Crop button 1 on each event to view the settings In the Event Pan Crop window click each keyframe in the keyframe controller to view its settings Each event uses the Match Output Aspect and Stretch to fill frame options For more information see Cropping video on page 177 and Animating event panning and cropping on page 218 Event Pan Crop Event Pan Crop goldengate Preset Untitled lt IS E 726 Sat Center jana farsa Angle degrees joo S Smoothness ZT Pop g AASS Tose E ER E Magnify view ZT 26 1 T 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 23 Position ISK CP S Compositing with masks This project demonstrates a few simple examples of compositing using alpha channel masks Regions Regions mark the three sections of the project For more information see Adding project markers and regions on page 100 CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS 62 r Event cropping The fire events in track 2 have been cropped from the original media file Click the Event Pan Crop button on each event to see the cropping settings For more information see Cropping video on page 177
275. l af Flip z Text box Keyframe Controller Adding track motion The Track Motion window is used to move a video track across a background This background can be a solid color another video event or an image Picture in picture effects and scrolling title sequences are two simple cases where this tool is important The gray area in the center of the window covered by the blue gray rectangle represents the actual screen or area that is visible in the movie The area outside of the main screen which is filled with dotted lines is the general workspace The video you are moving can be positioned off of the visible screen and then animated onto and across the screen The dots are markers to help position the video window If snapping is enabled these serve as snap to points The main window allows you to control the placement size and CHP 14 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 224 orientation of the overlay video through time The blue and gray rectangular overlay in the middle represents the video on the track The large F is used to represent the orientation of the track and is especially useful in indicating a track that has been flipped Track Motion Track Motion Track 3 Preset Untitled E i Size loom Edit controls Normal Edit Tool LK 720 0 x 480 0 ow F ww le ow ow amp amp w amp amp f Zoom Edit Tool A Center Enable Snapping l RG S joo ted Smoothness S
276. l countries customerservice sonicfoundry com Technical Support For a detailed list of Technical Support options we encourage you to visit www sonicfoundry com support e To listen to your support options please call 608 256 5555 e Customers who have purchased the full version of Vegas Video or Vegas Audio receive 60 days of complimentary phone support The complimentary support begins when the product is registered Registration is required to received this complimentary support Please call 608 204 7704 if you need assistance with your product Sonic Foundry Inc 1617 Sherman Avenue Madison WI 53704 USA The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Sonic Foundry The software described in this manual is provided under the terms of a license agreement or non disclosure agreement The software license agreement specifies the terms and conditions for its lawful use No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use without written permission from Sonic Foundry Inc Sonic Foundry and Vegas are trademarks of Sonic Foundry Inc The brands and products named here are the trademarks or registered trademarks of Sonic Foundry its affiliates or their respective holders 1999 2002 Sonic Foundry Inc Table of Contents Iya erer e ie 4442402 s0Giuee 6 iam
277. l mgr water vee enviar el aka ae 131 D phcating aTa K oad bed nadudt new a dae dae c eee eee bad eee een eet eee 131 Dleta ACK a c S505 lt 2 15 alae Sey eL RR ee Sane RAR Sete eae E Reais 132 Naming or renaming a track a R 444 bey bee hve ee oon dah ek doe R es bean Ses 132 Organizmo Slo vc wasig e eawies toate Raat ee eee eeu eB te ee ee ae a 132 Ree alae ele i400 otcetpeee eked cee a e ete ees en roe ream Deed NEEE OAN 132 Changing tack color 2utiiwacte eras eens ee sett ae a ki kee Be ee Ge ioe kl Qe 133 Changing track height 2243422 be che ee ae ah ot aa Va a E a 133 Using track NCAGEIS wisi anes ae Oi eS WN A hw a a 134 Using the volume fader audio only 00 cece eee eee eee eee eens 134 Using the multipurpose slider audio only 000 e eects 134 Using the composite level slider video Only 0 ccc eee eee eee eee 135 Phase inverting a track audio Only 0 0 ce eee eee eens 136 AALE RT PACK ccm ct EEE EA EE E E eC Cech ee oes Oe eee tee See eee eee ee eee sues 136 Viuiting all a dio OF VIGGO TACKS 2 22 0 lt 556h0e lt e00b6 ee is dindan wake tein eeu sive Gee eee 136 SOONG Ca WaCk tatosnt ote eens See T Ga Goad Oe i eee bon ease eee ae 136 Setting default track properties ee ee eee 137 Working with track envelOpeS 0c cece eee eee eee eee eeeees 137 Adding track GNVElODES sn va cesses et eee Seat e a SS eee eee Raa ee oaks Mee Er EER Eare 137 Hiding track envelopes 10 212544
278. l multitrack This setup includes a digital multitrack recorder with an optional MIDI synchronization component Usually you would have a mixer a microphone etc connected to these components Your particular setup will vary depending on your equipment Refer to your components documentation for specific setup configurations Digital card MIDI card M ae S aa g f ag K a Digital N L Sync in multitrack The dashed line indicates an option if you are synching Vegas to tape viaa MIDI timecode MTC converter Synchronizing MIDI timecode Vegas can generate output MIDI timecode to synchronize external devices with project playback or can be triggered by MIDI timecode generated by an external device To output from the Options menu choose Timecode and from the submenu choose Generate MIDI Timecode To allow Vegas to be triggered by an external MIDI device choose Trigger from MIDI Timecode from the same submenu For more information see Triggering from MIDI timecode on page 165 and Sync tab on page 261 Preparing to record Before you record you must arm the tracks into which you will record the new audio You must also select the recording settings for the tracks You have the additional options of using a metronome or disabling playback during recording RECORDING AUDIO CHP 10 L 161 Arming the track for recording Whether recording into an existing track an empty track a selected event or a time select
279. l tour of the Vegas workspace ain window This is the window that appears when you open Vegas The work area is subdivided into three primary areas the track header the track view or timeline and the window docking area BRE Bonic Foundry Yegas Video 3 0 5 ampled veg File Edit View Insert Tools Options Help Menu bar Toolbar Marker bar Time display 00 01 36 10 Jo FED Overlay So Pecos D acai ae sei END bh aaa aa ee EEE nst laissa A Ruler vel T Saa TRT Le toes ke al C L f F 4 is F PJ Video H de B I D Level 100 0 LU KML Voiceover ot S J Track list ER Gv E FRENNEN arene Lual E YS TRER E HS T A A Sma Tas AA TER ST AT YIr TT A TE EA TEA R aT S anan RP RH OID a ren Sea La TT as sane seine 2 Sag eee ere Track view timeline FE Music D Vol 3 0 dB Scrub control Desktop Qe g My Computer atp O3 way ey 3 Floppy A lt d sunset avi as a talkinghead avi S traffic avi Window FullShot99 b m Clip 0041 d kin Sy Media oc g CD Audio Sample Proje area Vegas Projec ES L Mirror of Kevin s f 2 introtabla wav H My Documents Re introwarp wav G My Movies sa mountains avi H Program Files L musicbed wav Sbpci sar powderskier a
280. lays the project s properties pg 190 Properties Preview on External Sends the preview out to an external monitor This only functions if your DV hardware supports this Monitor feature pg 262 Video Output FX Opens the Video Output FX window for adding video effects plug ins for the entire project pg 193 Bypass All Video FX Bypasses all video effects at every level media event track project Preview Quality Changes the preview resolution for faster playback Overlays Options include safe areas grids individual channels and histograms Copy Snapshot Copies the contents of the frame to Windows Clipboard Save Timeline Saves the contents of the preview window as a JPEG or PNG The new image file is automatically Snapshot to File saved to the Media Pool pg 181 Using the Video Preview window shortcut menu Right click the Video Preview window to adjust the following options e Choose Default Background Black Background or White Background to set the background color for the window Display Square Pixels displays the output in square pixels This can prevent distortion of the preview when using sources with rectangular pixels This does not affect the final render Display at Project Size displays the output at the project s dimensions only Show Toolbar toggles the toolbar at the top of the window Show Status Bar toggles the information display at the bottom of the window Optimizing the Video Preview window Timing and syn
281. le For example during the rendering process the audio data is written in between the video data based on the frame setting that you specified Interleaving allows for optimal playback of the AVI file Keyframe every If the codec chosen in the Video format list supports compression keyframes select this option to set compression keyframes to adjust the quality of the compression More keyframes typically produce higher quality video but a larger file size and thus a higher data rate Data rate If the codec chosen in the Video format list supports a data rate ceiling select this option and enter a maximum data rate for the final file Render alpha channel If the codec chosen in the Video format list supports alpha channel transparency select this option to save this information with the file Create an OpenDML AVI version 2 0 compatible file Select this check box if you want to save your file as an OpenDML file OpenDML files allow you to create files that are limited in size only by the format of your hard disk 2GB using FAT32 or 4GB using NTFS Audio tab Audio format This lists the audio rendering codecs that are available Attributes If the codec chosen in the Audio format list supports it select the appropriate attributes for the codec from this list SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 16 a 2418 Sample rate The sample rate directly affects the audio s quality The sample rate is defined as the
282. lected Video Preview window in window docking area EE Ja Alax JR uer ae te Se 7 a Sk Godau H E Desktop a mountains avi il Master a2 J de l musicbed way narration 000 000 000 w64 ee 3 My Computer E 3 Floppy LA C Dell FullShot93 powderskier avi 94 a Rect tga 154 214 sunset avi 274 d Track 01 Am Rumba Off Beats 03 000 000 000 d Track 02 Am Rumba Off Beats 02 000 000 000 39 d Track 03 m Rumba Off Beats 01 000 000 000 Movies l L w S oe Video 320 240x24 15 000 fps 00 00 08 533 Cinepak L Audio 22 050 Hz 16 bit Stereo 00 00 08 533 Uncome LB 1 Proj 32024032 15 00 Fome 127 Explorer Trimmer Media Pod Transitions _ VideoFX Text Ba 4 2 oo oo Bere 320240432 15 00p Display 320 240K16 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS The Video Preview window can also be freely floated anywhere in the workspace Video Preview G d S Goday H S Project 320 240 32 15 00p Frame 127 Preview 320 240 32 15 00p Display 320 240 16 CHP 2 39 Playing back the video 1 Click the Play From Start button 1 on the transport bar to start playback from the beginning Transport bar Sla gt gt ujaji a 2 Click the Stop button to stop playback 3 Click the audio track s Mute button to mut
283. lete from the shortcut menu All envelope points may be deleted by selecting Reset All from the shortcut menu Moving envelope points Once the envelope points have been added you may raise and lower them to different levels along the timeline You may move one point at a time even during playback and check the results in real time Also you may set the type of fade curve after each envelope point 1 Place the mouse pointer on an envelope point The pointer changes to a hand icon Ja 2 Drag the point to the desired position As you move an envelope point a ToolTip displays both the point s location on the timeline and its decibel level percent pan Set one point at a time or use the Envelope tool to select and move multiple points at a time Al 3 Click the Play 1 or the Play From Start 1 buttons to play back the project and check the timing of the envelope A 4 Note You may also set the value of the point SA S lt pa l Set to 0 dB Or Set to 0 dB by right clicking an envelope point and Saou SE choosing a setting from the shortcut menu or inne choose Select All from the shortcut menu to raise or lower all points on the envelope l Eanes Reset All Reset All E N Set To Set To WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 139 Changing the envelope fade curves Between each envelope point you may set the type of fade curve linear fast slow smooth or sharp You can select either a point or a portion
284. losed all unnecessary applications by pressing Alt Delete selecting the individual applications and clicking the End Task button to close them Certain processes are required and should not cannot be terminated for example Explorer e Check your virtual memory Windows uses virtual memory when RAM is low This is a method for Windows to use the hard disk to create more memory and is sometimes called a swap disk If Windows tries to write to the swap disk during playback or capture this can interrupt the video software and cause problems Make sure that Windows is using a different disk drive for virtual memory other than the one from which you are capturing or playing your video If you have enough space force Windows to use C for virtual memory and use a physically distinct drive for capturing and playing back video e Make sure you have the latest drivers for your video card and capture card and the latest updates and patches to all relevant software One caveat to this is that you shouldn t try to fix a program that is working correctly Many times patches and updates fix relatively minor bugs that only affect a small number of users If you are not experiencing any problems it is probably best not to upgrade unless the manufacturer recommends it e Uncompressed video may be high quality but it results in very large files with very high data rates Selecting a more appropriate compression scheme codec will definitely improve the
285. low the lowest track the voiceover track A new track is created with the musicbed event on it Position the new musicbed event at the beginning of the project 3 Double click the scribble strip on the new track and name the track Musicbed 4 Click the Play button 1 to play the project Repositioning the voiceover and video The music bed is considerably longer than the voiceover portion of the project Eventually we will add video to fill out the project If you were creating this project from scratch you might not know exactly where to position the voiceover but you could roughly position it and fine tune it later In the case of this tutorial however we have a pretty good idea where everything needs to be 1 Double click the cursor position box at the bottom of the timeline 2 Type 4 7 and press Enter The cursor is positioned at 4 700 seconds on the wwe Cursor Position Ctrl G timeline 3 Drag the voiceover group talking head video and voiceover audio so that the beginning of the talkinghead event snaps to the cursor position Adding a volume envelope The music bed s volume needs to be lowered ducked as the narrator speaks A track volume envelope can be used to lower the volume and then raise it again when the narrator finishes speaking We will use the voiceover s starting and ending points as a reference for the envelope 1 Click the Musicbed track header 2 From the Ins
286. mary and CD An overview of each tab and its settings follows Project Properties ax Video Audio Ruler Summary Audio CD Template NTSC DY 7209490 29 970 fps Id x E Width 720 Field order Lower field first Height 460 Pixel aspect ratio 0 509 NTSC DY Frame rate 29 970 INT SC Full resolution rendering quality Good si Prerendered files folder C PROGRAM FILESSSONIC FOUNDRY SYEGAS 3 05 Browse Free storage space in selected folder 3 293 6 Megabytes T Start all new projects with these settings Advanced Video tab This tab allows you to set different characteristics the project uses to handle the video Also this tab displays information about the video contained in your project For more information see Modifying project video properties on page 190 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS CHP 17 nn CO5 Audio tab This tab allows you to set different characteristics the project uses to handle the audio This page also displays the available drive space where Vegas stores recorded audio V Multiple audio busses are only available in Vegas Video Sample rates are limited in Vegas Video LE to 48 000 Hz while Vegas Video allows up to 96 000 Hz Item Description Number of Enter the number of stereo busses that you want in your stereo busses project You may add up to 25 additional busses The busses appear in the Mixer Sample rate Choose a sample rate from the drop down list or enter
287. mation see Adding project markers and regions on page 100 Quantizing to frames The Quantize To Frames command in the Options menu takes snapping one step further With this feature enabled everything snaps to the starting edge of individual video frames Quantizing affects how you can move events place markers make selections and position the cursor Quantizing to frames means that the position of markers regions events and the cursor are limited to the start of an individual video frame 00 0 1 13 14 00 01 13 16 00 01 13 17 Track zoomed in so that one thumbnail one frame CHP 5 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES 110 Using the event snap offset Each event in your project has a snap offset flag that can be moved along the length of the event The flag is the white triangle that is located in the lower left corner of each event This flag allows you to designate where snapping occurs This is useful if you need to align the snap with a beat in the event instead of the edge I bs The time display reflects time within the event not Snap offset fla 7 Ep TE i p g Snap offset 0 000 Shap offset 50 000 the project ruler 1 Place the mouse pointer on the snap offset triangle The pointer changes to a hand icon dha 2 Drag the snap offset flag to the new position in the event As the flag moves a time display appears This time display indicates where the snap offset flag occurs in time in the event
288. meline pg 246 rendering a project pg 239 V Rendering to a new track and printing video to tape from the timeline are only available in Vegas Video When prerendering video or rendering to a new track a DV template not only optimizes playback performance but also helps you avoid needless recompression of DV footage Vegas recompresses DV material only when necessary Cuts only DV sequences are not recompressed when you output the project to DV from the timeline or in Video Capture The DV templates are designed to provide high quality pixel aspect correct DV compliant renders when rendering a project or printing to tape from the timeline Do not select an uncompressed setting when choosing rendering or print to tape options An uncompressed setting produces a large file that will not print back to DV tape from Video Capture or from the timeline Eliminating out of range colors The DV format allows color values to exceed NTSC and vider Eee PAL color level standards If you have a scene you know is Video Event FX mountains too hot or if you want to be sure that your video stays JIG Broadcast Colors 0 oh oe P within legal broadcast levels apply the Broadcast Colors Pacem 9 Q effect to specific events or the entire project Set the effect tO Pa err the Clamp preset You can use a histogram to help identify out of range colors For more information see Preparing M Smooth low bounds i 000 projects for broadc
289. mpression options are set automatically according to your project s properties For more information see Customizing the rendering process on page 241 4 Enter a name and browse for a destination for your file 5 Click OK GETTING STARTED CHP 3 CHAPTER lt a a gt m B Red i f j r LAs R 83 Basic Editing Techniques Vegas projects are multitrack compilations of events that occur over time The events in your project are references pointers to source media files Vegas is a nondestructive editor so editing events in your project does not alter the source media files in any way Getting around When editing and playing back the project the cursor identifies where you are along the project s timeline Moving the cursor The cursor may be controlled using the following keyboard commands Description Go to beginning of project Go to end of project Go to beginning of selection or view if no selection Go to end of selection or view if no selection Move right by grid marks Move left by grid marks Go to Center in view Keys Ctrlt Home or W Ctrl End or E Home End Page Down Page Up Ctrl G OO 00 00 00 BES Main video D ae Level Event edit point cursor jumps Changing focus aoe 1m0 ar Description Move left right to marker s Move to marker Move left right to event edit points including fade edges see figure below Nudge cursor on
290. n edits and other modifications 1 Click the events to select them For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 84 2 Select a time range if applicable 3 Click the Copy button 1 on the toolbar Copying selected events When copied selected events are reproduced and placed on the Clipboard Time information is also placed on the Clipboard Events before copy Clipboard contents Events after copy The original events are not affected and do not change puguin p 0000 19 24 l idn CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 88 Copying a time selection Events within the time selection and across all tracks are reproduced and placed on the Clipboard Time information is also placed on the Clipboard Events before copy Clipboard contents Events after copy The original events are not affected and do not a g change Copying a time selection and events Events and portions of selected events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the Clipboard Time information is also placed on the Clipboard Events before copy Clipboard contents Events after copy The original events are not affected and do not r change Cutting events Cutting events removes them from their respective tracks but places the cut information events and time on the Clipboard Once on the Clipboard you may paste the information into your project 1 Click the events to be cut to select them or select
291. n see Resampling video on page 187 Video tab Frame size Frame size contributes to quality and file size The appropriate frame size is determined by the final destination of the movie See your video capture card s manual for more information The final frame size of the movie can be different from the project s default settings Frame rate Frame rate is important in determining the quality and size of the final media file The appropriate frame rate is determined by the final destination of the movie See your video capture card s manual for more information The final rendered multimedia file can have a different frame rate from the project itself Field order Video that is displayed on a television monitor is interlaced This means that every frame of video is actually composed of two fields each of which is made up of half of the lines that make the final frame These two fields are woven together in alternate lines but which of the two fields is displayed first can be important The interlace can be ignored for video that is going to be displayed on a computer choose None progressive scan For video on a television most hardware supports Lower Field First If the output is jittery or shaky on a television or your hardware s manual specifies it choose Upper Field First CHP 16 SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 244 n Pixel aspect ratio A pixel is a single picture element or dot on a television or computer
292. n can also be used to open a rough copy of a project created in another application in Vegas For example you could create an EDL from a project in a third party editing application and then import the project into Vegas via the EDL For best results save the EDL file and source media files in a single folder before opening the EDL in Vegas Opening an EDL 1 From the File menu choose Open 2 Locate the EDL file select it and click the Open button If you are working on another project Vegas prompts you to save your work before it opens a the new project lt lt lt lt lt Note EDLs do not contain any information about the location of source media Therefore the EDL file should be saved in the same directory as the source media If it is not or if media is stored in a number of different locations Vegas prompts you to relink these files when the EDL is imported a Because of the significant differences between editing applications third party CMX and Sony EDL files may not bring all of the project data into Vegas Among other differences events are inserted into the timeline on a single track all transition effects are replaced with crossfades and only four audio tracks can be imported USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 12 gg Working in DV format Vegas is optimized for DV editing If your project is destined for tape or television the DV format is an excellent choice The new So
293. n reversed plays backwards until it gets to the first frame and then holds that frame for the duration of the event 1 Right click the event and choose Insert Remove Velocity Envelope 2 Trim the beginning of the video event to the place where you want the reversal to begin e g the last frame in the media file that you want to play if it were playing forward 3 Drag the velocity down to 100 for a normal speed reversal eae 10 00 02 00 00 04 10 00 06 10 00 08 10 00 10 10 00 12 jae Ee This is the original untrimmed event The horses run from left to right 00 00 00 10 00 02 10 00 04 10 00 06 Ian 10 00 10 10 00 12 ai The event is edge trimmed to the frame where the reversal will begin 00 00 00 10 00 02 10 00 04 10 00 06 Ia E E I The Velocity envelope is added and set to 100 The thumbnails reflect the change and l the horses run backwards The event can now be repositioned to fit the project Removing a velocity envelope To remove an envelope and all of its settings right click the event and choose Insert Remove Velocity Envelope from the shortcut menu Grouping events Vegas allows you to group events together within tracks or across separate tracks Once a group is created all the events within it may be moved within their tracks as a unit and have event specific edits applied at the same time You may still edit properties of individual events within a group without affecting the ot
294. n their source media to automatically loop When this option is not selected extended events repeat the final frame of a video file Preserve pitch when stretching audio events Prevents pitch shifting when you stretch an audio event Collapse loop region when no time selection is present When selected a loop region does not persist when there is no time selection This means that when you click the timeline and move the cursor destroying the any previous time selection the loop region is also reset to zero By default this option is not selected and loop regions persist until modified or until a new time selection is created Fade edit edges of audio events ms Sets a fast fade on the edges of audio events 1Oms by default to soften potentially harsh beginnings and endings Fade edit edges of video events ms Automatically fades a few frames in and out of inserted video events New still image length Sets the default duration of inserted still image files e g BMP PNG Default time between CD tracks Sets the default time Vegas creates between CD tracks when using the Add Media as CD Tracks command in the Media Pool window For more information see Adding media as CD tracks to a new project on page 171 Automatically overlap multiple selected media when added Creates automatic crossfades between events when multiple media files are added to the same track across time When this check box is not selected multiple media files are
295. nal level The signal in the side you are panning towards starts at the base dB level either O dB 3 dB or 6 dB and increases to O dB This panning model uses a linear panning curve e Constant Power The constant power panning model is most useful for panning mono source material As you move the fader from side to side this model creates the illusion of the source moving around the listener from one side to the other in a semi circle This model uses the constant power panning curve GY Mantheme G F d S 7 Dyo H0dR T Fan ee J s Add Channels 0 dB Center Balance 0 dB Center Balance 3 dB Center Balance 6 dB Center Constant Power You may add a pan envelope for more advanced panning effects For more information see Working with track envelopes on page 137 Adjusting bus levels and assignable effects send levels If you add a bus or an assignable effects chain to your project Vegas adds it to the multipurpose slider button When a bus or assignable effects chain is selected in the multipurpose slider button menu the slider controls the level of the track sent to the bus or effect chain Bus and assignable effects send levels are preset to inf dB mute for playback Move the slider to adjust the send level For more information see Adjusting a bus send level on page 156 or Assigning audio tracks to assignable effects chains on page 157 _ 4 Note Multiple busses and assignable effects are only a
296. name Double click and type track name Organizing tracks Vegas is flexible in how tracks can be organized Tracks may be rearranged and sized to fit your particular needs Reordering tracks When you create tracks Vegas arranges them in the order that they were added It is a simple process to reorder tracks to fit your needs You may reorder one or more tracks at a time aa Note Track hierarchy can be critical in video compositing For more information see Compositing on page 199 ER 1 On the track header place the mouse pointer on the track that you want to move 2 Drag the track to the new position in the track header a Note When moving a track you may want to place the mouse pointer on the track number when dragging This helps avoid accidental modifications to other track header controls SS N WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 1 323 Changing track color When you add a track to Vegas a color is automatically assigned to the track This color is easily changed This feature is useful if you want to use color to organize similar tracks 1 In the track header right click a track to display a shortcut menu Rename o Insert Video Track CHR iD 2 From the shortcut menu choose Track Display Color to display a Duplicate Track submenu Track Display Color 3 From the submenu choose a color Changing track height You can control track height by dragging the bottom edge of a track in the trac
297. nary number 10011010 represents the unsigned value of 154 in the decimal system In digital sampling specifically the PCM format a binary number is used to store individual sound levels called samples Bit Depth The number of bits used to represent a single sample Vegas uses either 8 16 or 24 bit samples Higher values increase the quality of the playback and any recordings that you make While 8 bit samples take up less memory and hard disk space they are inherently noisier than 16 or 24 bit samples Byte Refers to a set of 8 bits An 8 bit sample requires one byte of memory to store while a 16 bit sample takes two bytes of memory to store Clipboard The Clipboard is where data that you have cut or copied in Vegas is stored You can then paste the data back into Vegas at a different location or paste it into other applications Some data such as audio cannot be pasted into applications such as Microsoft Word or Notepad but the text data from the Edit Details window can be pasted This allows you to then print or format the data The Video Preview window also lets you capture still frames to the Clipboard for use in any image editing program For more information see Understanding the Video Preview window on page 229 Clipping Clipping is what occurs when the amplitude of a sound is above the maximum allowed recording level In digital systems clipping is seen as a clamping of the data to a maximum value such as 32 767 in
298. nce set these properties can be edited at any time by choosing Properties from the File menu 1 Start Vegas 2 From the File menu choose New The New Project dialog appears 3 On the Video tab choose Multimedia 320x240 from the Template drop down list 4 On the Ruler tab choose Time in the Ruler time format drop down list 5 Click OK Using the Explorer window The Explorer window allows you to view and access your media files without leaving the work area This window works just like Windows Explorer 1 Locate the Sample Projects Tutorial folder on your hard drive 2 Select the Sample Projects Tutorial folder so that its contents appear in the Explorer window Joere ER 01 voiceover veg 42 My Computer W 02_editing veg Media files 9 SH Floppy A X 03_musicbed veg Re IC MT 04_background veg GHD Dell E FullShot39 B Media E C i 08 overlay veg N UG panning veg N OF fades veg M 08 trackmotion veg N OF velocity veg 9 2 Miny of Kevin s f a Audio mis down way B My Documents E Audio mix veg Lf My Movies san beach avi J Program Files an boat ay Sbpci Al bridge bmp L Explorer Trimmer MediaPool Transitions 7 VideoFX 7 Text Ba gt 2 i Placing the video In the media files list in the Explorer window the media files needed for this project are displayed We will place the talkinghead avi file Once a media file is placed into the project
299. ncludes several command types that you may add toa streaming media file Some command types are exclusive to either the Windows Media WMV or the RealMedia RM player Command Player type Description URL Windows Media Indicates when an instruction is sent to the user s internet browser to change the and RealMedia content being displayed With this command you enter the URL that displays at a specific time during the rendered project s playback Text Windows Media Displays text in the captioning area of the Windows Media Player located below the video display area You enter the text that will display during playback WMClosedCaption Windows Media Displays the entered text in the captioning window that is defined by an HTML layout file WMTextBodyText Window Media Displays the entered text in the text window that is defined by an HTML layout file WMTextHeadline Title Windows Media Windows Media and RealMedia Displays the entered text in the headline window that is defined by an HTML layout file Displays the entered text on the RealPlayer s title bar Author Windows Media Displays the entered text Author s name when a user selects About This and RealMedia Presentation from the RealPlayer s shortcut menu Copyright Windows Media Displays the entered copyright information when a user selects About This and RealMedia Presentation from the RealPlayer s shortcut menu HotSpotPlay RealMedia Allows you to define an area in
300. nd MPEG 2 mpg Some versions of Vegas also support MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 file creation through the use of MainConcept MPEG technology see notes following table MPEG Layer 3 mp3 Compressed audio format You may render up to 20 mp3 files without registering the optional plug in OggVorbis Ogg A patent free audio encoding and streaming technology QuickTime MOv Apple QuickTime multimedia format RealMedia rm The RealNetworks standard for streaming media via the Web This option renders both audio and video into one file Sonic Foundry Perfect Clarity pca A Sonic Foundry proprietary format that is compressed and completely Audio lossless see notes following table Sonic Foundry Wave64 w64 A Sonic Foundry proprietary format that allows wave files that are practically unrestricted by file size see notes following table Video for Windows avi The standard video file format used on Windows based computers This option renders both audio and video into one file Wave Microsoft wav The standard audio file format used on Windows based computers Wave Scott Studios wav Standard audio format used with Scott Studios systems Windows Media Audio wma The Microsoft audio only format used to create files for streaming or downloading via the Web Windows Media Format wmv The Microsoft standard used for streaming audio and video media via the Web More about the MPEG format Vegas Video supports MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 file creation through the
301. nd processing power that you expect from Sonic Foundry Whether it s the standard and familiar Windows navigation commands or the clean and uncluttered interface you ll find Vegas to be a tool that will be mastered in minutes Beneath the unique and customizable interface you ll find a product that is both powerful and flexible This table lists some of the features available in Vegas the perfect multitrack media editing system for your studio or production environment Nondestructive editing Unlimited tracks Unlimited undo redo Multiple file formats on a single track Automatic crossfade functionality Simultaneous multitrack record amp play Quick edit media trimmer with direct link to EQ and compressor inserts available on every audio audio editor track Loop recording Print to tape directly from project timeline Real time event resampling 32 assignable DirectX effects sends Audio video scrub control DirectX Plug In support Edit detail list management Dual processor support Red Book audio CD mastering and burning Multiple I O support 24 bit 96 kHz MIDI timecode generate amp trigger 26 audio busses Dual monitor support Internet streaming file authoring Windows Ability to incorporate timeline metadata markers Media Technologies and RealNetworks captions for Internet content authoring Imports aif avi bmp gif jpg mov mp3 Exports aif avi mov mp3 mpg with optional Ogg pca png psd sfa tif requires
302. ndow You may arrange and delete columns from each category and save the changes to a personal template Vegas has one template from which you may create your own display options All Fields Display is the default 1 From the Show drop down list choose the category that you want to customize 2 Drag a column s header to the new position The cursor changes to a column icon s 1 as you move the column If you want to remove the column so that it does not display drag the icon off the Edit Details window Release the mouse to drop the column in its new position 3 The Template drop down name changes to Untitled Enter a new name in the Template drop down 4 Click the Save button H on the Edit Details window to save the custom display You may delete a custom display by selecting it from the template drop down list and clicking the Delete button L 571 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 5 121 Working with Events CHAPTER Events are windows into media files in a project and are the most basic unit of editing in Vegas Media files that are inserted into the timeline are automatically contained within an event Trimming and editing an event does not affect the source media file in any way Setting event switches Event switches are important functions that are used to determine the basic behavior of events in Vegas Switches may be applied to a single event or to multiple events at the same time 1 Right
303. ndows 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences 2 Click the General tab 3 Choose Double click on media file loads into Trimmer instead of tracks Moving frame by frame in the Trimmer window As you navigate through a video file in the Trimmer the exact frame that the cursor is over in time is displayed as in a thumbnail image under the cursor When using the left and right arrow keys this allows you to edit with frame accuracy Make sure Animate video frames in Trimmer is selected in the Preferences dialog to use this feature Making selections tn the Trimmer After you have opened a media file in the Trimmer you may select a segment of it and place it in your project Make a time selection to select a segment in the Trimmer in the same way you do in the project timeline For more information see Selecting a time range on page 85 You can make a selection during playback by using the keyboard Press 1 or I to mark the start of the selection and press O or to mark the end If you know the exact timecode of the point where you want to begin and end a time selection you can enter it into the boxes at the lower right part of the Trimmer window Explorer Trimmer MediaPool Transitions Yi k Double click to enter a value Selection Selection Selection Start End Length aa Note Press to recall the last five time selection areas in the Trimmer a Adding selections to the timeline You can use the T
304. needed Adding equalization EQ to the voiceover Now that the music is mixed in you can hear the voiceover has a strong bass quality to it We will adjust that quality slightly with EQ on the first band 1 Click the Track FX button 4 on the track header of the voiceover track The Track FX window appears Three plug ins are applied to this track as a default CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS ssy 2 Click the Track EQ plug in mma Audio Plug In Track 2 aL ide You can set the EQ settings by typing in the appropriate Q 8 1 P E PP P o Track Noise Gate Hiv Track EQ J Track Compressor bo box dragging the slider or clicking the arrow buttons between the slider and the setting box The easiest way to Preset united Sade adj S S EQ is to drag the numbers on the EQ map g SONIC FOUNDRY E SEEEn 3 Set the Frequency to 160 Hz 4 Set the Gain to inf 5 Set the Rolloff to 12 dB oct 6 Close the Track FX window a S TE 7 Click the Play 1 or the Play From Start 1 button to Bolot R c fiz play the project with the new EQ settings Summary In this section we added a music bed to a new track below the narration The video and audio events from the last section were grouped together so they could be moved further down the timeline The volume of the music was faded out ducked during the narration and was faded back in after it was over In addition equalization was used to improve the tone
305. nformation see Setting custom stream properties on page 191 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 12 L 181 Correcting images for DV pixel aspect ratios For best results when importing still images into Vegas create images that account for the pixel aspect ratio of your desired output format Vegas does an good job stretching images to fit the output format but some distortion occurs if the pixel aspect ratio for the source format does not match the destination format To calculate pixel aspect ratio correction use this formula Output frame pixel width X Output format pixel aspect ratio Still image pixel width For example this is the formula for NTSC DV format 720 DV screen frame pixel width X 9091 DV pixel aspect ratio 655 pixel width Use these figures as a guide when creating images e Full frame pixel aspect corrected still images for use in NTSC DV projects are 655x480 e Full frame pixel aspect corrected still images for use in PAL DV projects are 787x576 Capturing a timeline snapshot You can create still images of a single frame of your project Once saved the snapshot can be used just like any other still image Video Preview eer 2 ib Preview Quality EE Ea E i P 4 E save Timeline Snapshot to File e P x I Eh La fi 4 L Project 7209480932 29 971 Frame 371 Preview 360240432 29 97p Display 360240816 1 Position the cursor on the frame of the project you wish to capture as a still ima
306. ng 111 fade types 126 127 placing 39 71 72 hiding on track s 139 playback rate 124 moving points 138 recording into 163 opacity 126 ripple editing 87 track envelopes 137 selecting multiple 84 velocity 127 selecting with time 86 video 126 shifting the contents of 95 volume event 125 sliding 96 volume track 137 slipping 95 Equipment setup 159 160 slip trimming ae basic 159 snapping 109 an 7 166 splitting 94 with T E 160 splitting with time selection 42 MEA MIDI option 160 switches 121 trimming 92 Event editing 87 undersample rate 124 Event properties displaying names 114 name changing 114 Expand track keyframes 77 Expand track layers 77 212 pitch shifting 111 Explorer window 23 Event switches 121 123 transport bar 68 invert phase 122 using 37 lock 121 External monitor 235 236 262 loop 121 maintain aspect ratio 123 F mute 121 normalize 122 Fade to color 137 reduce interlace flicker 123 INDEX H iv gt vO Fader assignable effects 135 bus send 135 156 pan 135 track 134 Field order 190 267 Filters See Video effects Focus 83 Frame numbers 251 Frame by frame cursor movement 83 General editing 83 107 event vs file 73 General preferences 256 Generator adding 198 duplicating 199 Text Backgrounds window 27 Glossary 273 283 Glow 225 Grid lines safe areas 232 snapping events to 109 spacing 252 Grouping events
307. ng the timing of the project When the inserted event ends the original event continues playing as if it had never stopped 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Krr HE Preferences dialog appears General Video Audio CD Settings Editing Syne Video Device 2 Click the Editing tab IZ Enable looping on events by default IZ Preserve pitch when stretching audio events 3 Select Fade edit edges of audio and Fade edit edges of video events Specify a duration for each transition T Collapse loop region when no time selection is present IZ Fade edit edges of audio events ma fi U CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 92 p _ Events that have previously been inserted or punched in are not affected by this change The concept of punching in and out only applies when you are inserting an event that is shorter than the event that it is being inserted into In the following illustration every frame is numbered so that you can see how the original event continues after the inserted event ends as if it continued to play underneath the original nana mnnm mmn mnan mwana ampan Punched in event Duplicating events Duplicating is a combination of copying and pasting in one action The process is like moving the event to a new position while leaving a copy behind 1 Hold the key on your keyboard 2 Drag the event you want to duplicate to the place where you want the new event to be positione
308. ng track height The height of individual tracks can be resized by dragging their borders on the track header In the example below the main video track is fairly large to show the details of the scene while the two tracks above it which are overlays have been resized to a shorter height For more information see Changing track height on page 133 00 00 17 14 Wi Voi E 3 tk Ay j D val 3 0 dB Pan Center lt l a Music QD g do Hil 4 D val GETTING STARTED 00 00 04 28 00 00 09 29 l c 00 00 00 00 n eee ee SES e paneeaprte EE L TE l EATA ERL s L CHP 3 L 77 Using the track header This section describes the different controls in the track header of each track Some controls are specific to either video or audio tracks Video track header 7 Main video O ap Level 100 0 el C4 gt 4 Button or Name Description Control L Make Creates a parent child compositing relationship with the track above Used when creating compositing masks For more information see Understanding the parent child track relationship on child page 199 EES Track number The icon identifies whether this is an audio track or video track Track numbers and type and color colors help organize a multitrack project For more information see Managing tracks on page 131 a Minimize track Minimizes track height For more information see Changing track height on p
309. nic Foundry DV codec provides video with excellent image quality even over multiple generations and provides audio that is better than CD quality If you start with well shot DV footage and stay within the DV format throughout the editing process you can output broadcast quality video programs from Vegas This section provides guidelines for working in the DV format in Vegas Selecting source media Wherever possible use DV source video clips You can capture video from DV cameras and decks using an IEEE 1394 card with no quality loss You can also convert analog footage to DV using a device like the Sony DVMC DA2 media converter or the PowerR Director s Cut analog DV converter a good choice for PAL Setting project properties Set your project to match the DV format of your final output This provides a true WYSIWYG view of the project when you use an external monitor for previewing This also prevents you from stretching output or changing field order unnecessarily You can match the project settings to a DV source file by using the Match Media Settings button 211 in the Project Properties dialog For more information see Setting video properties based on a media file on page 66 and Modifying project video properties on page 190 Selecting templates Always select a DV template when performing any of the following tasks in a DV project prerendering video pg 231 rendering to a new track pg 141 printing video to tape from the ti
310. no visual content or when using a transparent overlay with no background visual content Default track fade colors Sets the default top and bottom colors when adding a Fade to Color envelope to a video track For more information see Working with track envelopes on page 137 Audio tab Multiple audio busses are only available in Vegas Video The Audio tab allows you to set preferences to optimize how Vegas uses your computer s components to handle resource intensive audio This tab also allows you to configure Vegas to the equipment that is connected to your computer Playback buffering seconds Sets the amount of memory Vegas uses during project playback For more information see Adjusting the playback buffering slider on page 259 Audio device type Sets the device type for audio routing Select Windows Classic Wave Driver in order to route busses to hardware For more information see Routing busses to hardware on page 154 Default audio playback device Sets the default device for playback Default audio recording device Sets the default device for recording into a track Waveform display while recording Allows you to display or hide waveforms when recording into an audio track Normalize peak level dB Sets the maximum level that Vegas uses when normalizing an event Preferred audio editor Displays the path of the audio editor that you can start directly from Vegas to perform destructive edits to audio Metronome Allow
311. ns To display the history list click the down arrow button next to the Undo and Redo buttons Video for Windows AVI See AVI Virtual MIDI Router VMR A software only router for MIDI data between programs Vegas uses the VMR to receive MIDI timecode and send MIDI clock No MIDI hardware or cables are required for a VMR so routing can only be performed between programs running on the same PC Sonic Foundry supplies a VMR with Vegas called the Sonic Foundry Virtual MIDI Router Waveform A waveform is the visual representation of wave like phenomena such as sound or light For example when the amplitude of sound pressure is graphed over time pressure variations usually form a smooth waveform Waveform Display A section inside of the Trimmer window that shows a graph of the sound data waveform The vertical axis corresponds to the amplitude of the wave For 16 bit sounds the amplitude range is 32 768 to 32 767 For 24 bit sounds the range is 8 388 607 to 8 388 607 The horizontal axis corresponds to time with the left most point being the start of the waveform In memory the horizontal axis corresponds to the number of samples from the start of the sound file GLOSSARY APPENDIX B e 283 Zero crossing A zero crossing is the point where a fluctuating signal crosses the zero amplitude axis By making edits at zero crossings with the same slope the chance of creating glitches is minimized Vegas simulates zero crossings by
312. ns retain the order of plug ins and the settings that have been applied Vegas stores these chains as effect packages for use in future projects If you use the same plug in chains regularly saving them as packages is faster and more consistent than recreating the chain manually Once a chain is saved as a package it may be used as either a track bus or assignable effects plug in chain Saved plug in chain packages appear in the Plug In Chooser dialog Plug In Chooser Track 4 Fy x Track Noise Gate H Track EQ Track Compressor fo de AIL DUK 7 G i e ancel IS F Packages Ek r 9 SS il i ET Custom flange add E Dither EO Set e _____________________ P ug in chain packages that Remove EP Heavy Reverb you have created and saved Save Ag 1 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button 44 The appropriate FX window Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX appears 2 Click the Plug In Chain button 4 The Plug In Chooser dialog appears with the plug in chain displayed at the top 3 Click Save As The Save Plug in Package dialog appears Save pia HE 4 Enter a name for the package 5 Click OK or press to save the package _ Cancel Editing saved plug in chains Plug ins on package chains may be added deleted and rearranged at any time Editing is performed in the Plug In Chooser dialog 1 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button 4 The appropriate FX window Track FX Bu
313. nt is Toggle the event s loop switch by clicking the check box A check mark looped for playback in the box indicates that the event is looped for playback pg 121 Lock Displays whether the event is Toggle the event s lock switch by clicking the check box A check mark locked in the box indicates that the event is locked pg 121 Normalize Displays whether the event is Toggle the event s normalize switch by clicking the check box A check normalized mark in the box indicates that the event is normalized pg 122 Snap Offset Displays when in the event the snap Enter a different value to change the snap offset position in the event offset is positioned pg 110 Markers The Markers category displays information about markers that are placed along the project s timeline This category displays two columns the marker s position along the timeline and the marker s name For more information see Working with markers on page 100 Regions The Regions category displays information about regions that are placed along the project s timeline This category displays four columns each region s start position end position length and name For more information see Working with regions on page 101 Selected Events The Selected Events category is visually identical to the Events category except that the Edit Details window only displays information about events that are selected in your project Customizing the Edit Details wi
314. nter main window by dragging the blue gray overlay However the controls feon Z pao Z in the dialog are invaluable when you need precision in resizing Angle degrees joo Z Smoothness ZT fioo S more keyframes Magnify view ZT moving or rotating the overlay The smoothness option allows you to modify the smoothness of the interpolation curve among three or e Zooming can be used to shrink or expand the video overlay The Grid Grid density Density is used to control the ruler settings and snap to points E lt Shadow This creates a simple drop shadow that appears under the entire window or only under the opaque nontransparent parts of the overlay The size and offset of the shadow can be controlled and animated and you can specify the shadow color A shadow is especially effective under a picture in X Y Offset picture window or to emphasize text and titles Use the Eyedropper tool to select a specific color from anywhere on the screen Eyedropper Edge softness Transparency Glow Eyedropper feathering and 100 intensity Offset X Y Offset tfao 6 phi Size an S san 0 7 Angle degrees joo Z Feather Edge softness _ fiso Intensity Transparency 0 50 Shadow Color 7 baina Offset feo E feo E pan eapon E Angle degrees pi B Feather Intensity Color Picker Glow is a bright haze surrounding an overlay In general li
315. ntroller is selected This synchronizes the keyframe controller cursor with the cursor in the project timeline 4 Click the Create Keyframe button 71 The keyframe that is created at this point has the same attributes as the first keyframe at 0 000 Since there is no change between these two keyframes no animation will occur between them Track Motion Track Motion Talkinghead Preset Jiu ntitled Ly x 320 0 v 240 0 S MEE B R t4 Center J K S has a Pann Shan Ein K Angle degrees 7 i 5 m Z T a ted Smoothness ST a she hooo i Magnify view i e3 S J Grid density Sl L 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 20 A a ree New keyframe Se SSS SSR O O OBS Sitters al ri Ple sags 00 00 19 400 5 Move the cursor one half second down the keyframe controller 6 Resize the track motion area to 180 X 135 Enter these values into the Size boxes on the left side of the Track Motion window The numbers do not have to be precise CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS 66 1 7 Reposition the Track Motion Area to 102 X 162 lower left corner Use the Center boxes to enter these values Track Motion Track Motion alkinghead Preset Untitled I x 160 0 320 Position Oa T T T TTI T TTT p RERS TEER heao Ss faso Z d Center J poo Effo Ei Angle degrees i pi Z i Smoothness 72 Sk Pop Z l Magnify view ZT NE T Grid density a 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 20 L Po E a New keyframe
316. nywhere in the workspace outside of the selected events Hold the left mouse button and right click to toggle through the three types of selection boxes free vertical or horizontal BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L BB Selecting all events to the end of the track 1 Right click an event A shortcut menu appears 2 From the shortcut menu choose Select Events to End All events on the track after the selected event are selected You may also use the Select Events to End command with events selected on different tracks Hold the key to select events on different tracks and then right click to access the shortcut menu This provides an easy way to move large blocks of events Once events have been selected they can be grouped together For more information see Grouping events on page 128 Modifying events in selections Selections can be made of multiple video events only multiple audio events only or a combination of both video and audio events Only commands and operations that apply to both types of events can be used for multiple selections that are composed of both audio and video events For example Normalize is an audio event switch Therefore when you right click an audio event and from the shortcut menu choose Switches the Normalize command is unavailable if the selection includes video events Selecting a time range Time selections are indicated by a shaded box and a bar that Time selection appears on the to
317. o Capture online help file displays CHP 16 SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 246 ___ Printing to DV tape Print to tape from the timeline is only available in Vegas Video You can print either a portion of your project or the entire video right from the project timeline Vegas examines your project prerenders any complex portions and then prints to DV tape all in one action For more information see Prerendering video on page 231 ee Note Printing to tape from the timeline can require significant drive space for temporary prerendered files Set the Prerendered files folder on the Video tab of the Project Properties dialog to an A V capable drive with sufficient space Prerendering a DV project uses approximately 228 MB minute so plan accordingly pes To print to DV tape you must first establish a connection to the video camera or VTR to which you will print For more information see Video device tab on page 262 Establishing a connection to the recording device 1 On the Tools menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the Video Device tab Preferences x 3 In the Device drop down list select OHCI Compliant IEEE General Video Audio CD Settings Editing Sync Video Device 1394 DV Device OHC Compliant IEEE 1394 D lt 4 Click OK The Preferences dialog closes Cancel sagr Printing to DV tape 1 To print just a po
318. o a separate audio track below the video track The two associated events are grouped together and behave as a single unit when moved or otherwise edited You can ungroup the events to move them independently For more information see Clearing a group on page 129 Two events that contain the video top and audio bottom streams from a single multimedia video file each event is inserted on a separate track Ook OOd el Parc Cene l GETTING STARTED CHP 3 e 73 Automatically crossfading inserted events When inserting multiple events across time the events both video and audio may be set to automatically crossfade one into the next Two options must be enabled in order to create crossfades automatically when adding multiple events First verify that a check mark appears next to Automatic Crossfades in the Options menu Second from the Options menu choose Preferences and on the Editing tab select Automatically overlap multiple selected media when added For more information see Using automatic crossfades on page 97 Working with events Events are the most basic objects in a project in Vegas An event is something that happens in time has a specific duration and can be video or audio Understanding files and events The objects you work with in Vegas are referred to as media files and events e Files are objects that are stored on your hard disk In Vegas you will mostly be working with media files such as music and video
319. o examine 2 Click the down arrow on the Overlays button F in the Video Preview window 3 Choose a histogram type from the menu that displays e Luminance Charts the luminance or brightness of colors in your video e Red Charts the red tones in your video e Green Charts the green tones in your video e Blue Charts the blue tones in your video e Alpha Charts the alpha channel transparency in your video 4 Use the histogram to evaluate the colors in your video 5 Use plug ins such as Brightness and Contrast Broadcast Colors and Levels to adjust the color For more information see Using video effects on page 193 Preparing projects for broadcast Broadcast television uses a narrower range of color than standard RGB When you broadcast a project that contains out of range colors you can introduce noise into the audio stream or force color bleeding on the display device Use the histogram to determine whether your project contains out of range colors and adjust accordingly before rendering 1 Click the Go to Start button NJ to position your cursor at the beginning of your project 2 Click the down arrow next to the Overlays button F in the Video Preview window A menu displays CHP 15 PREVIEWING VIDEO 234z 3 Choose Histogram Luminance from the menu 4 Play your project Pars that appear in the shaded areas of the histogram are out of range 5 Use the Broadcast Colors plug in to smooth the upper
320. o fade in and out between two events S A Se Be 9 ea S ek RM Sie E Right click a crossfade to choose a different crossfade curve 511 MIN XW A 1 Right click anywhere in the crossfade region to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Fade Type to display the fade types submenu 3 Select the desired fade type Sliding a crossfade You can slide a crossfade between two events without affecting the total length of the two overlapping events This process is similar to sliding and slipping events For more information see Slipping and sliding events on page 95 Hold ctri Alt while dragging the overlapping area between two events The slide crossfade cursor appears EE As you drag the relative position of the media remains fixed on the track and the crossfade position changes effectively trimming the edge of the event in the direction you drag You can use this technique when you want to maintain the length of two combined events but want the transition to occur earlier or later Two events with a crossfade Sliding the crossfade 00 00 04 29 00 00 03 29 00 00 14 23 to the left and to the right Using undo and redo Vegas gives you unlimited undo and redo functionality while working on your project even to the extent of being able to undo changes made before the last time a project was saved but not closed While you are working with a project Vegas create
321. of the RAM cache for building dynamic RAM previews in the Video Preview window For more information see Building dynamic RAM previews on page 232 Dynamic RAM previews are only available in Vegas Video Show source frame numbers on event thumbnails as Display frame 10 00 01 23 eean time or timecode numbering on video event thumbnails TE Preferred video capture application Browse for the application to be ae ah launched when the Open Video Capture button 51 is clicked Timecode numbering on thumbnails Video Preview display options Action Safe Area and Title Safe Area Sets the reference overlay safe areas in the Video Preview window For more information see Identifying safe areas on page 232 e Horizontal Grid Divisions and Vertical Grid Divisions Sets the spacing of the grid overlay in the Video Preview window used in aligning visual elements in a project For more information see Changing grid spacing on page Zod Display at project size Sets the Video Preview window to always display the video at full project size Display square pixels Determines how the video is displayed in the Video Preview window In short televisions display rectangular pixels and computer monitors display square pixels This can result in a distorted preview although the source media and rendered video is unaffected Background color Sets the background color of the Preview window black by default that shows either when there is
322. om the project you selected are added to the Media Pool Adding media to the Media Pool from the Explorer window 1 Navigate to and select a file to add to the Media Pool You can use the key or key to select multiple media files 2 Right click the file and choose Add to Media Pool from the shortcut menu The selected file is added to the Media Pool Replacing media in the Media Pool You may replace a file in the Media Pool with a different file When changing the media file that an event contains every occurrence of the event on the timeline is updated with the new media file contents 1 Right click a file in the Media Pool 2 Choose Replace from the shortcut menu 3 In the Replace Media File dialog browse for and select the file that you want to replace the current file 4 Click the Open button The selected file replaces the old file in the Media Pool and any events in the timeline containing the old file are updated to contain the new media file Capturing video You can use Sonic Foundry s Video Capture application installed with Vegas to capture video clips from your video camera and add them to the Media Pool window r aaas Note You must have an IEEE 1394 OHClI compliant video capture card installed to use Video Capture 7 fT 1 If you have not already done so connect your video camera to your video capture card using the cable provided with the card GETTING STARTED 70 r 2 In t
323. on Splitting creates multiple events from an existing one We will make a time selection that contains the narrator s cough and split it from the audio then delete the cough 1 On the timeline drag to make a time selection where the cough occurs 2 Click the Play button 571 to play back the error to ensure that your time selection does not include part of the voiceover that we need 3 Increase or decrease the time selection by dragging an edge of the selection 4 Once the time selection is made choose Split from the Edit menu or press s to split the event One event Three events before the split after the split Editing an event The cough is now a new event that can be deleted 1 Click the event with the cough Gu Y 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete or press to remove the cough event After you have made the edits the voiceover should look something like this E x Welcome to This tutorial will introduce found in this Sonic Foundry you to the powerful editing new production Vegas and post production features environment TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS CHP 2 e 3 Aligning the remaining voiceover events With the voiceover edited we need to align the remaining audio to the video When you move events they snap to other event edges You may extend or shorten an event s length by dragging its edges which is useful for fine tuning the alignment Moreover you may turn off snapping
324. on Overlay Heightens contrast by using Multiply mode on darker colors and Screen mode on lighter colors Hard Light Adds overlay colors as if the overlay were lit by a bright focused spotlight Dodge Brightens the background based on the overlay color values Burn Darkens the background based on the overlay color values Darken Compares the overlay and background pixel by pixel and selects the darker color value for each pixel Lighten Compares the overlay and background pixel by pixel and selects the lighter color value for each pixel Difference Compares the overlay and background pixel by pixel and subtracts the darker color value from the lighter color to generate a new color value g difference Remaps color values along a parabolic curve The color values of the layers in the composite group are subtracted and then the subtracted values are squared Difference Squared i The resulting image will have less extreme changes in color values as the R colors approach black RGB 0 0 0 and more extreme changes in color values as colors approach white RGB 255 255 255 Adjusting opacity with the Composite level slider TES H r E The transparency or blending of the overlay can be precisely controlled with m O P 67 0 the Composite level slider Left is transparent and right is 100 opaque You can also double click the current value to enter a specific numeric percentage Composite level slider jk US
325. or all of the media in your project It shows information about how the files are being used and allows you to modify many of those properties You may sort add or change information rearrange columns and edit items in the project This window provides an alternate method for working with events audio CD track list items command markers markers and regions after they are placed in your project ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 5 L 1 1 9 The Edit Details window may be docked in the window docking area or may float on the workspace For more information see Window docking area on page 22 Viewing the Edit Details window To view the Edit Details window choose Edit Details from the View menu or press Alt 4 The Show drop down list allows you to view categorized project information Most entries can be edited by double clicking them or by right clicking them to display a shortcut menu Edit Details Show Events gt al fields E Take Start File Path Snap Offset a 1 O0 00 00 00 Sonic Foundry Text 1 FP RH G FP FP 00 00 00 00 SI 0 C Cc p R 00 00 00 00 Right click an A ESE C CrP D C 00 00 00 00 entry to display OO me Cube C C MT E 00 00 00 00 a shortcut menu OOO ior S C OCIMO E 00 00 00 00 or double click TS oog 20 i Cube r C ERE C C 00 00 00 00 an entry to edit it ooo Paste LHO r C PF C 9 00 00 00 00 7 Bf 000 Delete Delete Cube 0 D E D R 00 00 00 00 Ea 0 o CL D M pD R 00 00 00 00 n H Choose Act
326. or more keyframes the blue arc in the window shows the path of the center of the frame during the panning A smoothness value of 0 makes the movement linear from one keyframe to the next A higher smoothness value makes the path of the pan more curved Select a keyframe and change the Smoothness value to adjust spatial interpolation fest __ The blue arc shows the ae path of the center of fies Shaan E the frame Center i hoso hn B Angle d bo zi a i l The red arrows indicate Smoothness 2 iii l i each of the keyframes Smoothness fona S lt b the panning j effect Spatial Magnify view 2 Interpolation 100 0 lt Grid density E lt Position ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 14 L 231 Animating video effects plug ins Keyframe animation can be used to smoothly and gradually apply an effect to an event This example uses the Add Noise plug in The Add Noise plug in adds static or noise to a video sequence When added to a simple solid colored background with a monochrome setting and animated a pattern is produced that is similar to a television that is not tuned to any station Original Medium 1 Add an Add Noise plug in to an event For more information see Adding a video effects plug in on page 194 The Video FX window appears with the keyframe controller at the bottom of the window 2 Add two keyframes to the event for a total of three including the one at the beginning New keyfr
327. or output deck These two source decks were commonly referred to as the A and B rolls In Vegas a video track can be configured to display an A and a B roll which appear as sub tracks The concept is extended further in Vegas to include a Transition roll between the A and B rolls For more information see Understanding track layers on page 212 Ruler The ruler is the area above the tracks that shows the horizontal axis units Sample The word sample is used in many different and often confusing ways when talking about digital sound Here are some of the different meanings e A discrete point in time which a sound signal is divided into when digitizing For example an audio CD ROM contains 44 100 samples per second Each sample is really only a number that contains the amplitude value of a waveform measured over time e A sound that has been recorded in a digital format used by musicians who make short recordings of musical instruments to be used for composition and performance of music or sound effects These recordings are called samples In this manual we try to use sound file instead of sample whenever referring to a digital recording e The act of recording sound digitally i e to sample an instrument means to digitize and store it Sample Rate The sample rate also referred to as the sampling rate or sampling frequency is the number of samples per second used to store a sound High sample rates such as 44 100 Hz provi
328. or renaming a bus a a Every bus that appears in the Mixer window has an editable name 1 Double click the bus name fm Me pe 5 E 0 eE 2 Enter a new name 418 3 Press to save the name 1 L j Assigning audio tracks to busses If your project contains multiple busses you may assign a track to a specific bus Multiple audio busses are only available in Vegas Video 1 Click the Bus button W on the track header to display a drop down list of available busses This button appears only if the project contains multiple busses For more information see Adding busses to a project on page 153 CHP 9 USING THE MIXER 156 2 From the drop down list choose the bus for the track s output S 2 ai Voiceover E Oo 8 do Kl D Vol 00de Master Microsoft Sound Mapper Pan ee Bus 4 Microsoft Sound Mapper Select a bus Bus B Microsoft Sound Mapper K for playback Adjusting a bus send level You can adjust the level of a track that is sent to a bus using the multipurpose slider in the track header Each bus send level is preset to inf dB mute by default 1 Click the label on the multipurpose slider and choose a bus from the 3 uus 5 g menu Wol OOdB 2 Drag the slider to adjust the level of the track sent to the bus ee Note Bus sends are pre volume by default To change to post volume right click the multipurpose slider and choose Post Volume from the shortcut menu e
329. ormat used on Macintosh computers Sonic Foundry Audio Sfa Sonic Foundry proprietary uncompressed format that should only be used for compatibility with other Sonic Foundry applications Sonic Foundry Perfect pca Sonic Foundry proprietary lossless audio compression format Clarify Audio Sonic Foundry Wave 64 w64 Sonic Foundry proprietary Wave64 audio file that does not have a limited file size unlike Windows WAV files that are limited to 2GB TARGA tga True color lossless image format that supports alpha channel transparency TFE if Tagged Image File Format a common bitmap format You must have QuickTime installed to use TIFF files in Vegas Video for Windows avi Standard audio video format used on Windows based computers Wave Microsoft wav Standard audio format used on Windows based computers Wave Scott Studios wav Standard audio format used with Scott Studios systems Windows Bitmap omp Standard graphic format used on Windows based computers Windows Media Audio wma The Microsoft audio only format used to create files for streaming or downloading via the Web Windows Media Format wmyv The Microsoft standard used for streaming audio and video media via the Web CHP 3 GETTING STARTED 68 r Previewing a media file You may preview files before placing them in your project The Explorer window has a mini transport bar with Play Stop and Auto Preview buttons ERE When you preview a file its stream is sent to the
330. oundry Color Curves m Sonic Foundry Convolution K emel m Sonic Foundry Cookie Cutter m Sonic Foundry Deform 2 Drag and drop a plug in from the window onto one of the following locations The mouse cursor changes B to indicate when you can drop the plug in e file in the Media Pool event e track header or empty section of a track e Video Preview window video output effects Working with video effects plug in chains Modify the effect in the Video FX window and close the window when you are finished For help on the different controls in the Video FX window click the Plug In Help button to access online help Plug ins can be used in chains of two or more for even greater flexibility A plug in chain is a sequence of all of the plug ins to be applied to a media file event track or project The same plug in can be added to a chain more than once Use the same steps to add additional plug ins to a chain as you use to add a single plug in For more information see Adding a video effects plug in on page 194 After the plug in chain is created the video is processed by each plug in in order The plug ins are cumulative so in some cases you may want to rearrange their order to achieve the desired effect CHP 13 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 196 gt To view and work with a plug in chain click the Video FX button g for the event track Media Pool file or Video Preview window to open the Video F
331. p of the timeline You may use the time selection bar for playing back a smaller portion of your project or to apply cross track edits Only the events within the time selection are affected by edits or played back Unless an event is locked a selected time range affects all events or portions of events that occur within the range Dragging to select a time range 1 Position the mouse pointer above the ruler on the marker seh bar The mouse pointer changes to a left right arrow cursor Re 2 Drag to select a region All events or portions of events within the region are highlighted 3 Drag the yellow handles on either end of the time selection to increase or decrease your time range selection SS ee Note You may move the entire selection mian E aha range by dragging the time selection bar EE Selecting a time range during playback 1 Click the Play or the Play From Start 1 button to begin playback 2 Press 1 or I where you want the time selection to begin 3 Press 0 or where you want the time selection to end 4 Click the Stop button 271 to stop playback CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 86 y gt Using shortcuts for time selections These shortcuts can speed up the process of making precise time selections Description Set time selection duration equal to an event s duration Extend selection to the end of the currently selected event edge Extend selection to the
332. pace In the list of transition effects on the left side of the window click Iris Locate the Diamond Out Center preset for the Iris transition an KR W N Drag the Diamond Out Center transition preset to the crossfade between the beach event and the fireweed event The Video Event FX window appears The Iris transition is set up with the preset you selected CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS 48 6 Click the Close button J to close the Video Event FX window The new transition replaces the crossfade between the two events Dragging the The completed transition to the transition crossfade Summary In this section a second video track with six new video events was added to the project The events were arranged such that they overlapped each other by about one second This created an automatic crossfade at each of the overlapping sections The final duration of all of the events was made to equal the duration of the musicbed event Finally one of the crossfades was replaced with an Iris transition effect Here s what the project should look like so far 00 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 10 00 00 15 _ Fs a Y 00 00 20 00 00 25 z 5 Overlay titles 05_overlay veg Taali CS In this step we will insert some logos or titles into the beginning and ending of the project Repositioning the project The core of the project the voiceover music and background video is finish
333. pboard r eke ees f ot Trimming a time and event selection 1 Select the events to be trimmed 2 Select a time range For more information see Selecting events and a time range on page 86 3 Press Ctri T or from the Edit menu choose Trim Only the portion of selected events outside the time selection is trimmed Unselected events remain The time information space between events is not removed Events before trim Clipboard contents Events after trim Trimmed information is not placed on the Clipboard ff HR foley CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 94 r Splitting events Vegas allows you to create multiple independently functioning events from a single event by splitting it Splitting creates a new ending point for the original event and creates a starting point for the newly created event Splitting an event does not alter the original media The original media file s information is there but omitted for playback based on where the event s starting or ending point occurs on the timeline One event Split position When split the two new events are flush against one another Two events after split The two events can be moved independently Splitting an event The two new events can be moved independently 1 Select the event to be split To split multiple events use the key the Shift key or the Selection Edit Tool gt to select the events For more information see Sel
334. ping APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING 264 r RAM usage You could be gapping because Windows virtual memory is being used Virtual memory is a method used by Windows to write information to your hard drive to make room in physical RAM This process uses a lot of your computer s resources Try the following to optimize RAM usage e Exit all background applications not in use e Adjust the playback buffering slider on the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog Adjust this slider as low as possible However be aware that setting it too low may cause gaps as well e Mute Solo some of the events or tracks in the mix e Add more RAM to your computer Disk usage You may experience gapping when data is not being read off the hard drive fast enough Try the following to optimize disk usage e Fully defragment your audio hard drives regularly e Split audio usage between different physical hard drives not just different partitions of the same drive e Run fewer events simultaneously It is not how many tracks you have in the project but how many different events are playing simultaneously that matters e Make sure that you trim out any silent sections of events to minimize the wasted disk access e Use hard drives with fast seek times and spindle speeds of 7200 RPM or greater SCSI drives usually have better prolonged data transfer performance than IDE drives Under Windows XP and 2000 Vegas can take advantage of SCSI asynchronous reads which c
335. play window may be docked in the window docking area Docked position Floating window Docked in window docking area Time Display 00 01 36 10 U 00 01 36 10 Time Display Mixer Ruler The ruler is the timeline for your project You may specify how the ruler measures time seconds measures and beats frames etc For more information see Changing the ruler format on page 251 00 00 10 Marker bar The marker bar is the area where markers and regions may be placed named and positioned along the project s timeline These informational tags can serve as cues or reminders highlighting important events in your project For more information see Adding project markers and regions on page 100 Overlay Overlay2 Overlays ZHP an over Command bar The command bar displays when you add a command to your project Commands add metadata to media files to create effects such as closed captioning For more information see Adding project markers and regions on page 100 TEST To be or not to be TEST that is the question URL http fiwww sonichoundry com INTRODUCTION CHP 1 rn OA CD layout bar The CD layout bar displays tracks and indices in an audio CD layout project for disc at once DAO CD burning For more information see Burning Audio CDs on page 169 Track 1 Anywhere but somewhere Track 2 Glass of punch Track 3 Sad but untrue Track 4 So what Track list This area identifie
336. presents the degree of rotation relative to 0 which is straight up The smaller hand shows the number of times the crop area has been rotated through 360 720 360 x 2 CHP 12 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 190 r Adding animation Keyframe animation dramatically increases the variety of panning zooming and rotating effects you can create using the Event Pan Crop window A later chapter provides examples of zooming in on a still image and using pan and scan techniques For more information see Animating event panning and cropping on page 216 The tutorial at the beginning of this manual uses the Event Pan Crop window to create a scrolling effect For more information see 6 Pan Crop motion 06_panning veg on page 52 Working with still images Still images can be used in Vegas for a number of purposes including slide shows overlay graphics and titles You can insert still images into projects just like any other media files The default length for a still image event when it is first added to a track is five seconds this is an adjustable preference but this duration can be modified by dragging the edges to create a still image event of any length Images cannot be looped but share many characteristics with video files including transparency In addition you can use many of the same tools on image events that you can on video events such as track motion panning and cropping and video effects plug ins For more inform
337. properties for each file The information is organized into a table format You can customize the information displayed e Reorder columns fields by dragging the column label to a new position e Hide a column by dragging the column label off of the Media Pool window To display a hidden column right click the Media Pool choose View from the shortcut menu and choose the column name from the submenu e Sort the files in the Media Pool according to a category by clicking the column label for that category e Use the Comments field to add your own annotations to a file s entry in the Media Pool Double click the field to enter text This information is saved with the project and is not saved with the media file itself GETTING STARTED CHP 3 L D9 CHP 3 Adding media to the Media Pool 1 Click the Import Media button in the Media Pool The Import Media dialog appears 2 Navigate to and select a media file to add to the Media Pool You can use the key or key to select multiple files 3 Click Open The media file is added to the Media Pool Adding media to the Media Pool from an existing project 1 From the File menu choose Open The Open dialog appears 2 Navigate to and select a project that uses media files to add to the Media Pool You can use the Shift key or key to select multiple project files 3 Click the Merge media from Vegas project files into current project check box 4 Click OK The media files fr
338. pt the synchronizing Instead files are automatically named and saved according to your preferences eS Recording into a time selection By making a time selection you specify where along the timeline to record The time selection also determines how long Vegas records Any selected events that occur within the time selection are split and the recorded data is placed into the time selection For more information see Recording into an event with a time selection on page 164 00 00 15 00 Recorded waveform Vegas displays the event s waveform as it is recorded and automatically stops recording when the cursor reaches the end of the time selection Recording into an event By recording into an event you automatically create a new take containing the recorded material that is the same duration as the selected event The edges of the selected event serve as the punch in and out points that Vegas uses for recording Recording into an event allows you to establish a pre roll before recording which gives you time to prepare before recording starts Because Vegas saves the entire recording to the media file not just the material between the edges of the take you are not limited to the recorded material contained in the length of the new take You can adjust the edges of the event or slip the contents of the event if necessary For more information see Shifting the contents of slipping an event on page 95 The existing event th
339. ptions Help overlay track ae es Pa e a a a Oemma T T TNT E Kc gana E l 1 1 1 E E E E E O E 00 00 15 00 BARR n ee a a OO OO 00 00 24 Overlay oath i l a i Overlay track L 2 ra L ap Level 100 D A Background track BI Background fy sdo 0 o qp Level 100 0 P The following table shows how these two sample tracks are blended using each of the compositing modes Compositing mode Sample Description Add Adds the overlay color values to the background gt t Subtract Subtracts the overlay color values from the background Multiply Mask Multiplies the overlay color values by the background color values This makes overlay colors stronger and more present and results in a darker video image The opposite of this mode is Screen Source Alpha Uses the alpha channel to determine transparency in the overlay x This compositing mode is based on the alpha channel characteristics of an er event or media file If no alpha channel is present in the overlay the Source _ Alpha compositing mode has no effect Cut Cuts out the overlay color values from the background Screen Multiplies the inverse of the overlay color values with the background color values This makes overlay colors weaker and less present and results in a lighter video image The opposite of this mode is Multiply CHP 13 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 202 Compositing mode Sample Descripti
340. r Summary Aucio CD Many popular formats are included but you should Template NTSC OV 200 23570 w e oe consult your hardware manuals if you have any Width 720 Field order Lower field first lt questions You can also save your own custom Height 460 Pixel aspect ratio 10 9091 NTSC DY template S Frame rate 23 970 NTSC lt e Match Media Settings Allows you to set your Ro a file of your choosing Prerendered files folder e Width and Height Sets the frame size of your final C PROGRAM FILES SONIC FOUNDRYWEGAS 2 0 Browse movie Free storage space in selected folder 3 293 6 Megabytes Field order Video that 15 displayed One television S T Start all new projects with these settings Advanced interlaced This means that every frame of video is actually composed of two fields each of which is made Cancel rob up of half of the lines that make the final frame These two fields are woven together in alternate lines but which of the two fields is displayed first can be important Choose None Progressive for video to be viewed on a computer monitor For DV output choose Lower Field First If the output is jittery or shaky or your hardware s manual specifies it choose Upper Field First For more information see Interlacing and field order on page 267 e Pixel aspect ratio Computers display pixels as squares 1 0 Televisions display individual pixels as rectangles 0 9091 NTSC DV D1 1 0926 P
341. r selection area that spans both blue and red colors would make very large sections of an overlay transparent It is possible to use multiple Chroma Keyer plug ins on a single event keying out the blues with one and the reds with the other without keying out any colors between blue and red CHP 13 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 13 211 9 Adding Video Transitions and Motion One of the most fun and exciting aspects of editing video on a computer is adding special effects When you combine all of the transitions filters and motion generators Vegas has an almost unlimited variety of effects Transitions are customizable in Vegas Video Vegas Video LE provides standard presets only Understanding basic transitions Transitions occur between two video events Most professional productions on television or on the big screen use only two types of transitions The first is a simple cut where one scene immediately cuts to the other without delay or effects The other is a fade otherwise known as a crossfade or a dissolve Cuts A cut is actually not a transition Instead the last frame from an event is immediately followed by the first frame of the next event This is what happens with two adjacent events on the Vegas timeline either in the same track or in different tracks This can also happen when an event is punched into another with fade edge edits turned off
342. r changes Confirm media file deletion when still in use Double click on media file loads into Trimmer instead of tracks Show Trimmer history with file name first then folder Automatically save Trimmer markers and regions with media file Show progress in Video Preview window while rendering Save active prerenders on project close Close media files when not the active application Enable multimedia keyboard support Render large Wave files as Wave64 Automatically name regions and markers if not playing Ignore third party DV codecs Use Microsoft DV codec Strictly conform to AVI2 specification Disable multi processor DV rendering Create project file backups veg bak Use Net Notify to stay informed about Sonic Foundry products Enable autosave Use linear scrub range Allow Ctrl drag cursor style scrub over events Make spacebar and F12 Play Pause instead of Play Stop Always draw marker lines Build 8 bit peak files Disable pop up animations Recently used project list Temporary files folder Description Allows you to undo changes made in the FX Transition Event Pan Crop and Track Motion windows When deleting media in the Explorer or Media Pool Vegas warns you if any events in the project are using these files The default Explorer double click behavior is to insert an event at the cursor position on the timeline Select this option to open the media file in the Trimmer instead The Trimmer his
343. r exclude events from a selection area by holding the key and clicking an event The most common mode of mpa oe E 0 operation is to select events by clicking them Clee 100 0 l B while in Normal Edit mode which is the default Selected events editing mode Click the Normal Edit Tool button p 24 O S s de evel Of E HF or from the Edit menu choose Editing a ia oro Tools and the choose Normal to switch back to E Bow 1 this mode A Vol OOd Pan Cenere l Selecting nonadjacent events EKI 2 8 WS 0 Vol 0d ef 1 Hold the key Pan Centers l 2 Select the events by clicking them To T areni deselect an event simply click it again to toggle the event selection on or off Selecting a range of events 1 Hold the key 2 Click the first event that you want to select 3 Click the last event that you want to select All events between the first and last selected events are highlighted and selected Selecting a block of events 1 On the toolbar click the Selection Edit Tool F41 2 Position the cursor in a corner of the area that you want to select 3 Click and hold the left mouse button 4 Drag the cursor to the opposite corner of the area you want to select A rectangle is drawn on the workspace All events within this rectangle are selected To deselect individual events in the middle of a selection area hold the key while clicking the events To deselect all of the events click a
344. r redoes the last undo performed Repeatedly using the keyboard command or toolbar button continues redoing undos in reverse order from most recent to oldest In addition you may redo the last edit by choosing it from the Edit menu Redoing a series of edits The redo history may be viewed by clicking the arrow on the right side of the Redo button H on the toolbar revealing a drop down list composed of previously undone edits The top item is the most recent undo edit If you redo a specific edit that appears farther down the list all subsequent edits above it are redone as well When you redo an edit or a series of edits they are added to the undo history again The redo history is cleared when a new edit is performed Clearing the edit history You may clear both undo and redo histories without closing your project or exiting Vegas Once the histories have been cleared Vegas begins creating a new edit history as you continue working on the project While clearing the edit history is not usually necessary it can free up disk space To clear the edit history from the Edit menu choose Clear Edit History CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 100 r Adding project markers and regions Vegas provides several types of project markers that identify parts of your project serve as cues and provide additional functionality e Markers points that you mark along the project s timeline They are typically used to mark locations in the pro
345. r to eliminate clipping Adjusting bus volume You may adjust a bus s volume during project playback by dragging the handles on the fader The fader on a stereo bus is split so that you can adjust the levels of the two stereo channels independently The faders are locked ganged so that the left and right channels of stereo files move together Click the Lock Unlock Fader Channels button 1 to unlock or lock the faders You can also hold while dragging a fader to temporarily override a fader s locked or unlocked state A Note Double click the fader to reset it to 0 0 dB If you have set each channel independently double click either the left or right fader to have the other fader match the other s volume setting EE You may adjust the volume of several busses simultaneously by selecting the busses and adjusting any of their faders If you select an assignable effect along with the busses the output fader of the assignable effect moves along with the bus volume faders Changing bus meter resolution You may select a meter resolution at which a bus displays the signal levels that are being mixed When you change the meter resolution on this control the other meters assignable effects and preview are automatically changed to match 1 Right click the meter to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose a meter resolution USING THE MIXER CHP 9 L 1 BB Adjusting a bus for clipping If the volume level is
346. rack choosing Fade Colors from the shortcut menu and choosing Top or Bottom from the submenu Composite Level envelopes and Fade to Color envelopes are only available in Vegas Video Adding track envelopes CHP 7 You may add any type of envelope by following the same basic steps 1 Select the track where you want to add the track envelope Multiple tracks may be selected 2 From the Insert menu choose either Audio Envelopes or Video Envelopes and then choose the type of envelope you want to add from the submenu lt Fade to Color envelope EXI Voiceover E 2 6 A R 7 7 Val Od vd a uad a Pan envelope Be a alll a Alternately right click an empty area of a track choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and choose an envelope type from the submenu WORKING WITH TRACKS 138 y Adding envelope points Once an envelope is placed you may add points to it These points are used to edit the envelope line in order to automate the control 1 Place the mouse pointer on the envelope s line gt EST Huas CUT TT TRER TRIER Y Oo j The pointer changes to a hand icon dm es dE 2 Right click and choose Add Point from the v Linear Fade shortcut menu or double click to add an S figs Slow Fade envelope point A square point appears on the ehed envelope line Sharp Fade Select All Deleting envelope points Reset All Points may be deleted by right clicking the point and choosing De
347. raphic Dynamics A Fes Packages Aa Sonic Foundry Distortion Fe Sonic Foundry Graphic EG eo Track Optimized F Hi Sonic Foundry Dither WS onic Foundry Mult Barnd Dynamics Hl Video Y Sonic Foundry Express Amplitude Modulation We Sonic Foundry Mult Tap Delay Y Sonic Foundry Express Chorus Fe Sonic Foundry Moise Gate Y Sonic Foundry Express Delay WS Sonic Foundry Paragraphic EQ Y Sonic Foundry ExpressFs Distortion WS Sonic Foundry Parametric EL Y Sonic Foundry ExpressFs Equalization WS onic Foundry Pitch Shift Y Sonic Foundry ExpressF Flange ah ah We Sonic Foundry Reverb Y Sonic Foundry Expresses Reverb FS onic Foundry Simple Delay Y Sonic Foundry ExpressFs Stutter WS onic Foundry Smooth Enhance L L INTRODUCTION 90 p AA Keyboard command reference Project file commands These commands refer to the overall project Description Keys Create new project Ctrl N Open existing project or media file Ctrl 0 Save project Ctrl S Open project s properties Alt Enter Window view commands These commands display the dockable windows included with Vegas Description Keys Description Focus to track view Alt 0 Transitions Explorer Alt 1 Video FX Trimmer Alt 2 Text Backgrounds Mixer Alt 3 Plug ins Edit Details Alt 4 Next window Media Pool Alt 5 Previous window Video Preview Alt 6 Toggle focus between track list and timeline Playback and preview commands Keys Alt 7 Alt 8 Alt 9 Ctrl Alt 1 F6 or Ctrl Tab Shift
348. rated Media button M on each event to view the generator ca eee FP 2 6 E B Z z settings You can view other generated media options in the Text m Backgrounds window For more information see Using generated media on page 198 Pacific Transitions The crossfade between the final two events on track 4 was replaced with a Push transition Right click the transition and choose Transition Properties ib oo a fo from the shortcut menu to view the transition settings You can view other transition options in the Transitions window For more information see Using transition effects on page 211 Z Selective prerendering and dynamic RAM previewing You can prerender the project to see the project at full NTSC size and frame rate From the Tools menu choose Selectively Prerender Video If you do not prerender you may have a slower frame rate depending on your workstation For more information see Prerendering video on page 231 You can also build a dynamic RAM preview to increase the quality of your preview by pressing Shift B For more information see Building dynamic RAM previews on page 232 Web spot with captioning This project creates the same short spot as the TV spot but renders it as streaming media content for Web delivery Commands are used to create closed captioning and to open a browser window to a URL Commands Command Properties EE The first five commands generate closed c
349. rganize the media files that are being used by a project The information about these files is displayed in a highly flexible database that can be instantly sorted The Media Pool can also be used to apply effects and plug ins to media files and can be used to set the specific properties of these files For more information see Using the Media Pool on page 68 Jal E del gt ok A 1 8401 85703 T rack8 4 beached did B boat a l Cube Clip 001 avi G musicbed waw powderskier av Sonic Foundry Color E Video 2209240924 29 970 fps 00 00 05 06 Alpha None Field Order None progre Explorer Trimmer Media Pool Transitions Video Es 4 d Video Preview window Alt 6 This window displays a project s video during project editing and playback For more information see Previewing Video on page 229 Video appears during project playback or as the cursor is moved during editing Project 320x240432 30 00p Frame 2 878 Display at Project Size Preview 2209240922 30 00p Display 320240276 Video Preview ey ek Zh Preview Quality 579 Right click to change Video Preview settings s Defa ult Background Black Background White Background Display Square Pixels Show Toolbar i Show Status Bar INTRODUCTION 26 Transitions window Alt 7 The Transitions window contains all of the transitions available in Vegas The thumbnails display anim
350. rimmer window to do traditional three point and two point editing These editing techniques allow you to add smaller sections of files to the timeline Ripple edit mode affects how a selection is added to the timeline from the Trimmer When the Ripple Edits button W2 is selected on the toolbar adding a selection from the Trimmer selection affects the position of later events on the track When Vegas is not in ripple edit mode adding a selection from the Trimmer has no effect on other events For more information see Editing and ripple editing events on page 87 Adding selections at the cursor three point editing 1 Open a media file in the Trimmer 2 Make a time selection in the Trimmer 3 Select the track in the timeline where the selection will be added ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 5 117 4 Position the cursor in the timeline at either the start or end point where you want to add the selection 5 Add the selection to the timeline in one of the following ways e Click the Add Media from Cursor button Bi or press A on the keyboard to insert the event after the cursor e Click the Add Media up to Cursor button l or press A on the keyboard to insert the event before the cursor Alternately you can drag the selection from the oma Drag fromthe Ba to a project Trimmer to the timeline Trimmer track Ripple editing if enabled applies to clips inserted from the Trimmer For more information see Edi
351. ring 231 resolution 231 transitions 214 Printing video from the timeline 246 from Video Capture 245 Project playback entire 79 Vii media player 81 time selection 79 Project property settings 254 256 Audio CD tab 256 Audio tab 255 matching video settings of existing file 66 190 Ruler tab 255 Summary tab 256 Video tab 254 Projects 65 creating 65 renaming 67 rendering 239 saving 66 237 saving as EDLs 188 Properties events 124 media file 191 project 65 254 256 track defaults 137 Proxy files audio 267 Punch in 91 164 Q Quantizing to frames 109 Quick start 65 82 R RAM cache for previews 232 RealMedia rm commands 104 file format 82 240 Recapturing offline video clips 70 Recording 159 167 arming tracks 161 into a time selection 163 into an event 163 into an event with time selection 164 multiple takes 165 previewing takes 114 selecting track input devices 161 specifying storage folder 166 167 starting and stopping 162 stereo left right channel options 161 162 Red book CD burning 169 175 Redo Undo commands 98 99 clearing history 99 multiple 99 Region 101 Regions adding as takes 118 deleting 103 inserting 102 moving 102 naming 102 navigating to 103 selecting 102 Registering Vegas 17 Removing events from a group 129 plug ins 147 197 track envelopes 139 velocity envelopes 128 Renam
352. rinrass Bypass Preset jiu rititled a Move Aight Fass emove F2 0 dB Attack time sts lt s g Track Noise Gate Track EU Release time Track Compressor Threshold level lnf to 0 dE 3 Once the chain s plug ins are in the order that you want click anywhere outside the window to close it and save the new chain order ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS CHP 8 L 1 47 Arranging the plug in order from the Plug In Chooser dialog 1 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button 44 The appropriate FX window Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX appears 2 Click the Plug In Chain button 44 The Plug In Chooser dialog appears with the plug in chain displayed at the top 3 Rearrange the plug in order Drag a plug in to a new location in the chain or select a plug in and click either the Shift Plug In Left or Shift Plug In Right button 4 Once you arrange the plug ins in the order that you want click OK to save your changes and close the Plug In Chooser dialog Bypassing plug ins on the chain You may bypass plug ins on the chain by clearing the check box on a specific plug in or by right clicking the plug in and choosing Bypass from the shortcut menu The plug in remains bypassed until you enable it again Bypassing a plug in prevents it from being processed on the track or bus IZ Track EQ Track EQ Audio Plug in Effect enabled Effect bypassed Track 4 fly Track Noize Gat
353. rior to starting the synchronization process Video device tab External monitor support is only available in Vegas Video This tab allows you to identify an external video device for Vegas to communicate with The selected video device is used to display previews on an external monitor or to print directly from the timeline to DV tape For more information see Printing to DV tape on page 246 The connection between Vegas and the video device works with OHCI compliant IEEE 1394 DV capture cards and some MJPEG capture cards There are two cases where Vegas can play back to an external monitor One is when you have special hardware that has both computer and television monitor outputs The other is for OHCI compliant DV capture cards where DV data can be previewed out through your DV camcorder to an external monitor For more information see Using an external monitor on page 235 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS CHP 17 263 APPENDIX ww N i g Troubleshooting N Ki K B a Troubleshooting resources Visit the Sonic Foundry Web site to access product updates look for answers in the knowledge base contact customer support or participate in an online forum http www sonicfiotindry com Common questions Why are some of my DirectX plug ins not working correctly Vegas is a nondestructive time based editor As a result there are certain types of DirectX plug ins that perform poorly in Vegas These types of plug ins are rou
354. rn it on in VTR mode 2 Run Vegas 3 From the Options menu choose Preferences 4 Click the Video Device tab 5 Select your device from the Device list e g OHCI Compliant IEEE 1394 DV Vegas directs the output to the camcorder through the IEEE 1394 card You can preview this output on the camcorder s LCD screen or connect the camera to a television monitor to preview the output there Once you have verified that the external monitor settings are working correctly you can use it to preview your project Verifying the external monitor configuration 1 Click the Preview on External Monitor button H on the Video Preview window 2 Open a properly formatted AVI e g a DV AVI file in the Trimmer window in Vegas 3 Click the Play button in the Trimmer window to test the output This can be a complex hardware issue More detailed information is available at the Sonic Foundry Web site http www sonicfoundry com Support Productinfo OHCI asp For more information see Video device tab on page 262 PREVIEWING VIDEO CHP 15 237 CHAPTER Saving Rendering and Printing Projects JER r 2 Poli Re A i oer pe lt w Vegas allows you to save and render projects into many different multimedia formats When you render a Vegas project to a different format your project is not affected and a single project may be rendered in any number of different formats This chapter explains saving a project and usin
355. rocesses the left side of the status bar also contains information about the progress of the render The Video Preview window also has its own status bar that displays project specific information For more information see Understanding the Video Preview window on page 229 Scrub control The scrub control is used to play your project forward or Drag either forward or backward for editing purposes You may adjust playback speed Rate 0 0000 py Gibila mayan A by setting the speed control marker located beneath the scrub control For more information see Scrubbing on page 80 set playback speed Window docking area This area allows you to keep frequently used windows available but out of the way while you are working with a project To dock a window drag it to the docking area Windows can be docked next to each other subdividing the docking area or they can be docked in a stack When stacked each window has a tab at the bottom with its name on it Click the window s tab to bring it to the top Drag the handle on the left side of a docked window to remove a window from the docking area and float it Close window x Drag the handle away from the Expand window a docking area to float the window ege ZK Preview Quality ES p Venetian Blinds Horizontal Out White Border Vertical Out Black Horizontal In Black Horizontal Out immer Meda Pool Transitions VideoFX Text Backgrounds
356. roject you can mark the tracks in your project either automatically or manually CD layout OT Track markers Track 1 Glass of punch Track 2 Anywhere but somewhere Track 3 Can you see why 03 02 33 05 if CO Audio 2 SET E luani tise ill aaea naiiim K abla ni baL ad i LL Adding media as CD tracks to a new project You have a collection of completed audio files that you want to write to a CD Vegas can quickly assemble an audio CD layout project from sound files in the Media Pool You can add the tracks one at a time or use the Media Pool to sort them into track order and add them all at once 1 Create a new project in Vegas 2 Add all the media to be included in the project to the Media Pool For more information see Adding media to the Media Pool on page 69 3 To add all tracks at once use the following steps to sort the files into track order and choose Details from the menu The e In the Media Pool click the arrow on the Views button Media Pool changes to Details view e In the Comments column enter the track number for each media file 01 02 etc e Click the Comments column header to sort the list into track order e Select the sorted files in the Media Pool 4 Right click a media file or the selected media files and choose Add as CD Track from the shortcut menu Vegas adds the files to a new track and marks the audio CD tracks on the CD layout bar Vegas uses the name of the media file to
357. rol of creating and dragging edit points LY Note Event envelopes only affect an event Track envelopes affect the entire track For more information see Working with track envelopes on page 137 ae Using opacity envelopes Opacity envelopes set the overall opacity and allow you to fade video events in and out This affects the transparency of the event in relation to background events on lower tracks These background events can be other video events or background colors For more information see Using generated media on page 198 Setting a video event s opacity When you place the mouse pointer at the top of the event the pointer changes to a hand cursor d that you may use to lower the event s overall opacity 1 Place the mouse pointer at the top of the event 2 When you see the envelope cursor Ja drag the opacity line to the desired level As you drag the line down Vegas displays the event s opacity level WORKING WITH EVENTS a 2204032 79 972p S 20 Preview 2209240922 29 976 Display 220924091 CHP 6 a 1 27 Setting an event s fade in and out The event handles allow you to affect an video event s fade in and out opacity The type of curve that the event uses to control the fade in or out can also be changed 1 Place the mouse pointer on a handle upper corners of the event and the pointer changes to the envelope cursor 5 2 As you drag the cursor the opacity line appears Vegas
358. rom the Options menu choose Preferences to access the Preferences dialog On the CD Settings tab you can select the CD drive or set the speed at which you will burn the CD For more information see CD Settings tab on page 260 You can also enter the number of seconds Vegas adds between tracks when adding Media Pool files as CD tracks In the same Preferences dialog click the Editing tab and enter a value in the Default time between CD tracks box Finally you may want to turn off the Quantize to Frames command in the Options menu When quantizing to frames is active your edits are limited to the starting edge of frame boundaries In a CD layout project you can turn this feature off to allow greater precision in editing and track placement For more information see Quantizing to frames on page 109 Importing CD Architect files You can use Vegas to open projects created in Sonic Foundry CD Architect 1 From the File menu choose Open The Open dialog appears 2 Browse to the location of the project file 3 In the Files of tyoe drop down list select CD Architect Project Files cdp 4 Select the file 5 Click Open BURNING AUDIO CDS CHP 11 L 171 Creating audio CD layout projects Vegas provides several ways to create an audio CD layout project If you have a set of audio files you wish to burn to a CD you can add the files as tracks to a new audio CD layout project Or if you want to burn an audio CD from an existing p
359. roperly Customizing the rendering process v Using custom settings to render to streaming media formats is only available in Vegas Video Vegas Video LE requires you to select from several predefined templates Every media file format has different variables and controls Vegas has a number of templates that appear on the Render As dialog s Template drop down list to automatically configure a particular format for a particular destination You may also choose to create custom settings for your render by clicking the Custom button Once you have customized the settings you may create your own template so that you can reuse the custom settings at a later time CHP 16 SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 242 z Save in Media a El c E implosion avi L Sample Projects gl Mountains awi Vegas Projects in powderskier avi Aj Capital Dome avi i sunset awi d Cube Clip O01 avi ra talkinghead awi A fireweed avi rea traffic avl _ 0 THT S Selected rendering format t Save as type Video for Windows avi Cancel Click Custom to change Selected template Template NTSC DV lt Custom control settings and description gt Description Audio 48 KHz 16 bit Stereo PEM About or create delete uncompressed a template Video 29 97 fos 7209480 Lower field first E copr and tmin media with project T Render loop region only T Stretch video to fill
360. round not be used in the subject The most important factors in successful blue screening happen during shooting well before the footage is imported into Vegas Compression of the source video is also an important consideration While almost all video is compressed in some way highly compressed video does not key well because colors can be smeared together and edges tend to not be very sharp Magnified area If your source footage is good and the captured video file is also of high quality color keying is an easy process Uncompressed video 1 Insert a video with a blue or any solid colored background into a track This is the overlay video Compressed video 2 Insert the background video that will show through the blue areas into the next lower track _ SS 4 Note You do not need to set the lower track as a child track when using the Chroma Kever plug in as you would with a mask KR 3 Click the overlay video foreground higher track to select it 4 Drag a Chroma Keyer plug in from the Video FX window onto the overlay video The Video Event FX window displays 5 Click the Bypass All Video FX button on the Video Preview window This will bypass the effect of the Chroma Keyer plug in until you are ready to view the effect USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 13 209 6 In the Video Event FX window click the Eyedropper aan TT EE button 4 The cursor changes to an eyedropper icon 7 Draw
361. rt Assignable FX button adds an assignable effects chain to your project You can route tracks to the assignable effects chain pg 157 Ei The Insert Bus button adds a bus to your project You can route tracks or assignable effects chains to the bus pg 155 Using the Mixer Preview fader The Preview fader allows you to adjust the volume and monitor output levels of media files when you preview them from the Explorer window or Media Pool or play them back from the Trimmer window The Preview fader also controls the metronome volume For more information see Using the metronome on page 162 Viewing hiding the Preview fader SE Insert PX Insert Bus The Preview fader is hidden as a default to make more room for other busses and assignable effects chains To view or hide the Preview fader simply right click anywhere within the Mixer and choose Show Preview fader from the shortcut menu 44 100 Hz 16 bit Insert Assignable FX irl Hi Inzert Bus elete Delete i Distortion 54 43 OUT 6 4 6 1 Adjusting the Preview fader You may adjust the Preview fader while you are previewing a media file from the Explorer window Drag the fader up or down or hold the key while dragging to move in smaller increments Double click the fader to reset it You may select a preferred meter resolution at which the Preview fader displays the media file s volume level For more information see Changing bus me
362. rtion of your project make a time selection in the timeline 2 From the Tools menu choose Print Video to DV Tape The Conform Timeline to DV Format dialog appears Complete the following information e In the DV Template drop down list select the appropriate template for rendering your video or click Custom to select custom settings For more information see Customizing the rendering process on page 241 e To print just a portion of your project select the Render loop region only check box SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 16 e 247 3 Click Next The Leader and Trailer dialog appears Complete the following information e In the Leader section select a test pattern and indicate the test pattern and black duration that will precede the video To print without a test pattern or black leader enter O for the Duration value Select the Play 1 kHz tone with test pattern check box to include a tone in the leader e In the Trailer section indicate the duration of the black to follow the video To print without a trailer enter O for the Duration value Leader and Trailer SONIC FOUNDRY It ig recommended that you add at least a three second black leader and a three second black trailer when printing to a DY device This ensures that the entire selected timeline area will print to the DY device SMPTE Bars NTSC Leader test pattern style Test pattern duration seconds IZ Play 1 kHz tone with
363. s Close the disc so it can be used in an audio 8 PP E CD player No more tracks may be added to me f the disc after closing 2 Click the Add Audio button The approximate time Sano remaining for the writing process displays at the bottom of the dialog box Time needed for audio 3 minute s 39 seconds Time available on disc 5 minute s 9 seconds BURNING AUDIO CDS CHP 11 L 17 B 3 When the writing process is complete a confirmation message displays Click OK to clear the message en Note Do not click the Cancel button after the disc writing process has begun As with any CD creation process interrupting the writing process makes your disc unusable ee Closing a track at once CD 1 From the Tools menu choose Burn CD and choose Track at Once Audio CD from the submenu The Create CD dialog appears 2 Click the Close Disc button 3 When the disc is closed a confirmation message displays Click OK to clear the message Burning a disc 1 From the Tools menu choose Burn CD and choose Burn Disc at Dnce Audio CD Disc at O nce Audio CD from the submenu The Burn E oa m E Disc at Once Audio CD dialog appears S l l Burn CDs paes 2 Complete the information in the dialog C Test first then bum CDs l T Test only do not burn CDs If your project uses many tracks or effects rendering speed may be slower than a fast CD R drive burn speed Check the Prerender to
364. s When opening a project file veg for the first time Vegas may prompt you to find the media and relink it to the project All of the files will be read only when copied to your hard drive You will be unable to save changes to them unless you change their properties The finished project is called 09_velocity veg and looks like the illustration below The project is designed to highlight a few of the features of Vegas Video Some aspects of the project are fairly complex Use the map below to go to the tutorial section that explains a particular technique 5 Overlay titles 00 00 00 00 00 10 00 00 20 00 00 30 00 00 40 ih pp yp pp fa pl feet l l vl vl vl l ed d dl dl tt l tt d L x 6 Pan Crop motion T Fades 1 2 Voiceover 8 Track Motion narration and editing 3 Music bed 4 Background i R A Za 7 il p i ROH d 19 video 5 id TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS CHP 2 a 37 1 Voiceover narration 01_voiceover veg The first section of this project is a talking head video that contains the main message The quality of the audio in the source video talkinghead avi is poor and needs to be replaced with a new voiceover voiceover wav recorded in a studio The finished project can be used as a reference 09_velocity veg Creating a new Vegas project You may set the properties of a project when you first create it O
365. s music beds audio tracks and special effects Organization is a critical issue in this process In Vegas organization is handled by a small project file VEG that saves information about source file locations edits cuts insertion points transitions and special effects This project file is not a multimedia file but is instead used to create render the final file when editing is finished The advantage Vegas offers is not just organization however but the fact that Vegas edits a project file and not the original source files When you copy cut paste trim and otherwise edit your project the process is nondestructive You can edit without worrying about corrupting your source files This not only gives you a strong sense of security but it also gives you the freedom to experiment 1 From the File menu choose New The New Project dialog appears _ 4 Note The first time you run Vegas a new project will automatically be started for you OE E 2 Enter your project settings on the various tabs For more information see Working with project properties on page 254 e Video Select the format and other video parameters New Project ME e Audio Set up the basic audio settings Video Audio Ruler Summary Audio CD e Ruler Choose the way the ruler is delineated beats Template NTSC DV 720x480 29 970 fps Ja xl seconds etc e Summary Enter any rel
366. s 1 and 2 use the Border plug in to create a beveled edge effect Click the Track FX button 44 on the track headers to view the effect settings For more information see Using video effects on page 193 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS CHP 2 l D 3 Track motion Video Fr v jew E Tracks 1 and 2 use the Track Motion window to move video clips across the screen Click the Track Motion button H in the track headers to view the track motion settings In the Track Motion window click each keyframe in the keyframe controller to view its settings You can experiment with the settings to change the video placement or rate of movement or you can add shadow or glow for additional effect For more information see Adding track motion on page Ae Project 7209480922 29 971 Frame 95 Preview 360240832 29 976 Display 360240816 CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS 64 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS CHP 2 65 CHAPTER ae Se Pad e a f T e Getting Started d d ea Vegas is a new way of creating multimedia productions Whether you are an experienced multimedia author or a budding novice the powerful features and capabilities of Vegas are organized to increase your creativity and productivity The following chapter summarizes the basic functions and operations of Vegas Creating projects The process of creating a multimedia production can be a complicated undertaking involving hundreds of shots takes voiceover
367. s FX or Assignable FX appears 2 Click the Plug In Chain button 48 The Plug In Chooser dialog appears with the package in the chain area 3 Add delete rearrange or change the settings of plug ins in the package chain 4 Click OK or press to save the new settings a 4 Note Click the Save As button to save the newly edited chain as a package eK ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS CHP 8 a A K 49 Organizing your plug ins Plug in Choose ea 2 x 2 S rack Noize Gate Track Compressor ot ete OF Within the Plug in Chooser dialog you may Oo T T create folders to organize the plug ins This is useful if third party DirectX plug ins are installed on your computer You may then move these plug ins to the newly created folders _ FX Packages ty Sonic Foundry Amplitude Modulation Y Sonic Foundry Chorus Y Sonic Foundry Distortion Y Sonic Foundry Dither Y Sonic Foundry Express Amplitude Modulation k H oe h aes 9 mn D O a Applying non real time event effects Non real time event effects are a different method of applying audio effects in Vegas In all other cases event editing in Vegas is nondestructive meaning that edits and effects are applied to events in real time and not to the source media files which remain unaltered There may be times however when you want to create a permanent file using an effect or effects This may be useful in a very complicated project or when a slower compu
368. s an undo history of the changes that you have performed Each time you undo something that change is placed in the redo history When you close the project or exit Vegas both the undo and redo histories are cleared Using undo Pressing Ctrl Z or clicking the Undo button on the toolbar reverses the last edit performed Repeatedly using the keyboard command or toolbar button continues undoing edits in reverse order from most recent to oldest In addition you may undo the last edit by choosing it from the Edit menu BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L 09 Undoing a series of edits You can undo a series of edits by using the drop down list on the Undo button 1 Click the arrow to the right of the Undo button 2 From the drop down list choose the edit that you want to undo Items above it subsequent edits are selected automatically Vegas restores your project to the state prior to those edits Move Event Use the mouse Split Event Track Name Change to select Track Name Change a series of edits Undo 1 Action Undo 4 Actions When you undo an edit or a series of edits they are added to the redo history This feature allows you to restore your project to a previous state _ Note From the Edit menu choose Undo All to undo all edits in the history All edits are undone and added to the redo history EE lt lt Using redo Pressing ctri Shift Z or clicking the Redo button on the toolba
369. s dialog 1 From the File menu choose Properties The Project Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Audio tab to display the project s audio properties Project Properties 71 x Video Audio Ruler Summary Audio cD Humber of sterea busses E Sample rate Hz jaio Bit depth 16 M Resample quality Good Recorded files folder Free storage space in selected folder 337 0 Megabytes Path where recorded media source files are written and stored Start all new projects with these settings 3 Click the Browse button The Recorded Files Folder dialog appears 4 Browse for the location where you want Vegas to save recorded files 5 Click OK You can select Start all new projects with these settings in the Project Properties one ee eee dialog to store recorded media source files to the same location in every new project CHP 10 RECORDING AUDIO RECORDING AUDIO CHP 10 169 ET Burning Audio CDs a Fij You created your audio project in Vegas and now you are ready to write the project to a CD With the CD burning capabilities of Vegas you can place and arrange audio files to produce professional audio CDs You can burn CDs for multiple or single track projects and build audio CD layouts automatically or manually CD burning is only available in Vegas Video Understanding track at once and disc at once Vegas provides two ways of recording audio to a CD R disc track at once and disc
370. s option is available for projects being mixed for multiple stereo busses For more information see Assigning audio tracks to busses on page 155 Prepares a track for recording You may record directly into audio tracks A track is ready when you see the recording meter appear on it For more information see Arming the track for recording on page 161 Inverts the audio track at its baseline in effect reversing its polarity For more information see Phase inverting a track audio only on page 136 Adds track effects plug ins For more information see Using audio effects on page 143 Temporarily disables playback of the track so that you can focus on other tracks For more information see Muting a track on page 136 Isolates a track for playback by muting the other tracks For more information see Soloing a track on page 1 36 Controls the audio track volume relative to the other tracks Drag the fader left or right to adjust the volume For more information see Using the volume fader audio only on page 1 34 Controls several features including track panning bus send levels and assignable effects send levels Select what the slider controls by clicking the label button Each item s slider position is independent from the others For more information see Using the multipurpose slider audio only on page 134 CHP 3 L 79 Viewing playbacks and previews Vegas allows you to play back your project in two ways directly from t
371. s the track order in your project and contains controls used to determine track compositing and mixing For more information see Using the track header on page 77 Track minimize and maximize 1 amp Ovely B sh oR J Selected track Parent child BES video By otk i O vie aaa compositing F Level 10010 B control 7 Track number EMT voiceoves Qf kr Hd vo 3008 el Audio track Pan Cener l Track view All arranging and editing is done in the track view or timeline This area contains all of a project s events For more information see Using the track view on page 75 a A Ta i a ee eS 15 79 PATIA TH TRT ONT 11 TS ELE AATE Pa en Li 4 DL RIP TH Pr FR d i m uit al P a KST R Hr SR VIa WL aR l dak sad li ol TE T E EE E LAMA al Transport bar controls CHP 1 The transport bar contains the playback and cursor positioning buttons frequently used while working on and previewing your project Sa gt gt m N 21 Record into track Pause project playback Loop playback Stop playback Play from beginning of project Move cursor to start of project Play project from cursor position SIS RS SSR S Move cursor to end of project INTRODUCTION 22 Status bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the main program window and displays Record Time 05 45 20 information about roughly how much space is left on your computer to record audio Record Time During the rendering p
372. s to a new track 141 video tracks 199 Mouse scroll wheel shortcuts 32 75 83 MTC See MIDI timecode Multimedia CDs 249 Multiple takes previewing 114 recording 165 selecting among 113 Multipurpose slider 78 134 assignable effects send level 135 157 bus send level 135 156 panning 135 264 Muting all audio or video tracks 136 busses 155 events 121 mute button 77 78 tracks 136 N Naming busses 155 CD layout markers 173 markers 101 regions 102 takes 115 tracks 132 Non real time event effects 149 Normal Edit Tool 84 Normalize audio event 122 O OHCI 1394 IEEE cards 15 69 189 236 245 246 262 271 Online help 17 accessing 17 icon 17 via the web 18 What s This help 18 Optimizing previews 230 234 Ordering of effects 146 196 INDEX vi gt H Organizing tracks 132 133 Overlays animating 226 compositing modes 200 flipping 227 position 225 rotating 227 safe areas 232 shadow 225 transparency 208 Panning audio envelope 137 multipurpose slider 135 panning models 135 Panning video 218 pan and scan effect 219 still images 61 Parent child tracks 199 203 Pasting events 90 91 paste insert 91 paste repeat 91 Perfect Clarity pca audio format 240 Phase inverting events 122 tracks 136 Picture in picture effect 225 Pitch shifting 111 Pixel aspect ratio 190 custom stream properties 192 render sett
373. s you to use a default metronome sound or to select custom sound files to be used as the metronome beats CUSTOMIZING VEGAS CHP 17 e 280 Advanced audio preferences You may access advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button The Advanced Audio Preferences dialog appears This dialog contains two tabs Hardware and Record Latency The Hardware tab displays all of the audio devices that are installed on your computer and allows you to set the controls for each device The Record Latency tab allows you to automatically or manually adjust for latency in sound cards The following table describes each of the controls Tab Control Description Hardware _ Interpolate position During project playback you may notice that the cursor position is different than what you are hearing This problem stems from inaccuracies in some audio devices Select this control s check box to have Vegas attempt to compensate for the inaccuracies by interpolating the cursor s correct position during playback or recording Hardware Position bias The position bias control gives you additional cursor control when it is inaccurately displayed during project playback and recording If you have enabled the Interpolate position control and are still experiencing cursor position inaccuracies move the Position bias control forward or backward to compensate for the inaccuracies of the audio device Hardware Do not pre roll buffers before When this option is not selected
374. saves the project file and the related media files to the location you specified SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 16 27379 Autosaving a project Vegas automatically saves a backup copy of your project every five minutes If your system crashes Vegas prompts you to open the backup file the next time you start the program Backup files are saved in the location specified in the Temporary files folder box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog Files are saved with the autosave veg extension and are deleted when you close Vegas If you prefer not to autosave your project you can clear the Enable autosave check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog Vegas also creates veg bak files in your project folder when you save a project to allow you to return to the project s last saved state Creation of veg bak files is independent of autosaving Rendering a project 6 Select any check boxes as needed Rendering refers to the process of converting the Vegas project into a single new multimedia file and formatting it for the desired playback method media player Internet streaming media CD ROM video tape etc The project file is not overwritten deleted or altered during the rendering process You may return to the original project to make edits or adjustments and render it again later Rendering a video file can take quite a bit of time depending on the complexity of your project the speed of your CPU an
375. set too high it may cause clipping The clipping is displayed on a meter in red at the top with the clipping value displayed in decibels dB Adjust the fader control and click the red area with the clipping value to reset the meter Continue to adjust the fader and reset the meter until clipping is eliminated The meter can be set to remember and display the highest and lowest levels by right clicking and selecting Hold Peaks and Hold Valleys Clipping signal Click the clipping Adjusted fader Right click to reset clip with dB value indicator to reset and Reset meter change meter resolution the meter and set the meter to hold peaks and valleys 12 to U dB 24 to U dE 42 to U dB B0 to U dE F0 to U dE 30 to dE 120 to 0 dB Show Labels Hald Peaks Hold Valleys Muting a bus This bus button enables you to temporarily suspend playback of the bus When a E E 44 100 Hz 16 bit bus is muted the word Muted appears at the bottom of the meter You may mute i ree ol Master Aa more than one bus at a time O EF 2 5 4 9 H To mute the bus simply click the Mute button Click the button again to restore the bus Soloing a bus Soloing isolates a bus s playback and mutes the other busses so that you can focus on a specific output You may solo more than one bus at a time To solo the bus simply click the Solo button Click the button again to restore all busses for playback Naming
376. situation If you are creating movies that need maximum quality however this may not be an option Trouble free video hardware solutions Even with a fast computer video is still a hardware challenge On the other hand it is definitely possible to properly configure a 400 MHz Pentium to work with large video files There are three parts of your PC that are important and the speed of your CPU is not necessarily the most critical The following list is arranged from the most to the least important Video subsystem Many graphics cards video boards primary display cards on a PC cannot handle full screen full frame rate video While this leads to jerky hesitating playback it may not actually be a serious problem A common video configuration is to have a separate video capture card and a primary display card In this case the playback using the primary display on the computer may be jerky but when you finally output the video to tape and view it on your television monitor there may not be any problems If you are not creating movies to go back to the television or VCR and you are experiencing stuttering playback you should consider using a smaller frame size 320X240 and frame rate 15 fps APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING 2606 hn Hard disk The second most common problem is slow hard disks Until recently fast expensive SCSI AV hard disks were required to properly capture and play back video on a PC Slow hard disk problems also manif
377. source media file ensure that Maintain aspect ratio is selected To restore the selection area to full frame right click the image and choose Restore from the shortcut menu e To set the selection area to a standard aspect ratio proportion choose a preset from the Preset drop down list The cropping occurs instantly and the results are updated in the Video Preview window Cropping applies to the entire event and can be animated with keyframes For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 215 R otat n g Video Preview Ei Sy eh sth Preview Quality ett E3 You can also rotate the selection area in the Event Pan Crop window If you rotate the entire frame the background behind the video shows through Position size and rotation can all be animated with keyframes For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 215 1 Click the Event Pan Crop button 4 on the event 2 Resize and move the selection area as desired For more information see Cropping on page 178 3 Move the mouse outside the selection area until it becomes a rotate icon C Drag to rotate the selection Project 720400432 29 97 Flame D573 area Alternately you may enter precise rotation values in ie sip se a the Angle degrees box Understanding the rotation clock As you drag to rotate the selection area the rotation clock displays The rotation clock works like an altimeter on an airplane The larger hand re
378. splay a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Properties The Event Properties dialog opens WORKING WITH EVENTS CHP 6 L 1 33 3 Click Re calculate to normalize the event again _ 4 Note You may set the maximum decibel level used by Vegas to calculate the event during normalization For more information see Audio tab on page 255 SS E Maintain aspect ratio video only Video and image files of various sizes and formats can be included in a single project The project itself may have a different frame size aspect ratio from the source media files This is not a problem but you must specify how Vegas handles these differences If the length to width ratio between the source media and the D 9 v ry project s frame size are the same e g source media at 320x240 and project frame size of 640x480 no aspect ratio distortion occurs If the ratios are not the same the source material may become distorted stretched or squashed By maintaining the aspect ratio of the original Vegas keeps the video from becoming distorted by letterboxing around the edges This is the default setting Mute deo Preview Lock The BMP media file in this Loop example is 320x100 while the lt Maintain Aspect Ratio project is set to 320x240 Resample Reduce Interlace Flicker h Oo rt Text Project 320 Frame 460 Preview 16081 Display 7601 Short Text deo Preview Mute Lock
379. ste repeat to specify how many times the Clipboard events are pasted at the cursor position on the selected track and to specify the space between each pasted event 1 Copy a selection to the Clipboard Paste Repeat ES 2 From the Edit menu choose Paste Repeat Vegas displays the Number of times to paste f Paste Repeat dialog Paste spacing T End to end 3 Specify the number of times to paste the Clipboard contents G Even spacing and the space between successive copies Paste eve 0 000 S Seconds 4 Click OK when finished Cancel Using paste insert When using paste insert Clipboard events are placed at the cursor position on the selected track and existing events on a track are moved further down the timeline by the total length of pasted information This action differs from ripple edit mode because pasting in ripple edit mode affects only the tracks in which material is pasted while paste insert affects all tracks in the project 1 Copy a selection to the Clipboard 2 From the Edit menu choose Paste Insert Clipboard contents Events before paste insert Events after paste insert 00 00 13 23 00 00 24 29 eee d a a 2000 29 23 ee eel E w DU 0UZ29 DUDU 29 E Sag BI Eee Events on all tracks not just tracks with pasted material are pushed down the timeline Punching in and crossfading events You can insert events into the middle of on top of existing events without alteri
380. support and dynamic RAM previews are only available in Vegas Video Understanding the Video Preview window The workspace for editing video can get quite crowded so the Video Preview window can be configured in a number of ways to make it more useful The Video Preview window can be used on a separate monitor if your video hardware supports this feature docked at the bottom of the workspace or floated freely on the screen Docked window Floating window gt Ole Q EA mountains av musicbed wav 4 narration 000 000 OC Video Preview ao i ef 75 Dk Sk Preview Quality A Q amp O Sk Preview Qualys By Ly narration 000 000 OC LC Panning with still images powderskier avi a Rect tga a Ricepaper tga w skiing avi sunset avi w talkinghead avi LU Project 720x480 32 29 971 Frame 75 Preview 360 240 32 29 97p Display 360 240 16 a Pere ay Project 720 480 32 29 971 Frame 75 __Text Backgrounds _ Preview 360x240x32 29 97p Display 360 240 16 Record Time 05 56 05 CHP 15 PREVIEWING VIDEO 230 r Preview Quality Bypass All Video FX Overlays Video Output FX cee Save Timeline Project Video Properties ek Zh Preview Quality ES Snapshot to File Preview on External Monitor L Copy Snapshot Properties status bar Preview 320424032 2997p Dieplay 120 240 16 Button Description Project Video Disp
381. t Right click a video event and choose Properties from the shortcut menu In the Video Event tab of the Properties dialog select the Resample check box For more information see Accessing event properties on page 124 e Resample project From the File menu choose Render As In the Render As dialog click the Custom button to access custom rendering settings Select the Resample the frame rate of all video check box For more information see Customizing the rendering process on page 241 The original media file looks something like this over three frames ee eee To convert these three frames into nine frames for a faster frame rate Vegas must generate the intervening frames o o o e e e eee Without resampling the intervening frames are simply the previous frame repeated e elelelslsl ee With resampling the intervening frames are interpolated from the source frames It is similar to a crossfade effect between the original frames Resampling at either the event or project level perform the same function There are few cases where resampling may be particularly important e When the frame rate of the source media for an event is slower than the project s frame rate For example when you are using a source media file that has a 10 fps rate in a 29 97 fps rate project resampling is recommended e When changing the speed of a video event For example when slowing a clip to 30 using a velocity envelope resampling is r
382. t settings once for any particular hardware setup Identifying problems Vegas Video refers to the two fields as Upper field first and Lower field first These are probably the most common terms used to distinguish the two fields and you may find a page in your hardware s manual that says something like Use a field order of lower first In many cases but not all or even most Upper Odd A and Lower Even B TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX A e 269 In Vegas you can select the field order of a project by choosing Properties from the File menu and clicking the Video tab The pre configured templates should work for almost everyone e g if you are editing and outputting DV video in the US select the NTSC DV template If you have problems you can manually select a different field order on the Video tab Upper field first or Lower field first You can also override the project settings and set the field order when you render a video file From the File menu choose Render As Then click the Custom button and set the Field order on the Video tab of the dialog that opens Field order can also be set at the level of the media file or event Right click a media file in the Media Pool or an event on the timeline and choose Properties The field order is found on the Media tab Vegas automatically detects the correct field order in most situations Interlacing problems only manifest themselves on television monitors Video that is only going to be pla
383. t the same time BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 l 03 Trimming an event beyond its end You can trim an event beyond its end extending it as a result Once extended the event loops as a default A notch indicates where the looped event repeats Alternately you can disable looping and make the last frame of a video event repeat a freeze frame for the remaining duration A notch appears at the point in the event where the video ends and the freeze frame begins For more information see Loop on page 121 Trimming adjacent events You can trim adjacent events simultaneously Hold Alt while dragging the common edge between two adjacent events The trim adjacent cursor appears Press Ctrl Alt over the boundary between two events and drag left or right to trim both events at once Trimming a time selection Trimming events removes all media outside the time selection The removed information is not placed on the Clipboard Trimming is different from cutting in that the events within the time selection are preserved 1 Select a time range For more information see Selecting a time range on page 85 2 Press ctri HT or from the Edit menu choose Trim The material outside the time selection across all tracks is removed from the project However the time information space between events is not removed Events before trim Clipboard contents Events after trim Trimmed information is not placed on the Cli
384. t this procedure to add and automatically crossfade the remaining background video files beach avi fireweed avi boat avi and sunset avi If you preview the project you can see the smooth transition between the crossfaded events The total length of these events when overlapped should be the same as the music bed The events can be repositioned by dragging them and can be trimmed slightly by dragging their edges The background video track should look something like the illustration below Compositing or video mixing in Vegas occurs from the top down Video in higher tracks obscures video in lower tracks At this point the talkinghead event obscures much of the underlying background video especially the mountain and fireweed events In section 8 Track Motion you will add track motion to change this behavior For now you can preview the crossfades by soloing the background video track Click the Solo button on the Background video track to do this Click the Solo button again once you have previewed the video Inserting a transition effect While almost all transitions in the movies and on television are either straight cuts e g no transition or some type of fade Vegas also has a number of more interesting transition effects available 1 From the View menu choose Transitions to open the Transitions window This window may already be open by default Click the Transitions tab in the docking area at the bottom of the works
385. taining the frames you want to cache 2 From the Tools menu choose Build Dynamic RAM Preview Vegas plays through the time selection and builds the cache frame by frame Identifying safe areas The Video Preview window in Vegas displays the entire video frame data However most television monitors do not display all of this data Previewing the video on a television monitor is the only way to verify what frame information will display You should also note that individual television monitors vary in what they display While there is no substitute for previewing on a television safe areas are a good method of estimating the extent of the masking 1 Click the down arrow on the Overlays button 7 and video Fane choose Safe Areas O ar 4b Preview Quality 23 BS lel 2 Click the Overlays button to toggle the safe areas display on or off The display shows two areas e The Safe Action area is the frame area that is visible on a television screen e The Safe Title area is a suggested area to limit the extent of titles It is always smaller than the Safe Action area To customize the safe areas choose Preferences on the Options menu and on the Video tab enter the Action safe area and Title safe area values as a percent of the frame size Project 3209240932 29 376 Frame B14 For more information see Video tab on page 254 Preview 3208240232 25 97 p Display 3208240276 Safe title Safe action PREVIEWING VIDEO CH
386. te button to mute only the selected track and restore any other muted tracks If the selected track is already muted press and click the Mute button to restore all tracks EE aoaomws aoaooaoaoaooo o o Muting all audio or video tracks You may mute either all audio or all video tracks in a project From the Options menu choose Mute All Audio or Mute All Video Soloing a track The Solo button on the Track header isolates a track s events for playback and mutes the other non soloed tracks This allows you to focus on a track s contents without the distraction of other tracks You may solo more than one track at a time To solo a track click the Solo button on that track To solo several tracks select the tracks and click the Solo button on any of the selected tracks Click the Solo button again to restore the track s for playback se Note Press and click the Solo button to solo only the selected track and restore any other soloed tracks If the selected track is already soloed press and click the Solo button to restore all tracks oss WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 a 1 37 Setting default track properties Wo v You can use the settings of a selected track to determine the Set Default Track PAREDES z default settings for all new tracks in your project Properties Select the properties to use az future defaults for new tracks These properties i fF th t track th
387. ted media when added Cutto overlap conversion Amount seconds 0 250 7 frames at 29 970 fps cares Ase _ 3 Click OK The Preferences dialog closes 4 Select all of the images you want to use in the Explorer 5 Right click and drag these files to the timeline 6 From the shortcut menu choose Add Across Time The crossfades between images can be replaced later by dragging transitions to the crossfade regions For more information see Using transition effects on page 211 It is best to use images that are the same size as your project s frame size You may also need to change the pixel aspect ratio of an image file to get it to display correctly For more information see Modifying media file properties on page 191 Creating titles Most video projects include titles and credits There are two ways to add text to your project You can use the Vegas titling engine text generator or you can use an external image editing program to create titles For more information see Using generated media on page 198 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 12 nS Creating titles from images While every software application is slightly different the general procedure for creating titles with a transparent background is as follows 1 Start your image editing application 2 From the File menu choose New Set the dimensions of the new image to be the same as the frame size for the project For more information see Correcting ima
388. temporary file check box or select a slower option in the Speed drop down list to prevent T Prerender to temporary file buffer underruns Total audio time on CD 39 29 37 Speed Estimated time to write one CO 05 28 Max lt 3 Click OK A progress meter displays as Vegas burns the CD 4 When the writing process is complete a confirmation message displays Click OK to clear the message a Note Do not click the Cancel button after the disc writing process has begun As with any CD creation process interrupting the writing process makes your disc unusable E a eeeeeeeFK CHP 11 BURNING AUDIO CDS BURNING AUDIO CDS CHP 11 177 CHAPTER v I ome R i 9 we Using Advanced gt o Video Features While simple to learn Vegas is a powerful application with many advanced features This chapter covers some of the advanced video features of this powerful tool Cropping video With the Event Pan Crop window you can resize media in a video event or selectively crop media without resizing The Stretch to fill frame check box allows you to resize the media to fill the output frame when selected or to crop out a portion of the media without resizing when cleared E E E 1 al L L l E B IZ Stretch to fill frame T Stretch to fill frame ee ee pop op op fl op o oo o ee eee When keyframes are added you can use this window to create scrolling panning or zooming effects
389. ten ence hed eee PE Oe he ee aa akeaki vada E 152 Using the Mixer Preview fader ccc cece eee eee eee eee e teen eee aeees 152 Using busses n any arate so annann anann 152 Adding busses to a project lt 153 Deleting busses from a project 2 2 a A RE a a i 153 Routing busses to hardware lt aide e e Gea Sew Hee atedebeSeererersadde a tab ceea ane amp dua dbckew woeera ek 154 Working With DUSSCS aking wero in nines Shee Cie REED eh et A eee ee bee og 154 ASSIGNING audio tracks to busses 4 4 8 5 Sn see oe See eee TS ERR a Ee ee aS 155 Using assignable effects Chains 0c eee 156 Assigning audio tracks to assignable effects chains 0 00 cece eee eee eee eens 157 Routing assignable effects chains to busses 00 cece eee eee eens 157 Rie eT see CA He nec at harder ane eae eee at eae eo 159 Setting up your EQUIDMENt lt lt lt lt e e eee eens 159 BASIS SEL oat teh E 0 eek a etek Sen sence be Braue oes Ses Ph a hdd ae ae 159 Sel WIEN y nE oc atotnatet ewan eens ced ookwinswiesiie tins hata a seers eee ees een we eet 160 Setup with digital mulitrack 2 2 5 6 4 5 04 2 ede dtd ta be Saas me Swe ee eee ee ee oe Roe ee 160 Preparing lO TeCOl O esetrae rea ate Giana hence eta G4 oe soa tae eee 8 160 Atiming the track fOr recordi 2 26008 codes tu paw bauwesie sites ibs E mates wes ee eek 161 Selecting recording settings lt 3i 4620 4 letras te btn Sek oo tbak E eee Mew taow eee 161 Using the m
390. ter cannot process the effects quickly enough for a real time preview By applying non real time event effects you can make a new copy of a media file with the effects applied to it This new media file is saved and added to the project as a take For more information see Working with takes on page 113 1 Select an audio event 2 From the Tools menu choose Audio 3 From the submenu choose Apply Non Real Time Event FX 4 In the Plug In Chooser dialog add plug ins to create a plug in chain For more information see Adding plug ins via the Plug Ins window on page 145 5 Click OK The Plug In Chooser dialog closes and the Non Real Time Event FX window appears 6 In the Non Real Time Event FX window adjust the settings for the plug in s to create the desired effect 7 Preview the effect by clicking the Preview button in the Non Real Time Event FX window Take Anywhere but somewhere E x Take Anywhere but somewhere oie ig ical gt c Y Chorus L IZ Distortion H Faragraphic EH 0 Cancel Preset jis dE notch centered at 1000 Hz lt x P SONIC FOUNDRY Paragraphic EQ 8 Click OK 9 In the Apply Non Real Time Event FX dialog click Save to save the newly processed media file The new media file is saved and added to the project as a take CHP 8 ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS CHP 8 151 CHAPTER Using the Mixer The Mixer window is where you control the project s busses an
391. ter resolution on page 154 You may also adjust the Preview fader to correct clipping in the same way you adjust a bus For more information see Adjusting a bus for clipping on page 155 Using busses Multiple audio busses are only available in Vegas Video A bus is a master control for the audio signal mix of one or more tracks Tracks can be assigned to play back on a specific bus For more information see Assigning audio tracks to busses on page 155 However to assign a track to a bus you must have more than one bus in your project Each project has a master bus as a default but you may add up to 25 additional busses to the Mixer window A bus is the last stage in the signal s flow through Vegas For more information see Audio Signal Flow on page 33 You may configure each bus to use a specific hardware output For more information see Audio tab on page 258 USING THE MIXER CHP 9 153 Bus control in Mixer Window Mute Prevents playback of the bus pg 155 Glee ge Name Solo Plays only the output of that bus pg 155 Mute ig_ 3 Playback device Fader Adjusts the bus s volume on two stereo channels Solo Pa E p Bus FX pg 154 Lock Unlock Locks the faders so the left and right channels of E Fader Channels stereo files always move together Click again to OE Meter unlock the faders Fader dd L Name _ _ Name of the bus Double click the name to edit it a pg 155 33 Playback devic
392. ter the closed captioning text you Position 00 02 22 24 want to display Cancel 5 Click OK 6 Repeat steps 1 5 for each line of closed captioning text you want to add 7 Render your file in Windows Media Video format For more information see Rendering a project on page 239 n e Note Take steps to ensure that the closed captioning displays when the video is played For more information see Displaying closed captioning on page 186 se Adding closed captioning from a script Using a script to generate closed captioning involves several steps First you must copy and paste the lines from the script into a spreadsheet You can create the spreadsheet from scratch using the steps that follow or use the sample shell Vegas Captioning Shell txt provided in the Samples folder on the Vegas CD You can open this tab delimited shell with a spreadsheet application or in the absence of a spreadsheet application any text editor Once the spreadsheet is complete you can copy and paste the lines into the Edit Details window You can set the position for each line of closed captioning during playback in Vegas USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 12 L 1 88 Creating a script spreadsheet 1 Create a four column tab delimited spreadsheet 2 In the first column enter 00 00 00 00 in each of the cells as a placeholder You will set the actual position of each line during playback in Vegas 3 In the second column enter TEXT in eac
393. test pattern Leader black duration seconds Trailer black duration seconds Back Cancel 4 Click Next The Device Setup dialog appears Choose the device control mode CHP 16 e Manual You must manually cue the device and set it to record e Use device control Enter a timecode value where the device will begin recording The device must support OHCI 1394 DV device control to use this option the percent completed ee Note The tone that can be included in the leader is fixed at 12 dB If you need a different tone level to match your audio mix create a test pattern and tone clip that is calibrated to your record deck ee Click Finish Vegas begins printing the selected video to the device A progress meter appears indicating SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 248 j Burning Video CDs CD burning is only available in Vegas Video You can render your project as an MPEG and burn it to a Video CD all in one step Video CDs can be played in many home DVD players and on computers with a CD ROM drive and VCD player software 1 From the Tools menu choose Burn CD and choose Video CD from the submenu The Burn Video CD dialog appears Burn ideo CD E Ea epai Browse anad IZ Render loop region only Estimated size Stretch video to fill output frame Free space IZ Fast video resizing Use an existing file Eile patt Burn mode Burm CDs T Test first then burn CDs T
394. the General tab select Make spacebar and F12 Play Pause instead of Play Stop to change the setting M a Scrubbing Scrubbing is a type of timeline playback that gives you precise control over the speed and direction of playback Vegas uses a logarithmic scale for scrubbing but Vegas also provides the option of selecting linear scrubbing For more information see General tab on page 256 Vegas provides three methods of scrubbing Scrubbing with the scrub control slider The Scrub Control slider can be dragged back and forth The farther from the center that the slider is dragged the faster the playback both forward and in reverse Below the slider is a small yellow marker that can be used to set the Normal Rate playback speed This is the speed at which the project plays when you click the Play button on the transport bar Rate 000 s fii Scrub Control slider Scrubbing on the timeline The second way that a project can be scrubbed is by positioning the Peer Le Penne T pn y mouse pointer over the timeline cursor at a location that is not over Uz K any events and holding down the key on your keyboard The h t ker j N h letche h Press Ctrl over Left click and cursor changes to a speaker icon Now when you left click the Oae EEE cursor icon changes again to a pan scrub icon When the mouse is dragged left or right the timeline is scrubbed You can also choose to enable timeline scrubbing when the mouse is positione
395. the equation dB 20 x log V1 V2 when comparing two instantaneous values Decibels are commonly used when dealing with sound because the ear perceives loudness in a logarithmic scale In Vegas most measurements are given in decibels For example if you want to double the amplitude of a sound you apply a 6 dB gain A sample value of 32 767 maximum positive sample value for 16 bit sound can be referred to as having a value of O dB Likewise a sample value of 16 384 can be referred to having a value of 6 dB Device Driver A program that enables Windows to connect different hardware and software For example a sound card device driver is used by Windows software to control sound card recording and playback Digital Signal Processing DSP A general term describing anything that alters digital data Signal processors have existed for a very long time tone controls distortion boxes wah wah pedals in the analog electrical domain Digital Signal Processors alter the data after it has been digitized by using a combination of programming and mathematical techniques DSP techniques are used to perform many effects such as equalization and reverb simulation Since most DSP is performed with simple arithmetic operations additions and multiplications both your computer s processor and specialized DSP chips can be used to perform any DSP operation The difference is that DSP chips are optimized specifically for mathematical functions while
396. then a quarter note gets one beat CHP 17 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS 256 r Summary tab This tab allows you to enter information about the project The boxes on this tab may be left blank or if information exists you may change it at any time Property Description Title Enter the name or title of the open project Artist Enter the name of the narrator band or artist s being recorded into the project Engineer Enter the name s of the people who mixed and edited the project Copyright Enter the date and ownership rights of the project Comments Enter information that identifies and describes the project Audio CD tab This tab allows you to enter information used when burning audio CDs in Vegas CD burning is only available in Vegas Video Property Description Universal If your CD R device supports writing UPC MCN codes you Product may specify the value in this field If you leave the field Code Media blank no UPC MCN value will be written to the CD Catalog Otherwise the value consists of 13 digits Number First track This sets the number for the first track on the disc number on disc Setting Vegas preferences The preferences options are different from project properties Project properties are unique to each project while preferences affect how Vegas functions Any changes that you make to the preferences remain set until you change them again or reset Vegas to use the default presets The Preferences dialog may
397. then dramatically slow it down again v Velocity envelopes are only available in Vegas Video Changing the velocity of an event 1 Right click the powderskier event and choose Insert Remove Velocity Envelope A horizontal blue line appears on the event This is the envelope 2 Drag the line up A ToolTip appears telling you the new playback rate Release the line at approximately 160 y Velocity at 00 00 02 624 is 162 3 Right click the envelope at the 16 000 second mark in the project and choose Add Point from the shortcut menu This adds a point node to the line that serves as a type of keyframe 4 Double click further down the line to add another point Reposition the new point below the first point you added Set 3 S x F Fr rT x this point to about 28 The entire line after this point moves oai e o a Velocity at 00 00 03 002 is 28 The event now plays at 160 speed until it gets to the pair of points where the video slows to 28 speed Summary In this section the powderskier event s speed was changed using a velocity envelope The envelope was animated so that the video started out playing very quickly and then dramatically slowed near the end CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS BS L 10 Rendering the project as an AVI Rendering refers to the process of converting the Vegas project into one file and formatting it for the desired playback method media player Internet streaming medi
398. tibility When you create a movie you must select a specific codec to compress the video That same codec must then be used to view the movie This is not a problem if you are viewing the movie on your own computer since the appropriate codec is already installed To ensure that your audience has the appropriate software you should use a fairly universal codec Intel Indeo Cinepak and QuickTime which is not a codec but installs with a number of different codecs are all widely available Internet When video on the Internet is discussed people almost always mean streaming There are two streaming media formats that come with Vegas RealMedia and Windows Media Format There is nothing particularly magical about streaming video and the three rules of creating video files for the Internet are as follows compress compress and compress The smaller the file size the better and this inevitably results in a loss of quality There are two main places where you can save space frame dimensions and frame rate Typical Internet video files should be about 160X120 and should rarely exceed 320X240 This is not very big and video with lots of detail does not translate well to this frame size The frame rate should also be as low as possible with 15 fps being a good maximum Fast action pans and moving backgrounds e g tree leaves or ocean waves do not compress well Streaming media files must be placed on a special Internet server in order to stream p
399. timeline Move left right one frame Move left right one frame Jump to opposite side of selection DUDU 29 Keys Ctrl Left Right Arrow 0 9 keys not numeric keypad Ctrl Alt Left Right Arrow Left or Right Arrow Alt Left Right Arrow Ctrl Alt Shift Mouse wheel Numeric keypad 5 Focus is used to describe which objects have the attention of a program For example when you click a file in the Media Pool the Media Pool window has focus To instantly switch the program s focus to the track view timeline press alt o or from the View menu choose Focus to Track View In Vegas it matters which track has focus when you perform a task For example when you double click a media file in the Explorer it is inserted into the track that has the focus You can click a track on its track number to make it the focus track A blinking white line under the track number and purple shading on the track header indicates a track has focus CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 84 Making selections Vegas gives you the flexibility to select one or more events a time range or events and a time range All selection options can apply to a single track or to multiple tracks To select an event click it Selecting multiple events By using the key the key or the Selection Edit tool f you may select individual or multiple events in your project Multiple events may be selected within a track or across tracks You may include o
400. ting and ripple editing events on page 87 Filling a time selection on the timeline two point editing You can select a range of time on the project timeline and then fill it with the same length selection from the Trimmer 1 Create a time selection in the timeline where you want to add the event This sets the duration and position of the event that you will create 2 Open the media file you want to use to fill the time selection in the Trimmer window 3 Right click the file in the Trimmer window and choose Sync Track View Selection Time from Cursor or Sync Track View Selection Time up to Cursor from the shortcut menu A time selection is automatically created on the file in the Trimmer window 4 Adjust the location of the time selection in the Trimmer as needed by dragging the time selection the area between the yellow triangles on the Trimmer marker bar 5 Drag the event from the Trimmer to the timeline and allow it to snap into place within the time selection Adding selections from a media file with audio and video You can open a file in the Trimmer that has both audio and video streams e g AVI When you add a selection from this type of file to the timeline both streams are added e If you select a video track before adding the selection Vegas adds the video to the selected track and adds the associated audio to the track below it e If you select an audio track before adding the selection Vegas adds the audio
401. tion in the Edit Details window 2 3 Click the Play button l to start playback A When playback reaches the place where the first caption should occur press K Vegas inserts the first caption at the cursor position updates the Position setting in the Edit Details window 0 00 29 29 and selects the next caption 5 Press K to insert each subsequent caption TEST But sort what light through yonder window breaks OO 0034 28 J 6 Render your file in Windows Media Video format For more information see Rendering a project on page 239 Displaying closed captioning You may use one of two methods for displaying the closed captioning when the video is played e Instruct your audience to turn on captioning In Windows Media Player 7 and 8 choose Now Playing Tools from the View menu and choose Captions from the submenu e Create an HTML page with the Windows Media player embedded in it See Vegas online help for a sample HTML page USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 12 L J Resampling video Resampling allows Vegas to interpolate frames in an event when the frame rate of a media file is lower than the project s frame rate With resampling the intervening frames are interpolated from the source frames much like a crossfade between the original frames You can instruct Vegas to resample the video of a single video event or to resample the entire project at the time of final rendering e Resample even
402. tion that you need E Vegas Online Help ioj x Toolbar BR B Print Options Glossary Shortcuts Creating a New Project The first step in creating your masterpiece with Vegas is to create a project C g a New Project S Project Pi 7 foes o create a new proje L S Information B Renaming a Project 1 From the File menu choose New The New Project dialog 1s pane 2 Rendering displayed Adding and Arranging Media k l F Editing Events on the Timeline 2 Use the New Properties dialog to set your project properties nr 3 Click OK to create the project kly create a project by clicking the New button E on You can quickly the toolbar Vegas will use the default settings but you can use the Project Properties dialog to edit the settings later The Contents tab provides a list of available help topics Doulbe click a closed book to open the pages and then click a topic page F The Index tab provides a complete listing of the help topics available Scroll through the list of available topics or type a word in the Type in the keyword to find box to quickly locate topics related to that word Select the topic and click the gps button The Search tab allows you to enter a keyword and display all of the topics in the online help that contain the keyword you have entered Type a keyword in the Type in the word s to search for box and click the ListTonies button Select the topic from the list and
403. tive and many other parameters can be controlled this way These three frames show the progression of a title across three keyframes Understanding the keyframe controller The keyframe controller appears at the bottom of the Video FX window used for transitions effects and generated media the Track Motion window and the Event Pan Crop window Cursor position Keyframes oono aaoodoz jonangiaa Ta Pavan Defom E OO in a video effects Light Rays O o L nnan chain can have Peski e S re G its own keyframes apenan Ta R AP E 00 00 00 16 eae 7 Sync Cursor Delete First Create Previous Last Next The cursor position is marked by a flashing line on the controller This position can also be automatically updated on the timeline with the Video Preview window also updating in real time to reflect changes Click the Sync Cursor button 18 on the keyframe controller to sync the keyframe cursor with the timeline cursor CHP 14 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 216 Sp Adding keyframes Every effect has a starting keyframe at the beginning left side of the keyframe controller This sets the initial parameters for the effect In order to animate the effect it is necessary to add another keyframe to the effect and change some of the parameters When you first add a new keyframe it has the same settings for the transition effect pan crop etc as the first keyframe You can then modify the settings of the new keyframe
404. to create the animation from the first keyframe settings to the second 1 Click the keyframe controller timeline to move the cursor where you want to add a keyframe The current position is marked by a blinking cursor 2 Click the Create Keyframe button 1 3 Modify the settings in the window for the new keyframe as desired Alternately you can automatically add a new keyframe by positioning the cursor in the keyframe controller and changing any parameters in the window Vegas adds a keyframe with the new settings at the cursor position Deleting keyframes 1 Select a keyframe in the keyframe controller 2 Click the Delete Keyframe button S Navigating in the keyframe controller Use the keyframe navigation buttons First Previous Next and Last to quickly jump to a keyframe Alternately press or gt to move to the previous or next keyframe Modifying keyframes After you create your keyframes you can move them copy and paste them and change the interpolation curves between them Moving keyframes You can move a keyframe within the keyframe controller by dragging it to a new position For track level keyframes you can also move the keyframes from track view For more information see Working with keyframes in track view on page 217 Copying and pasting keyframes Keyframes on the controller can be copied pasted and duplicated 1 Right click a keyframe 2 From the shortcut menu choose Copy 3 Ri
405. to rename or delete recorded takes as this may interrupt the synchronization aa Setting advanced Sync preferences From the Sync tab you may access advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button The Advanced Sync Preferences dialog appears with three tabs for MTC Input MTC Output and MIDI Clock Output The following sections display the selected tabs followed by definitions of the controls MTC Input Advanced Sync Preferences ajx This tab contains controls for MTC input It is displayed only if a MTC Input MTC Output MIDI Clock Output device is selected for MTC input on the Sync tab F Freewheel for timecode losg Free wheel slack time seconds 0 200 Free wheel for timecode loss When selected Vegas continues to C as c r Free wheel playback ti del 12 000 play for a specified period of time without chasing if timecode is lost G ine Ser Enabling this option can compensate for infrequent losses in Synchronization delay time seconds 2 000 E timecode monitoring If losses in timecode are frequent Offset adjust quarter frames fo F troubleshooting should be done on your hardware to find the cause of the problem a l UK C l Apply Free wheel slack time Specifies the amount of time that timecode Tera e can be lost before the Free wheel playback time starts A longer time is more tolerant of losses in the incoming timecode Free wheel playback time Specifies the amount of time that Vegas plays back a
406. to the previous track marker index markers are skipped Add to any of these keystrokes to select rather than jump For example press ctri Snitt 1 period to select from the cursor position to the next track marker The shortcut keystrokes can be used to jump the cursor while working on a project or during playback Moving track and index markers Track and index markers function just like markers and regions in Vegas pg 100 You can drag a track or index marker to move it along the CD layout bar Alternately you can use the Edit Details window to make precise adjustments ee 4 Note Move both the starting and ending markers for a track by pressing and dragging either of the markers annan Renaming track and index markers 1 Right click a marker and choose Rename from the shortcut menu that appears 2 Type a new name for the marker and press Enter CHP 11 BURNING AUDIO CDS i Deleting track and index markers You can delete a single track or index marker by right clicking it and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu To delete all markers at once right click the CD layout bar and choose Delete All from the shortcut menu Editing markers using the Edit Details window The Edit Details window provides a way to adjust the settings for a track or index 1 From the View menu choose Edit Details The Edit Details window displays 2 From the Show drop down list choose Audio CD Track List The track settin
407. to the selected track and adds the associated video to the track above it Vegas creates new tracks for the added media if necessary CHP 5 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES 118 r Adding and saving regions and markers to a media file The Trimmer allows you to add markers and regions to a media file in the same way that you add them to your project Media file markers and regions are different from project markers and regions The difference between the two is simply that project markers and regions affect a project while media file markers and regions are embedded in and saved with a media file For more information see Adding project markers and regions on page 100 Markers and regions that are added in the Trimmer are only temporary You must save them by clicking the Save button in the Trimmer window if you want to use them again after you close the project After the markers and regions are added and saved to the media file they are available when you open the media file in an audio editor program or in the Trimmer _ 4 Note Markers cannot be saved to media files with properties set to read only in Windows e aEo OoQ9Qoou6u _ Automatically saving Trimmer markers and Marker Region regions with media files x Ranstick0z_s T WAY C Media ll E 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences ab y 4 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 29 2 On the General tab select A
408. tory drop down list displays the media file s name first followed by the folder it is in Select this to reverse the names Markers and regions created at the media file level in the Trimmer can be saved to the file Frames can be displayed in the Video Preview during a render This will slow a render somewhat Full quality preview renders are cleaned up and deleted when a project is closed Select this if you want these prerendered files to be available later This allows media files to be edited in external editors audio image etc while they are contained in events in Vegas This allows you to use a multimedia keyboard to control playback of a project The WAV format is limited by a maximum file size of 2GB You can choose to render larger files as Sonic Foundry Wave64 files When regions and markers are added this option automatically prompts you for a name This does not happen when adding markers on the fly during playback Clear this check box to enable third party DV codecs Vegas uses the Sonic Foundry DV codec which offers improved DV video quality over the Microsoft codec as a default Select this option to have Vegas use the Microsoft codec to read DV files instead Select this option to create 100 AVI2 compliant files While these files conform to the standards not all applications follow these specifications and some programs may not be able to read them Disables dual processor rendering for AVI files Sele
409. ts in the track Carefully adjusted track envelopes can be set to move with the underlying events thus preserving this timing To lock all of the envelopes in a project to the events they are contained in click the Lock Envelopes to Events button F on the toolbar or from the Options menu choose Lock Envelopes to Events The lock can be toggled off by clicking the button again The original event a ao S Moving the event with 2 Bl S Lock Envelopes to Events enabled Moving the event with 2 a o 6 Lock Envelopes to Events disabled Rendering to a new track Rendering to a new track is only available in Vegas Video Rendering or mixing multiple tracks to a single track can be a good method of decreasing the complexity of a project and speeding up future renders The original tracks and their events are unaffected when you render mix to a single track Typically you would use this feature when you are finished refining a few tracks and want to combine them When you render multiple tracks any envelope or track effects that you have applied are rendered into the new track The original source files remain unaffected and the new track s are saved to a new file When working with DV files select a DV template to avoid any loss of quality For more information see Working in DV format on page 189 E Note Every video render that uses compression results in a loss of quality from the original source material The number of vi
410. ttings for this dialog are adequate These settings affect how Vegas renders transitions effects overlays and changes in velocity e Motion blur type Some effects and transitions can involve motion Advanced Video Ts or animation This list allows you to select whether the frames are Seas blurred slightly to create the illusion of motion on individual frames Pee Gee This can make computer generated animation appear more smooth a ee and natural Gaussian is the best choice in most situations where Deinterlace method Blend fields 9 blurring is required e Exposure time seconds This determines the time frame of the blurring Longer exposures gt 0 100 result in greater and more exaggerated blurring e Deinterlace method Source video from a television is interlaced When Vegas renders effects it needs to deinterlace the two fields that make up a frame The exact method used can be selected here although the default Blend fields is adequate in most situations Cancel Modifying media file properties Vegas tries to automatically detect the properties of your media files In most cases these properties do not need to be modified but there are times when you may need manual control over some of these attributes depending on the type of file and your specific hardware configuration 1 Right click a file in the Media Pool or an event on the timeline and from the shortcut menu choose Properties 2 Modify the parameters
411. tton To preview complicated transitions you may want to build a dynamic RAM preview or prerender the effect For more information see Building dynamic RAM previews on page 232 or Prerendering video on page 231 Modifying a transition Transitions are customizable in Vegas Video Vegas Video LE provides standard presets only All of the transitions in Vegas include several presets that create standard transitions Most transitions are highly customizable with many attributes that can be changed In addition transitions can be animated using keyframes For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 215 1 Click the Transition Properties button 2 vides Eee on the transition or right click the Transition tis oe oe p transition and choose Transition N lt Properties from the shortcut menu The l S Z SONIC FOUNDRY iris Video Event FX window appears A ennn 2 Change the parameters Changes are O E l i Uirection Iris in r updated in real time in the Video 2 A Feather _ Preview window For help on the S vas 0 a 0 e 0 Border H different controls in the Video FX Transition parameters Repeat L fi Repeat Y oo fi Center 0 500 Center YT 0 500 window click the Plug In Help button 2 to access online help Saving custom settings as a preset After modifying a transition it is possible to save the changes as a preset for use at a later time Default and custom presets
412. ues much of this might be confusing Even if you are familiar with keyframe animation the Event Pan Crop window is a complex and powerful tool For more information see Cropping video on page 177 Summary In this section motion was added to the last corporate_logo event using the Event Pan Crop window The logo flies in from the right across the screen and finally zooms back to its final position All of this was accomplished using keyframe animation techniques in the Event Pan Crop window 7 Fades 07_fades veg Fading whether fading the volume in and out on an audio event or fading to and from black on a video event is an easy process in Vegas Fading into a video event 1 Position the cursor at the upper left corner of the implosion event The l a iii _ i cursor changes to a fade icon ate E G 2 Drag the corner toward the center right of the event to about 0 500 seconds 7 pr P The blue diagonal line represents a half second fade in from black a Fading the volume gain of an audio event 1 Position the cursor at the upper right corner of the introgong event The cursor changes to a fade icon i 2 Drag the corner left toward the center of the event to about 11 000 seconds S laaa Gar A 060011078 6 00 d erai Gain at DU 00 1 1 078 ts 0 0 dB A curved blue line represents the fade out Fading the remaining events Apply the following fades to the rest of the project
413. ut Output together Click again to unlock the faders Fader and Fader and Meter Meter USING THE MIXER CHP 9 L 1 B7 COU Note To use the Output fader to control the wet dry mix of the assignable effects chain make sure you set each plug in to 100 wet Use the Output effects return fader to balance the dry track signal with the wet plug in signal S CC s You can work with assignable effects controls in much the same way you work with busses Use the same methods described earlier in this chapter for adjusting volume adjusting for clipping muting soloing and renaming For more information see Working with busses on page 154 Assigning audio tracks to assignable effects chains Assignable effects are only available in Vegas Video Assignable effects chains are made up of one or more plug ins that are used to add audio effects to a track s signal You can adjust the level of a track that is sent to an assignable effects chain using the multipurpose slider in the track header 1 Click the label on the multipurpose slider to display a drop down list PEE uue As mE Por Pane v Fan Center Bus 4 Inf Bus B 29 1 dB 2 Choose the assignable effects chain that the track will use 3 Drag the slider to adjust the level of the track sent to the assignable effects chain ee gt Note Assignable effects sends are pre volume by default To change to post volume right click the multipurpose slider and
414. utomatically save trimmer markers and regions with media file Adding regions as takes Once regions are saved with a media file either in the Trimmer window or in another application you can add the regions as takes to the timeline from the Explorer window In the Explorer window click the arrow next to the View button and select Region View from the drop down list A single media file may contain a number of separate regions These regions can be selected individually or as groups and inserted as takes into the timeline This is especially useful when loop recording numerous takes to a single file For more information see Working with takes on page 113 ea gt L H LI K D Bl Sy 0000 01 17 00 00 02 1417 00 00 01 00 7 Explorer Trimmer Media Fool Transitions iden Fz 6 Text Backe tafe Opening a file in an external audio editor from the Trimmer The Trimmer allows you to open your selected audio editing application e g Sound Forge to perform permanent edits to the media file After you make the necessary changes and save the file in the audio editor Vegas automatically updates the event Make sure that the media file s name and location remain the same For more information see Using an external audio editing program on page 106 To open the audio editor from the Trimmer click the Open in Audio Editor button W Using the Edit Details window The Edit Details window displays a database f
415. vailable in Vegas Video ON Using the composite level slider video only This slider determines the opacity of the video track Drag the slider to Background S e el control the transparency or blending of each track Left is 100 transparent watever 830 _it and right is 100 opaque You can also double click the percent to enter a specific value CHP 7 WORKING WITH TRACKS 136 Q _______ Phase inverting a track audio only The Invert Track Phase button inverts the audio track at its baseline in effect reversing its polarity Inverting a track while creating no audible difference is occasionally useful for matching transitions when mixing audio on separate tracks or fine tuning a crossfade You can also phase invert an audio event If an event on a track is inverted and you invert the track the event is doubly inverted restored to its original state For more information see Invert phase audio only on page 122 Muting a track The Mute button S on the track header temporarily disables playback of the track so that you can focus on another track When a track is muted it appears grayed out on the track view You may mute more than one track at a time To mute a track click the Mute button To mute several tracks select the tracks and click the Mute button on any of the selected tracks Click the Mute button again to restore the track s ee a Note Press and click the Mu
416. vent The second track has an introductory splash video implosion event that fades into the product s logo vegas_logo event That logo as well as the corporate logo is repeated at the end of the project The next four tracks contain the earlier work the voiceover the background video and the music bed Finally three audio events were added to three new tracks at the bottom of the project as sound effects for the introduction Here s what the project should look like so far 00 00 10 00 00 20 00 00 30 BRS overlay Bice eth IS Oo qp Level 100 0 P BEF Introduction By sik S Oo qp Level 100 0 P ERR Takinghead Gg ho S D E m qp Level 100 0 P j ie O Are D vot 3 0 db Pan Cene l pE Musicbed Qf r S 7 O Wok 0 0 dB mmx j Pan Cene l E bagon Ee l S gp Level 100 0 D Fi EE oc fed o HG Ie ERI no 9 S 0 I O Wok OOdB mmx j Pan Cene l F noise oO F F J O Wok OOdB mmx j Pan Cene l S B Introgong A S ole e CHP 2 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS 52 gt 6 Pan Crop motion 06_panning veg The Pan Crop tool can add dynamic motion to video or still image events We will use it here to animate the corporate_logo event at the end of the project This is a powerful tool with many advanced features such as keyframe animation In this tutorial we will highlight the tool without explaining the complexity of keyframe animation For more information s
417. vent Pan Crop window on the left has been used to create a selection area around the subject removing extraneous information from the outside of the video This creates a zoom effect that is similar to zooming in with a camcorder The Video Preview window on the right displays the event after cropping Crop Area Video Preview Evert Partie mums Z D k Preview Qualy a E Event Pan Crop Capital Dome Preset lianed lt 0 0 160 0 patie sy 1 ed eE T ll e Bana Sie J r fies3 xha 6 SA Center aae Sans E wR R i Angle degrees p A tel Smoothness ST jooo Z agnify view ZT 76 6 X Grid density US lt T TTT Preview Project 320 240x32 29 97p Preview 320 240x32 29 97p Frame 2 371 Display 320 240x16 Tozi oo sett tt H E c USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 12 L 179 1 Click the Event Pan Crop button 4 on the event 2 Drag the handles small boxes located around the perimeter of the selection area to change the size 3 Move the mouse to middle of the selection area until the cursor changes to a move icon TY Drag the selection area to reposition it Be aware of the following as you crop a video event To keep the selection area centered as you resize select the Size About Center button E1 To maintain the proportion of the selection area select the Lock Aspect Ratio button To prevent distortion of the
418. vi r i x lL Z oes of Video 320 240x24 30 000 fps J00 00 09 08 Cinepak C Explorer Timmer MedaPool Trensiions Videot Tags gt oo 00 Preview 32024032 3000p Displey Somos 29 20 Record Time 05 11 25 Status bar Transport bar CHP 1 The toolbar allows you to quickly access the most commonly used functions and features in Vegas From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar to specify which buttons are displayed OS iS ae esl Create new project Enable automatic crossfades le Open existing project Enable ripple edits K Ed Save project Lock envelopes Open project properties Ignore event grouping JB 6 2 e e e 0 SIEN R Cut selected events or time range Copy selected events or time range Paste items from clipboard into project Undo Redo Enable snapping to grid lines SISI ee lee Normal edit tool Envelope edit tool Selection edit tool Zoom edit tool What s This help INTRODUCTION 20 p Time display The Time Display window reflects the cursor s position on the timeline and the end point of a time selection The Time Display window s time settings may be customized including what time the window displays and color usage For more information see Using the Time Display window on page 253 The Time Display window may be moved from its docked position above the track headers to float on the Vegas workspace In addition the Time Dis
419. video file does not alter the contents of the file For example no frames are ever dropped or removed when using SMPTE 29 97 drop frame timecode Instead specific frame numbers are periodically dropped to compensate for differences between timecode and time in the real world Confusion between using drop versus non drop timecode can cause synchronization problems between video and audio For very short periods of time the error would be unnoticeable After about a half an hour you might notice that mouths and words do not quite match in shots of people speaking Longer stretches of time show larger discrepancies in synchronization Changing the timecode displayed on an event is not equivalent to converting a video to another format You cannot convert NTSC video at 29 97 fps to PAL video at 25 fps by simply changing the timecode To convert NTSC video to PAL video in Vegas you need to re render the video in the new format In this situation the conversion process necessarily results in some frames of video actually being removed from the original sequence SMPTE timecode types The following are descriptions of each of the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE timecode types SMPTE 25 EBU 25 fps Video SMPTE 25 EBU timecode runs at 25 fps and matches the frame rate used by European Broadcasting Union EBU television systems Use SMPTE 25 EBU format for PAL DV D1 projects APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING 270 r
420. w options 133 volume fader 78 134 Transitions 211 adding 212 animating 215 from auto crossfades 212 from cuts 213 modifying 214 using 211 window 26 Transparency 126 and overlays 208 Transport bar 21 79 80 keyboard shortcuts 28 Triggering recording from MIDI timecode 165 Trimmer window 23 115 118 audio editor opening from 118 events placing on track 116 opening a file in 115 overview 115 regions and markers adding 118 three point editing 116 two point editing 117 working with 116 Trimming 92 93 adjacent events 93 beyond event edges 93 selected events 92 time and event selection 93 time selection 93 Troubleshooting audio 263 264 video 263 271 Tutorial 35 58 Undersample rate 124 Undo Redo commands 98 99 clearing history 99 Vegas installing 17 overview 19 32 registering 17 Velocity envelope 127 Version limitations 16 INDEX N Video Capture capturing video with 69 printing to tape with 245 recapturing offline clips with 70 Video CDs 248 Video compression 58 Video effects 193 198 animating 198 keyframes 198 modifying 197 ordering 195 removing 197 window 26 Video masks 204 Video motion See Track motion Video previews capturing images from 181 230 dynamic RAM previews 232 external monitor 235 histograms 233 optimizing 230 234 prerendering 231 previewing in a player 234 resolution 231 shortcut menu
421. wer field first 7 C i ck S ave P copr and tim madia with praject T Render loop region only A status bar appears in the lowetr left portion of Vegas and T Stretch video to fill output frame size do not letterbox IZ Save project markers in media file a dialog pops up displaying the progress of the render Upon completion of the render your new media file is ready for distribution and playback _ SS 4 Note You may cancel the rendering process by clicking the Cancel button on the status bar S KK Sample projects This section describes sample projects that demonstrate different Vegas features The sample project files are included on the program s CD ROM in the Sample Projects Sample Projects folder Open each sample project file preview the project and examine all the different elements used to create the finished product Audio mix This sample audio mix includes a voiceover track and 12 instrumental tracks The rendered file is the audio track for the TV spot and Web spot with captioning projects Track effects Track EQ and Track Compressor are used to add presence to the voiceover track Click the Track FX button sa on the track header to view the effects For more information see Using audio effects on page 143 TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS CHP 2 L B9 Panning The instrumental tracks use a variety of track panning settings Examine the gt SS marimi BO A Fo multipurpose slider on the track
422. when required 4 At the last screen prompt click Finish to conclude the installation a gt Note Vegas uses the Windows Installer for all versions of Windows e g 98SE ME Vegas installs the Windows Installer and then asks you to restart your system PR Registration The registration dialog that appears when you start Vegas allows you to quickly and easily register e Register online instantly registers the product over the Internet e Register from another computer if the computer Vegas is installed on does not have an Internet connection but you have another computer that does e Register over the phone call Sonic Foundry to register manually e Register later allows you to continue using Vegas for a limited time without registering Follow the instructions in the registration dialog to complete your Vegas registration Using online help Vegas includes online help To view the online help you must have Internet Explorer 4 0 or higher loaded on your system IE 5 0 is included on the Vegas CD ROM Accessing help The online help is available in two forms in a main help window or What s This help window Both forms are available via the keyboard Fi or by clicking the Help menu CHP 1 INTRODUCTION 18 r Main help window The main help window is accessed either by choosing Contents and Index from the Help menu or by pressing Fi This window has four tabs that you can use to find the informa
423. wn the tracks or to move forward and back along the timeline e Click the Zoom tools to reveal more or less of the timeline e Drag the edge of the scroll box found on the scroll bar to zoom e Press the up 4 and down y arrow keys to zoom in and out along the timeline Click the Zoom Edit Tool 14 button or from the Edit menu choose Editing Tool and then choose Zoom In this mode drag on the timeline to draw a rectangle that defines the zoom region Scroll box tools Note You can also access the Zoom Edit Tool from the lower right corner of the track view al Vegas also supports mouse wheel control The default behavior of the wheel is to zoom horizontally wheel scrolls horizontally through time ctri wheel scrolls vertically Ctrl Shift wheel moves the cursor in small increments Ctrl Shift Ait wheel moves the cursor in one frame increments Clicking the mouse wheel enables and disables auto panning Zooming directly controls the accuracy of your editing Each video event has thumbnail representations of the frames within the event Depending on how far you have zoomed in on a video event a thumbnail can represent the entire event or a single frame in the event CHP 3 a Note You can choose to display frame numbers time or timecode on video event thumbnails For more information see Displaying frame numbers on page 251 fT GETTING STARTED 76 Changi
424. y Border In the following illustration you can see how the order of plug ins is important fa Sonic Foundry Brightness and Contrast H Video Event Fes Video Event Fa fire c Y Brightness and Contrast LTG Black and White Video Event Fx Video Event Fx fire o Black and White H Y Brightness and Contrast The goal of the above example is to use video effects plug ins to create a very high contrast mask out of a video clip of fire In the image on the left a Brightness and Contrast plug in is applied first and then a Black and White plug in In the image on the right the Black and White plug in was applied first removing the color and then the Brightness and Contrast plug in was applied The mask created by the second example is much cleaner even though all of the settings of the two plug ins are identical USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 13 L 197 Removing a plug in 1 Click the FX button i on the event track Media Pool file or Video Preview window that has the plug in applied to it The Video FX window appears 2 Click the plug in that you want to remove 3 Click the Remove Selected Plug In button Video Event Fx Video Event FX Capital Dome c Film Effects HI Sepia Add Noise bo Preset Untitled A Remove Selected Plug In Modifying a video effects plug in Video effects plug ins are highly customizable You may select from a variety of presets or adjust the sett
425. y right clicking a file and choosing Add to Media Pool H from the shortcut menu Explorer Timmer 7 Media Fool Transitions Video FX lt Test B EDD Trimmer window Alt 2 The Trimmer window is a good place to edit any media file When a media file is placed in the Trimmer window you may take portions of the file and place them on separate tracks by dragging and dropping For more information see Using the Trimmer window on page 115 CHP 1 00 00 00 00 4 x RainstickO2_s 1 Ww C Media zla of amp a e gal i gt gt WO N gt BI 00000017 0000 0217 00 00 01 00 Explorer Trimmer Media Pool lt Transitions lt Video Ea lt Text Backe alr INTRODUCTION 24 r Mixer window Alt 3 The Mixer window gives you access to your project s audio properties bus assignments output levels and plug in chains For more information see Using the Mixer window on page 151 z Mixer 44 100 Hz 16 bit Audio Properties CE Insert PX Insert Bus A Bus A B Bus B E Distortion E 0 k J dR R 2 Bl Jat Inf 22 2E ae A7 a4 55 IN 54 43 OUT 64 61 3 E IE 3 3 4 L 4 4 3 45 has s 45 45 21 31 21 31 21 27 a7 27 a7 27 33 33 33 33 33 39 39 39 39 39 45 45 45 45 45 51 51 51 51 51 57 57 57 57 57 0 0 A er H 8 ce al a Tn A Edit Details window Alt 4 This window serves as a highly detailed and customizable database of all of the events in a project Th
426. y track This instantly creates an identical copy of the event 3 Position the newly duplicated event so that it ends at the same time as the end of the music bed 4 Drag the left edge of the event back to the 30 000 second mark The duration of the event is now roughly ten seconds 5 Duplicate the vegas_logo event in the Introduction track and position it so that it ends with the end of the music bed S E ere eee eer ere Hea E S E L jh S n m da TUTORIAL AND SAMPLE PROJECTS CHP 2 MM Adding sound effects to the introduction We will add some sound effects to three new tracks at the bottom of the project 1 Locate the introwarp wav audio file in the Explorer 2 Drag introwarp wav to the timeline below the lowest track This creates a new track with the new introwarp event 3 Repeat with the remaining two sound effects 6 introtabla wav start 0 000 6 introgong wav start 3 500 timed to match the action of the implosion event 4 Double click the scribble strip for each new track and name it as shown in the figure below honap GQ t SI I 7 yo OOd j Par Cener l z Introtabla G S A E 7 O yo 0 0 dR j Pan Cener l 9 if Intragong le Summary All of the media files that are going to be used have now been inserted into the project The events and tracks have all been repositioned to their final locations The first track contains the transparent overlay corporate_logo e
427. yed back on a computer does not need to be interlaced and you can select None progressive scan for the field order Rendered video must be displayed on a television monitor to identify any problems The only way to see interlacing problems is to record print a rendered video file out to tape and play back the tape on a television Problems are most apparent in video that has a lot of motion or that has been modified in some way for example a slow motion effect Some codecs force the correct field order during a render making it difficult or impossible to create video with the wrong field order Solving interlacing problems in Vegas Video If your hardware s documentation does not contain any information about the proper field order you must determine this information for yourself It is not a difficult process and involves rendering one video file with an upper first field order and another with a lower first field order Source material that dramatically and clearly demonstrates the improperly interlaced video is important use a media file with a lot of motion in it and then slow the event down with a velocity envelope or by time stretching the event Timecode Timecode is a method of labelling frames with a unique and searchable identifier It is primarily important for synchronizing video in frames per second with time in the real world and in the case of Vegas with other media in a project Changing the timecode used to measure a
428. your own rate The sample rate range is 2 000 Hz to 96 000 Hz Vegas Video or 2 000 Hz to 48 000 Hz Vegas Video LE Higher sample rates result in better quality sound but also mean larger audio files Bit depth Choose a bit depth from the drop down list A higher bit depth results in better quality sound but also means larger audio files Resample Choose Preview Good or Best resample quality quality Recorded files Displays the path where recorded audio is stored The folder Browse button allows you to select a new location to store recordings Free storage Displays the available disk space where recorded audio is space in stored selected folder Ruler tab This tab allows you to change ruler settings used in your project You may also change ruler settings on the track view For more information see Changing the ruler format on page 251 Item Description Ruler time Choose a ruler time format from the drop down list format Ruler start time Enter a value that the ruler will use at the beginning of your project This feature is useful for synchronization purposes Beats per Enter the desired number of beats per minute for the minute tempo project Beats per Enter the desired number of beats to occur per measure measure for the project Note that gets The value entered will determine the time signature used one beat by the ruler when its format is set to Measures and Beats For example if the entered value is 4

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manual XL Serie deutsch  Hotpoint BG51 B/P User's Manual  ViewSonic VE710b/VE710s User's Manual  Honorarplaner 8 HandbuchB.indd - bki  Brodit ProClip  Intel Server Board S3420GPRX  Gel à massage pour les muscles à base de plantes  340261 AFC Service Manual.pmd  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file